Uh-60 Atm 31 Jan 19

UNITED STATES ARMY AVIATION
CENTER OF EXCELLENCE
Fort Rucker, Alabama
31 January 2019
UH-60 Series
Aircrew Training Module
****PROPONENT: Directorate of Training and Doctrine
ATTN: Flight Training Branch: usarmy.rucker.avncoe.mbx.atzq-tdt-f@mail.mil
with the subject line of "Aircrew Training Module."****
DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION. Approved for public release, distribution is unlimited.

AIRCREW TRAINING MODULE
Update Page
Recommended ATM Changes Submitted to Flight Training Branch

on Department of the Army (DA) Form 2028 NLT:
01 SEP 19
Next Revision Publication Date:
31 JAN 20
Flight Training Branch Contact information and the DA Form 2028 can be found at:
www.us.army.mil/content/armyako/en/mycommunities/Home/groups/TRADOC/Groups/
AvnCoE/Sites/DOTD/sites/training-division/Groups/FlightTrainingBranch/files.html
Email DA Form 2028's to Flight Training Branch at:

usarmy.rucker.avncoe.mbx.atzq-tdt-f@mail.mil
AIRCREW TRAINING MODULE
APPROVAL PAGE
Digitally signed by POHLMAN.MATTHEW.SCOTT.1155373764

REVIEWER: POHLMAN.MATTHEW.SCOTT.1155373764 Date: 2019.01.30 16:21:10 -06'00'
CW5 MATTHEW S. POHLMAN, CHIEF, FLIGHT TRAINING BRANCH DATE
Digitally signed by MEACHAM.JIMMY.LEE.1110595049

APPROVAL: MEACHAM.JIMMY.LEE.1110595049 Date: 2019.02.01 13:19:10 -06'00'
COL GEORGE G. FERIDO, DIRECTOR OF TRAINING AND DOCTRINE DATE

SUMMARY of CHANGES
UH-60 Aircrew Training Module (ATM) This comprehensive revision, dated 31 January 2019–
o Added "Update Page" in the ATM to indicate when changes(s)/revision cycle (etc.) is due
o Added “Change Bar(s)” in the ATM to indicate a change(s)/updates
o Added Semi-Annual Flying Hour Requirements Table
o Added "Note" in MTL * Either or for evaluations

o Added " * " in MTL Task 1182 Perform Unusual Attitude Recovery
o Removed Door Gunner Tasks in MTL. Door Gunners are considered NRCM IAW AR 95-1
o Removed "C" MTL Task 1425 – Employ Aviator's Night Vision Imaging System
o Updated "Module 4" Reference to module 8
o Updated Task 2060 Perform Rescue Hoist Operations
o Updated Task 2120 Provide Patient Evacuation and Treatment
o Added "Note" in task 4228
o Added Appendix F
AIRCRAFT QUALIFICATION AND MISSION EQUIPMENT TRAINING
Prerequisites and training requirements for aircraft/series qualification of air crew members (ACMs) are in Army
regulation (AR) 95-1, (Aviation Flight Regulations), AR 95-20 (Contractor's Flight and Ground Operations), this
publication, the MTL and applicable program of instruction (POI)/training support package (TSP). Flight and
academic instruction described in the appropriate United States Army Aviation Center of Excellence (USAACE)
POI/TSP are the minimum training requirements.
MODULE 1
Similar and Series Group Aircraft Table

Flying Hour Requirements Table
Synthetic Flight Training Systems Table
Similar and Series-Group Aircraft Table
1. As designated in Training Circular (TC) 3-04.11, (Commander’s Aviation Training and

Standardization Program), these accompanying tables are required for the management
and standardization of the Aircrew Training Program (ATP).
2. Similar Aircraft. The following aircraft are considered similar. Task iteration, flying
hour, and evaluation requirements may be completed in similar aircraft. See TC 3-04.11
for more information.
 AH-64D/E  OH-58A/C, TH-67A
 C-12C/D1/D2/J/R/R1/U/V  RC-12D/H/K/N/P/X
 CH-47D/F  RQ-7B, RQ-7Bv2
 Mi-17 1V/V5  UH-60A/L, HH-60A/L, VH-60A/L, UH-60M,
HH-60M, VH-60M
 MQ-1C
 UH-72A
Note. NRCMs may maintain aircraft currency in similar aircraft.
3. Series-Grouped Aircraft. The following aircraft are series grouped. Aircraft

currency may be maintained in the following groupings.
 AH-64D/E  OH-58A/C, TH-67A
 C-12C/D1/D2  RC-12D/H
 C-12J  RC-12K/N/P
 C-12R/R1  RC-12X
 C-12U  RQ-7B, RQ-7Bv2
 C-12V  UH-60A/L, HH-60A/L, VH-60A/L
 CH-47D  UH-60M, HH-60M, VH-60M
 CH-47F  UH-72A
 Mi-17 1V/V5
 MQ-1C
4. Night vision device currency will be in accordance with (IAW) TC 3-04.11
1-1
1. As designated in TC 3-04.11, these accompanying tables are required for the
management and standardization of the Aircrew Training Program.
Semi-Annual Flying Hour Requirements Table
AIRCRAFT FAC 1 FAC 2 FAC 3 FAC 4 NVD N H/W

UH-72A 48 30 0 0 9 PCG PCG
UH-60A/L 48 30 0 0 9 PCG PCG
UH-60M 48 30 0 0 9 PCG PCG
CH-47D 45 33 0 0 9 PCG PCG
CH-47F 45 33 0 0 9 PCG PCG
OH-58A/C 40 30 0 0 9 PCG 3
TH-67 40 30 0 0 9 PCG 3
AH-64D/E 70 50 0 0 9 PCG PCG
Note: All AH-64 Aircrew Members will be designated dual seat. Dual seat aviators have
the following semi-annual flying hour requirement:
FAC 1 - Requires 15 hours which must be flown at each crew station.
FAC 2 - Requires 7.5 hours which must be flown at each crew station.
Mi-17 45 30 0 0 PCG PCG PCG

C-12 55 30 0 0 0 PCG PCG
RC-12 55 30 0 0 PCG
NRCM/NCM 24 (12 RC/NG) 5 PCG 0
MQ-1C 12 6 0 0 N/A N/A N/A
RQ-7B 12 6 0 0 N/A N/A N/A
Note: For MQ-1C/RQ-7B
FAC 1 - Requires 4 hours must be flown at each crew station.
FAC 3 - Requires no crew duties authorized with Army unmanned aircraft systems (UAS).
Note: There is no provision for FAC 3 Fixed Wing aviators.
PCG = Per Commander’s Guidance
1-2
Flying Hour Requirements (Cont.)
2. Non-rated crewmember (NRCM)/Non-crewmember (NCM) Flying Hour Requirements will be IAW
the table above which is derived from Army Regulation (AR) 600-106 (Flying Status for Non-Rated
Army Aviation Personnel) and Department of Defense Financial Management Regulation
(DODFMR) 7000.14-R, Vol. 7A. Refer to these regulations for further guidance. All NVG RL 1
NRCM's (AC/RC/NG) will fly a minimum of 5 hours at night, semi-annually while performing crew
duties and wearing NVGs.
3. Experimental test pilots will fly 48 hours annually in primary category and 24 hours in their alternate
category.
4. Flight Surgeon flight requirements are listed in AR 600-105 and DOD 7000.1.14-R Volume 7A.
Aviation Physician Assistants flight requirements are listed in AR 600-106 and DOD 7000.1.14-R
Volume 7A.
5. Night vision device (NVD) RL1 rated crewmember (RCM) aviators will have a minimum
requirement of 9.0 hours NVD semi-annually in their primary aircraft. If RL1 in more than 1 NVD then
a total of 9.0 hours semi-annually with a minimum of 3.0 hours in each NVD.
6. Rotary wing NVG RL1 RCMs and DA Civilians - 9 hours of NVG flight, of which a minimum of 6
hours must be flown at night in the aircraft from a crew station with access to the flight controls while
using NVGs. The other 3 hours maybe flown in a accredited compatible flight simulator for the
following aircraft type: UH-60, CH-47, and Mi-17. (This requirement is not applicable to AH-64
aircrews)
7. AH-64 series IPs are not required to be NVS current in order to instruct/evaluate NVS in the simulator
or operating an aircraft with black out curtains installed.
8. The Army National Guard (ARNG) has established a requirement for a UH-72A synthetic flight
training system (SFTS) for ARNG aviators. To meet ARNG established training requirements, the
ARNG procured 8 portable UH-72A SFTS devices to move and position for utilization based on
operational requirements. The ARNG established UH-72A annual simulator flying hour requirements
that only apply to National Guard (NG) UH-72A aviators and documented those minimums in the NG
supplement to AR 95-1 (1 May 2018). As established by the ARNG, Component (COMPO) 2 UH-72A
aviators must achieve a minimum of twelve, eight, or twenty-four hours in a compatible simulator for
Flight Activity Category (FAC) 1, 2, and 3 aviators respectively.
1-3
Simulator Annual Flying Hour Requirements
SIM FAC 1 FAC 2 FAC 3 FAC 4 NRCM

UH-72A1 12 8 24 0 0
UH-60A/L 18 12 10* 0 0
UH-60M 18 12 10* 0 0
CH-47D 18 12 10* 0 0
CH-47F 18 12 10* 0 0
OH-58A/C 0 0 0 0 0
TH-67 0 0 0 0 0
AH-64D/E2 15* 9* 24* 0 0
Note1. UH-72 Simulator minimums apply only to NG aviators IAW NG
Supplement to AR 95-1.
Note2. AH-64:
FAC 1 - Requires 4.5 hours must be flown at each crew station.
FAC 3 - Requires 24 hours of which may be flown in either crew station.
Mi-17 18 12 10* 0 12
C-12 0 0 0 0 0
RC-12 0 0 0 0 0
MQ-1C 24* 12* 6* 0 N/A
RQ-7B 24* 12* 6* 0 N/A
Note. MQ-1C/RQ-7B
FAC 1 - Requires 8 hours must be flown at each crew station. FAC 2
- Requires 4 hours must be flown at each crew station. FAC 3 -
Requires 2 hours must be flown at each crew station.
* = Semi-annual
Note. All Active, RC and NG rotary wing RCMs outside of a 200 statue mile radius of a
compatible flight simulator; Commanders will tailor a comprehensive compatible SFTS
training program based off the units resources, effectiveness and feasibility. If the required
SFTS training is not cost effective or feasible, a unit waiver for this requirement shall be
obtained from the first O-7 within the chain-of-command. Unit waivers will be renewed
every two years from date of signature. O-6 Commanders/ State Army Aviation Officers
still retain individual waiver authority IAW AR 95-1. During an operational deployment,
O-6 Commanders and State Army Aviation Officers are authorized unit waiver approval
for SFTS requirements IAW AR 95-1.
1-4
Synthetic Flight Training Systems Table
Accredited Rotary Wing Synthetic Flight Training Systems (SFTS)

Device Designation Aircraft Compatibility Annual Instrument
A/MH-6M Combat Mission Simulator, Light Attack/Assault A/MH-6M
Reconfigurable (LASAR)
AH-64D Longbow Crew Trainer AH-64D X
2B64D
AH-64E Longbow Crew Trainer AH-64E X
2B64E
CH-47 Transportable Flight Proficiency Simulator CH-47F X
2B47F
MH-47 Combat Mission Simulator MH-47 X
2B47G
MH-60M Combat Mission Simulator MH-60M X
2BMH60M
MH-60K Combat Mission Simulator MH-60K X
2B46
UH-60 Blackhawk Aircrew Trainer (BAT) UH/HH-60M X
2B60M
UH-60 SFTS UH-60A/L X
2B38
UH-60 Transportable Black Hawk UH-60L UH/HH-60M X
Operations Simulator (TBOS)
2B60M / 2B60L
UH-60 / CH-47 Non-Rated Crewmember Manned Module None
2B60NCM / 2B47NCM
UH-72 Flight Training Device UH-72A X
2C72A
UH-72 SFTS UH-72A X

2B72A
Mi-17 Cockpit Procedure Trainer Mi-17 X
2CMi17
Mi-17 Flight Training Device Mi-17 X
2BMi17
1-5
Accredited Unmanned Aircraft System (UAS) Training Systems
Device Designation Aircraft Compatibility
Gray Eagle Ground Control Station Embedded Trainer MQ-1C
MQ1ET
Gray Eagle Universal Mission Simulator MQ-1C
MQ1UMS
Gray Eagle Portable Institutional Mission Simulator MQ-1C
MQ1PIMS
Raven Mission Simulator RQ-11B

RQ11BMS
Shadow Ground Control Station Embedded Trainer RQ-7B
RQ7ET
Shadow Crew Trainer (NG) RQ-7B
RQ7SCT
Shadow Universal Mission Simulator RQ-7B
RQ7UMS
Shadow Portable Institutional Mission Simulator RQ-7B
RQ7PIMS
1-6
MODULE 2
Aircrew Catalogue of Academic Topics

Aircrew Catalogue of Academic Topics (ACAT)
UH60 – Academic evaluation topics.
Preface: The following academic topics represent a summary of professional aviation knowledge
areas that have been identified as necessary for successful aviation operations. They can be
divided into two major domains of knowledge, each with specific properties and requirements.
These domains are Foundational Knowledge, and Operational Knowledge and are defined
below.
1. Foundational Knowledge. This knowledge forms the foundation of all professional
aviation knowledge. Application of knowledge learned in this domain will be evaluated
during RL progression, annual unit academics, and on the annual written exam.
2. Operational Knowledge. This knowledge is specific to the mission and unit mission
essential task list (METL), addressing both tactical and technical subjects and includes the
application of Foundational Knowledge topics. It is knowledge required to train, fight and
win in all phases of Unified Land Operations (ULO), Large Scale Combat Operations
against peer/near-peer, and emerging threats. Each crewmember should continue to increase
competence in all the subject areas below. These topics will be evaluated for designation to
RL1 as well as on the annual APART evaluation.
Note. Operational Knowledge topics will be identified in each subject area through the use
of bold face type.
The tasks identified with an asterisk (*) apply to RCMs only.
3. Mission operations (ATP 3-04.1, TM 4-48.09, FM 2-0, FM 3-52, TC 3-04.11, appropriate

aircraft operator’s manual, chapter 4 of this ATM, and unit SOP). Topics in this subject area
are:
• Air Assault operations.

• Air Movement operations.
• Medical Evacuation operations.
• Deliberate Personnel Recovery operations.
• Internal load operations.
• External load operations.
• Volcano operations.
• Terrain flight planning and safety.
• Tactical formation.
• CASEVAC operations.
H60 - ACAT 2-1

4. Tactical operations (ATP 3-04.1, TM 4-48.09, FM 2-0, FM 3-52, TC 3-04.4, TC 3-04.11,
appropriate aircraft operator’s manual, chapter 4 of this ATM, TC 3-21.60 [Visual Signals]
and unit SOP). Topics in this subject area are:
• ASE systems and employment.

• Downed aircraft procedures.
• Fratricide prevention.
• Communication security (COMSEC).
• Mission equipment.
• Actions on contact.
• Maneuvering flight.
• CBRN operations.
• Fire support.
• Identify/Demonstrate signals; i.e. hand and arm, light, airfield, shipboard and ground.
5. Weapon system operation and employment (ATP 3-04.1, TC 3-04.45(.3), M60D/M240H

operator’s manual, appropriate aircraft operator’s manual, and unit SOP). Topics in this
subject area are:
• Weapons initialization, arming, and safety.

• Range estimation.
• Operation and function of the M60D/M240H.
• Duties of the door gunner.
• Visual search and target detection.
• Fire control/fire commands.
• Weapons employment during night and NVD operations.
• Techniques of fire and employment.
• Weapon system limitations.
6. NVG operations (TC 3-04.4, appropriate aircraft operator’s manual, NVG operator’s
manual, and unit SOP). Topics in this subject area are:
• NVG limitations and operations.

• ANVIS HUD operations.
• NVG tactical operations to include lighting.*
• NVG terrain interpretation, map preparation, and navigation.
• Use of internal and external lights.
• NVG nomenclature, characteristics.
• Hemispherical illumination.
• NVG ground and air safety.
• NVG aircraft modifications.
• NVG effects on distance estimation and depth perception.
H60 - ACAT 2-2

7. Night mission operations (TC 3-04.4). Topics in this subject area are:
• Night vision limitations and techniques.

• Visual illusions.
• Use of internal and external lights.
• Types of vision.
• Unaided night flight.
• Distance estimation and depth perception.
• Dark adaptation, night vision protection, and central night blind spot.
• Night terrain interpretation, map preparation, and navigation.
8. Aircraft emergency procedures and malfunction analysis (appropriate aircraft operator’s

manual). Topics in this subject area are:
• Engine malfunctions.*
• Chip detectors.*
• Fires.
• Flight control malfunctions.*
• Rotor, transmission, and drive system malfunctions.*
• Fuel system malfunctions.*
• Hydraulic system malfunctions.*
• Electrical system malfunctions.*
• Landing and ditching procedures.
• Stabilator malfunctions.*
• AFCS malfunctions.*
• Emergency terms and their definitions.
• Emergency exits and equipment.
9. Operating limitations and restrictions (appropriate aircraft operators manual). Topics in this
subject area are:
• Power limitations.*
• Maneuvering limits.*
• Performance planning.*
• Rotor limitations.*
• Loading limitations.
• Temperature, weather, environmental limitations/restrictions.*
• Wind limitations.*
• Engine limitations.*
• Aircraft system limitations.*
• Airspeed limitations.
H60 - ACAT 2-3

10. Aircraft systems, avionics, and mission equipment description and operation (appropriate
aircraft operator’s manuals and chapter 4 of this ATM). Topics in this subject area are:
• Avionics.
• Flight instruments.*
• MARK XII IFF.
• Cargo handling systems.
• Armament.
• Engines and related systems.
• Emergency equipment.
• Flight control and automatic flight control system (AFCS) system.
• Fuel system.
• Powertrain system.
• Hydraulic and pneumatic system.
• Utility system.
• Main and tail rotor groups.
• Auxiliary power unit (APU).
• Heating, ventilation, cooling, and environmental control unit.
• Electrical power supply and distribution systems.
• Lighting.
• Servicing, parking, and mooring.
11. Regulations and publications AR 95-1, DA PAM 738-751, Department of Defense flight
information publication (DOD FLIP), TC 3-04.11, TC 3-04.5, appropriate aircraft operator’s
manual; Interactive Electronics Technical Manual (IETM) EM 0271, chapters 2, 4, and 6 of
this ATM, and local and unit SOPs. Topics in this subject area are:
• Aviation life support equipment (ALSE).

• Inadvertent IMC procedures.*
• Weight and balance requirements.
• Crew coordination.
• Unit SOP and local requirements.
• Airspace regulations and usage.*
• ATP requirements.
• Flight plan preparation and filing.*
• Forms, records, and publications in the aircraft.
• VFR/IFR minimums and procedures.*
• DOD flight information publications and maps.*
H60 - ACAT 2-4

12. Aerodynamics (TC 3-04.4 and appropriate aircraft operator’s manual). Topics in this
subject area are:
• Settling with power.*

• Autorotation.*
• Dynamic roll over.*
• Relative wind.*
• Retreating blade stall.*
• Airflow during a hover.*
• Compressibility.*
• Total aerodynamic force.*
• Transverse flow.*
• Translating tendency.*
• Dissymmetry of lift.*
• Effective translational lift (ETL).*
13. Aeromedical factors (AR 40-8, TC 3-04.93). Topics in this subject area are:
• Spatial disorientation.
• Stress and fatigue.
• Flight restrictions due to exogenous factors.
• Hypoxia.
• Middle ear discomfort.
• Principles and problems of vision.
14. ME and MP topics (DA PAM 738-751, Interactive Electronics Technical Manual (IETM)
EM 0271, applicable maintenance test flight manuals, the maintenance section of this ATM,
and applicable aircraft operator’s manual). Topics in this subject area are for MEs and MPs
only:
• Engine start.
• Instrument indications.
• Electrical system.
• APU system.
• Power plant.
• Engine performance check.
• Power train.
• Hydraulic system and leak detection isolation.
• Flight controls.
• Vibrations.
• Fuel system.
• AFCS system.
H60 - ACAT 2-5

• Communication and navigation equipment.
• Maintenance operational check/maintenance test flight (MOC/MTF) requirements.
• Warning systems indications.
• MTF weather requirements.
15. Evaluator/trainer topics FAA-H-8083-9 Aviation Instructor's Handbook. Topics in this

subject area are:
• The learning process.

• Human behavior.
• Effective communication.
• The teaching process.
• Teaching methods.
• The instructor as a critic.
• Types of evaluations.
• Instructional aids.
• Planning instructional activity.
• Techniques of flight instruction.
• Flight instructor characteristics and responsibilities.
• ATP and centralize aviation flight records system (CAFRS) management.
H60 - ACAT 2-6

MODULE 3
UH-60 Aircrew Master Tasks List

Master Task List
The MTL is a consolidated listing of all individual tasks that apply to the operation of the airframe
covered. The table below lists the minimum required modes of flight for training, PFE types and
annual evaluations. The ATP commander may select additional modes of flight for the tasks listed on
the MTL as required to support unit METL and training programs.
Legend
Task Training Requirements

(M) Mandatory
(O) Optional
Symbol Job
(PI) Pilot/Aviator
(IP) Instructor Pilot
(IO) Instructor Operator
(AO) Aircraft Operator
(IE) Instrument Examiner
(SP) Standardization Pilot
(FC) Functional Check Pilot
(MP) Maintenance Pilot/Maintenance Evaluator
(NC) Non-Crewmember
(NR) Non-Rated Crewmember
(FE) Flight Engineer
(FI) Flight Instructor (Non-Rated)
(OT) Other Non-Crewmembers (Flight Surgeon, etc.)
Training Modes Proficiency Flight Evaluations* Annual Evaluations

(T) Technical (A) Aircraft (C) CBRN
(D) Day (G) NVG (G) NVG
(I) Instrument (V) NVS (I) Instrument
(N) Night (S) Standardization
(G) NVG (M) Maintenance
(V) NVS
(C) CBRN
1. All CBRN tasks may be conducted in the SFTS or approved flight simulator.
2. Instrument (I) in the evaluation column does not apply to NRCM, NCM or DG..
3. Units without a MTOE/TDA allocation of CBRN equipment are exempt from the training and evaluation requirements
prescribed in the MTL IAW TC 3-04.11.
4. Tasks 2013 and 2014 may be demonstrated during RL3 progression during operational deployments or other
operations when the use of ASE and tactical communications is required for all aviation operations.
Note. Task numbers in the MTL denoted with an Asterisk (*) can be evaluated in EITHER a Standardization Evaluation OR
Instrument Evaluation.
(UH60) 3-1
Aircrew Master Task List for UH60AL
Aviator (PI): Base Task Training
Task Number Title Training PFE Ann Eval
T D I N G V C A G V I G C S M
ACC-1000 M Participate in a Crew Mission Briefing T A G I S

SRW-1004 M Plan a Visual Flight Rules (VFR) Flight T S
SRW-1006 M Plan an Instrument Flight Rules (IFR) Flight T I
237-1010 M Prepare a Performance Planning Card T A G I S
237-1011 M Determine Dynamic Inflight Performance T I S
ACC-1012 M Verify Aircraft Weight and Balance T S
237-1013 M Operate Mission Planning System T I S
237-1014 M Operate Aviation Life Support Equipment (ALSE) T I S
237-1016 M Perform Internal Load Operations T S
237-1020 M Prepare Aircraft for Mission T S
ACC-1022 M Perform Pre-Flight Inspection T A G I S
237-1024 M Perform Before-Starting Engine through Before-Leaving T C A G I G C S
Helicopter Checks
237-1026 M Maintain Airspace Surveillance D I N G C A G I G C S
237-1028 M Perform Hover Power Check T C A G I G C S
237-1032 M Perform Radio Communication Procedures T A G I S
237-1034 M Perform Ground Taxi D N G A G G S
237-1038 M Perform Hovering Flight D N G C A G G S
237-1040 M Perform Visual Meteorological Conditions (VMC) Takeoff D N G C A G G S
237-1044 M Navigate by Pilotage and Dead Reckoning D N G S
237-1046 M Perform Electronically Aided Navigation T I S
237-1048 M Perform Fuel Management Procedures T A G I G S
237-1052 M Perform VMC Flight Maneuvers D N G A G G S
237-1054 M Select Landing Zone-Pickup Zone-Holding Area T S
237-1058 M Perform VMC Approach D N G C A G G C S
237-1062 M Perform Slope Operations D N G A G G S
237-1064 M Perform a Roll-On Landing D N G A G G S
237-1066 O Perform Extended Range Fuel System Operation T
237-1068 M Perform Go Around D N G G S
ACC-1070 M Respond to Emergencies D I N G A G G S
237-1082 M Perform Autorotation D N G S
237-1142 M Perform Digital Communications T S
237-1155 M Negotiate Wire Obstacles D N G S
237-1162 M Perform Emergency Egress T S
237-1166 M Perform Instrument Maneuvers I I
237-1168* M Perform Command Instrument System Procedures T I S
237-1170 M Perform Instrument Takeoff I I
237-1174 M Perform Holding Procedures I I
237-1176 M Perform Non-Precision Approach I I
237-1178 M Perform Precision Approach I I
237-1182* M Perform Unusual Attitude Recovery D I N G I S
237-1184 M Respond to Inadvertent Instrument Meteorological D N G G S
Conditions (IIMC)
237-1194 M Perform Refueling Operations T
3-2
237-1253 M Operate Flight Management System (FMS) (HH-60) T S
237-1254 M Operate Multifunction Display (MFD) (HH-60) T S
SRW-1425 O Employ Aviator's Night Vision Imaging System (ANVIS) G G G
SRW-1426 O React to ANVIS Failure G G G
SRW-1427 O Operate Heads-Up Display (HUD) for ANVIS T
ACC-1500 M Participate in a Crew-Level After-Action Review T A G I S
Aviator (PI): Tactical Training

SRW-2012 O Perform Tactical Flight Mission Planning T

237-2013 O Operate Aircraft Survivability Equipment (ASE) T
237-2014 O Perform Tactical Communications Procedures T
237-2022 O Transmit Tactical Report T
237-2024 O Perform Terrain Flight Navigation
237-2026 O Perform Terrain Flight
237-2034 O Perform Masking and Unmasking
237-2040 O Perform Evasive Maneuvers
237-2042 O Perform Actions on Contact
237-2048 O Perform External (Sling) Load Operations
237-2052 O Perform Water Bucket Operations
237-2053 O Perform Firehawk Operations
237-2054 O Perform Fast-Rope Insertion and Extraction Operations
237-2056 O Perform Rappelling Operations
237-2058 O Perform Special Patrol Infiltration - Exfiltration Operations
237-2060 O Perform Rescue Hoist Operations
237-2061 O Operate Forward Looking Infrared System T
237-2064 O Perform Paradrop Operations
237-2068 O Perform Shipboard Operations
237-2070 O Perform M-139 Volcano Operations
237-2075 O Perform Fat Hawk Operations T
237-2076 O Perform Caving Ladder Operations
237-2078 O Perform Helocast Operations
237-2098 O Perform Aerial Radio Relay T
237-2127 O Perform Combat Maneuvering Flight
237-2169 O Perform Aerial Observation
ACC-2900 O Perform Counter Threat Maneuvers (Single-Aircraft)
Aviator (PI): Mission Training (to support collective training)

237-3010 O Perform Multi-Aircraft Operations
3-3
Maintenance Test Pilot (MP): Maintenance Training
237-4000 M Perform Prior to Maintenance Test Flight Checks T

237-4001 M Respond to Critical Situations During Test Flight Maneuvers D M
237-4081 M Perform Before-Starting Engine Checks T
237-4088 M Perform Starting Engine Checks T
237-4090 M Perform Engine Run-Up and Systems Checks T
237-4113 M Perform Integrated Vehicle Health Monitoring System T
Operations
237-4156 M Perform Hover Checks D
237-4193 M Perform In-Flight Checks D
237-4200 M Perform Backup Tail Rotor Servo Check D M
237-4202 M Perform Generator Underfrequency Protection Disable - D M
Low Rotor Revolutions Per Minute Check
237-4204 M Perform Compasses, Turn Rate, and Vertical Gyros- D
Automatic Heading Reference System Checks
237-4220 M Perform Maximum Power Check/TGT Limiter Check D M
237-4228 M Perform Vibration Absorber Check and Tuning D M
237-4236 M Perform Autorotation Revolutions Per Minute Check D M
237-4254 M Perform Vh Check D M
237-4284 M Perform Engine Shutdown Checks T
237-4288 M Perform Gust Lock - Rotor Brake Operations T
Maintenance Evaluator (ME): Instructor/Trainer Tasks

ACC-5000 O Operate a Flight Simulator T

ACC-5100 M Instruct Academic Subjects T M
ACC-5105 M Evaluate Aircrew Academic Knowledge T M
ACC-5200 M Instruct Aircrew Member Tasks T M
ACC-5205 M Evaluate Aircrew Tasks T M
ACC-5300 M Administer Aircrew Member Evaluation T M
Instructor Pilot (IP): Instructor/Trainer Tasks


ACC-5100 M Instruct Academic Subjects T S
ACC-5105 M Evaluate Aircrew Academic Knowledge T S
ACC-5200 M Instruct Aircrew Member Tasks T S
ACC-5205 M Evaluate Aircrew Tasks T S
ACC-5300 M Administer Aircrew Member Evaluation T S
3-4
Instrument Flight Examiner (IE): Instructor/Trainer Tasks

ACC-5100 M Instruct Academic Subjects T I
ACC-5105 M Evaluate Aircrew Academic Knowledge T I
ACC-5200 M Instruct Aircrew Member Tasks T I
ACC-5205 M Evaluate Aircrew Tasks T I
ACC-5300 M Administer Aircrew Member Evaluation T I
ACC-5555 O Develop an Emergency Global Positioning System (GPS) T
Recovery Procedure (Manual Only)
Non-Rated Crewmember (NRCM): Base Task Training

ACC-1000 M Participate in a Crew Mission Briefing T A S

237-1014 M Operate Aviation Life Support Equipment (ALSE) T S
237-1016 M Perform Internal Load Operations T A S
237-1020 M Prepare Aircraft for Mission T C A C S
ACC-1022 M Perform Pre-Flight Inspection T A G S
237-1024 M Perform Before-Starting Engine through Before-Leaving T C C S
Helicopter Checks
237-1026 M Maintain Airspace Surveillance D N G C A G G C S
237-1032 M Perform Radio Communication Procedures T S
237-1048 M Perform Fuel Management Procedures T A G G S
237-1066 O Perform Extended Range Fuel System Operation
ACC-1070 M Respond to Emergencies D N G A G G S
237-1108 O Perform Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) Operations
SRW-1425 O Employ ANVIS G G G
ACC-1500 M Participate in a Crew-Level After-Action Review T S
3-5
Non-Rated Crewmember (NRCM): Tactical Training
237-2013 Operate Aircraft Survivability Equipment (ASE)

237-2075 O Perform Fat Hawk Operations
237-2112 O Operate Armament Subsystem
237-2120 O Perform Patient Evacuation and Treatment
237-2122 O Operate Mission Medical Interior Cabin Systems
Non-Rated Crewmember (NRCM): Mission Training (to support collective

training)
Flight Instructor (FI): Instructor/Trainer Tasks


3-6
Unit Trainer: Instructor/Trainer Tasks

Flight Surgeon/Aeromedical Physician’s Assistant/Enroute Critical Care

Nurse/Aviation Psychologist: Base Task Training
ACC-1000 M Participate in a Crew Mission Briefing T S


Nurse/Aviation Psychologist: Tactical Training
237-2120 O Perform Patient Evacuation and Treatment T S

237-2122 O Operate Mission Medical Interior Cabin Systems T S
Commanders (C): Leader Tasks

Task Number Title
ACC-6000 O Conduct Troop Leading Procedures

ACC-6001 O Conduct Aviation Mission Briefing
ACC-6002 O Conduct Aviation Mission Rehearsals
ACC-6003 O Conduct a Mission
ACC-6004 O Conduct Formal and Informal After Action Reviews
3-7
Aircrew Master Task List for UH60M
Aviator (PI): Base Task Training
ACC-1000 M Participate in a Crew Mission Briefing T A G I S

SRW-1004 M Plan a VFR Flight T S
SRW-1006 M Plan an IFR Flight T I
280-1010 M Prepare a Performance Planning Card T A G I S
280-1011 M Determine Dynamic Inflight Performance T I S
280-1013 M Operate Mission Planning System T I S
280-1014 M Operate Aviation Life Support Equipment (ALSE) T I S
280-1016 M Perform Internal Load Operations T S
280-1020 M Prepare Aircraft for Mission T S
ACC-1022 M Perform Pre-Flight Inspection T A G I S
280-1024 M Perform Before-Starting Engine through Before-Leaving T C A G I G C S
Helicopter Checks
280-1026 M Maintain Airspace Surveillance D I N G C A G I G C S
280-1028 M Perform Hover Power Check T C A G I G C S
280-1032 M Perform Radio Communication Procedures T A G I S
280-1034 M Perform Ground Taxi D N G A G G S
280-1038 M Perform Hovering Flight D N G C A G G S
280-1040 M Perform VMC Takeoff D N G C A G G S
280-1044 M Navigate by Pilotage and Dead Reckoning D N G S
280-1046 M Perform Electronically Aided Navigation T I S
280-1048 M Perform Fuel Management Procedures T A G I G S
280-1052 M Perform VMC Flight Maneuvers D N G A G G S
280-1054 M Select Landing Zone - Pickup Zone - Holding Area T S
280-1058 M Perform VMC Approach D N G C A G G C S
280-1064 M Perform a Roll-On Landing D N G A G G S
280-1066 O Perform Extended Range Fuel System Operations T
280-1068 M Perform Go Around D N G G S
ACC-1070 M Respond to Emergencies D I N G A G G S
280-1082 M Perform Autorotation D N G S
280-1142 M Perform Digital Communications T S
280-1155 M Negotiate Wire Obstacles D N G
280-1166 M Perform Instrument Maneuvers I I
280-1167* M Perform Instrument Maneuvers with Standby Flight Display T I S
280-1169* M Perform Flight Director Operations T I S
280-1170 M Perform Instrument Takeoff I I
280-1174 M Perform Holding Procedures I I
280-1176 M Perform Non-Precision Approach I I
280-1178 M Perform Precision Approach I I
280-1182* M Perform Unusual Attitude Recovery D I N G I S
280-1184* M Respond to Inadvertent Instrument Meteorological D N G G S
Conditions (IIMC)
3-8
280-1253 M Operate Flight Management System (FMS) T S
280-1254 M Operate Multifunction Display (MFD) T S
280-1260 M Operate Digital Map T S
SRW-1427 O Operate Heads-Up Display (HUD) for ANVIS T
ACC-1500 M Participate in a Crew-Level After-Action Review T A G I S
Aviator (PI): Tactical Training

SRW-2012 O Perform Tactical Flight Mission Planning T

280-2013 O Operate Aircraft Survivability Equipment (ASE) T
280-2014 O Perform Tactical Communications Procedures T
280-2022 O Transmit Tactical Report T
280-2024 O Perform Terrain Flight Navigation
280-2061 O Operate Forward Looking Infrared System T
280-2075 O Perform Fat Hawk Operations T
280-2098 O Perform Aerial Radio Relay T
280-2127 O Perform Combat Maneuvering Flight
Aviator (PI): Mission Training (to support collective training)

3-9
Maintenance Test Pilot (MP): Maintenance Training
280-4000 M Perform Prior to Maintenance Test Flight Checks T

280-4001 M Respond to Critical Situations During Test Flight Maneuvers D M
280-4081 M Perform Before-Starting Engine Checks T
280-4088 M Perform Starting Engine Checks T
280-4090 M Perform Engine Run-Up and Systems Checks T
280-4113 M Perform Integrated Vehicle Health Monitoring System T
Operations
280-4156 M Perform Hover Checks D
280-4193 M Perform In-Flight Checks D
280-4200 M Perform Backup Tail Rotor Servo Check D M
280-4202 M Perform Generator Underfrequency Protection Disable - D M
Low Rotor Revolutions Per Minute Check
280-4220 M Perform Maximum Power Check/TGT Limiter Check D M
280-4236 M Perform Autorotation Rotor Revolutions Per Minute Check D M
280-4254 M Perform Vh Check D M
280-4284 M Perform Engine Shutdown Checks T
280-4288 M Perform Gust Lock - Rotor Brake Operations T
Maintenance Evaluator (ME): Instructor/Trainer Tasks


ACC-5100 M Instruct Academic Subjects T M
ACC-5105 M Evaluate Aircrew Academic Knowledge T M
ACC-5200 M Instruct Aircrew Member Tasks T M
ACC-5205 M Evaluate Aircrew Tasks T M
ACC-5300 M Administer Aircrew Member Evaluation T M
Instructor Pilot (IP): Instructor/Trainer Tasks


3-10
Instrument Flight Examiner (IE): Instructor/Trainer Tasks

ACC-5100 M Instruct Academic Subjects T I
ACC-5105 M Evaluate Aircrew Academic Knowledge T I
ACC-5200 M Instruct Aircrew Member Tasks T I
ACC-5205 M Evaluate Aircrew Tasks T I
ACC-5300 M Administer Aircrew Member Evaluation T I
ACC-5555 O Develop an Emergency Global Positioning System (GPS) T
Recovery Procedure (Manual Only)
Non-Rated Crewmember (NRCM): Base Task Training

ACC-1000 M Participate in a Crew Mission Briefing T A S

280-1016 M Perform Internal Load Operations T A S
280-1020 M Prepare Aircraft for Mission T C A C S
ACC-1022 M Perform Preflight Inspection T A G S
280-1024 M Perform Before-Starting Engine through Before-Leaving T C C S
Helicopter Checks
280-1026 M Maintain Airspace Surveillance D N G C A G G C S
280-1048 M Perform Fuel Management Procedures T A G G S
280-1066 O Perform Extended Range Fuel System Operations
ACC-1070 M Respond to Emergencies D N G A G G S
280-1108 O Perform Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) Operations
3-11
Non-Rated Crewmember (NRCM): Tactical Training
280-2013 O Operate Aircraft Survivability Equipment (ASE)
280-2075 O Perform Fat Hawk Operations
280-2112 O Operate Armament Subsystem
280-2120 O Perform Patient Evacuation and Treatment
280-2122 O Operate Mission Medical Interior Cabin Systems
Non-Rated Crewmember (NRCM): Mission Training (to support collective

training)
Flight Instructor (FI): Instructor/Trainer Tasks


3-12
Unit Trainer: Instructor/Trainer Tasks


Nurse/Aviation Psychologist: Base Task Training
ACC-1000 M Participate in a Crew Mission Briefing T S


Nurse/Aviation Psychologist: Tactical Training
280-2120 O Perform Patient Evacuation and Treatment T S

280-2122 O Operate Mission Medical Interior Cabin Systems T S
Commanders (C): Leader Tasks

Task Number Title
ACC-6000 O Conduct Troop Leading Procedures

ACC-6001 O Conduct Aviation Mission Briefing
ACC-6002 O Conduct Aviation Mission Rehearsals
ACC-6003 O Conduct a Mission
ACC-6004 O Conduct Formal and Informal After Action Reviews
3-13
MODULE 4
UH-60 Crewmember Tasks

UH-60 Crewmember Tasks
If a conflict exists between this section and the TC 3-04.11, the TC 3-04.11 takes precedence.
TASK CONTENTS.
1. Task title. The task title identifies a clearly defined and measurable activity. Titles may be the same
in several ATMs, but tasks may be written differently for the specific airframe.
2. Conditions. The conditions specify the common conditions under which the task will be
performed. Reference will be made to a particular helicopter within a design series when necessary.
References to the H-60FS in the conditions do not apply to NRCM. All conditions must be met before
task iterations can be credited. Normally, conditions are specified for wartime missions of the aircraft.
a. Common conditions are—
(1) In a mission aircraft with mission equipment and crew, items required by AR 95-1 and
publications.
(2) Under VMC or IMC.
(3) Day, night, and NVD employment.
(4) In any terrain or climate.
(5) CBRN including MOPP equipment employment.
(6) Electromagnetic environmental effects.
b. Common training/evaluation conditions are—
(1) When a UT, IP, SP, IE, or ME is required for the training of the task, then that individual will be at
one set of the flight controls while the training is performed. Evaluators/trainers who are
evaluating/training NRCMs must be at a crew station without access to the flight controls, except when
evaluating crew coordination, conducting a local orientation flight, or conducting a no-notice
evaluation.
(2) The following tasks require an SP, IP, or IE—as appropriate—to perform these tasks in the aircraft:
● Task 1070, Respond to Emergencies.
● Task 1082, Perform Autorotation.
● Task 1182, Perform Unusual Attitude Recovery.
c. Unless specified in the task considerations, a task may be performed in any mode of flight without
modifying the standards or descriptions. When personal equipment (NVG, MOPP, HUD, and so forth) or
mission equipment (water bucket, rescue hoist, and so forth) is required to perform the task, the availability
of that equipment becomes part of the conditions.
d. Simulated IMC denotes flight solely by reference to flight instruments. A Vision restricting device
will be utilized when logging hood on the DA Form 2408-12.
e. Base tasks requiring specialized equipment do not apply to aircraft that do not have the equipment.
f. NVG use may be a condition for any flight task. When NVG are listed as a condition, task
standards will be the same as those described for performance of the task without using NVG.
g. The aircrew will not attempt the tasks listed below when performance planning and the hover
power check indicates that OGE power is not available.
● Task 2048, Perform Sling Load Operations.
● Task 2052, Perform Water Bucket Operations.
● Task 2054, Perform Fast-Rope Insertion and Extraction System Operations.
● Task 2056, Perform Rappelling Operations.
● Task 2058, Perform Special Patrol Infiltration/Exfiltration System Operations.
● Task 2060, Perform Rescue Hoist Operations.
● Task 2076, Perform Caving Ladder Operations.
011-237/280 (UH60) 4-1

3. Standards. The standards describe the minimum degree of proficiency to which the task must be accomplished.
The terms, “without error,” “properly,” and “correctly” apply to all standards. The standards are based on ideal
conditions. Many standards are common to several tasks. Individual trainer, instructor, or evaluator pilot techniques
are not standards and are not used as grading elements. Unless otherwise specified in the individual task, the
following common standards apply. Alternate or additional standards will be listed in the individual tasks.
a. All tasks.
(1) Do not exceed aircraft limitations.
(2) Crewmembers will comply with all evaluation considerations, warnings, cautions, and notes in the
task.
(3) Perform crew coordination actions per module 8.
b. Hover.
(1) Maintain heading ±10 degrees.
(2) Maintain altitude, ±3 feet (±5 feet for OGE). *
(3) Do not allow drift to exceed 3 feet (10 feet for OGE hover). *
(4) Maintain ground track within 3 feet.
(5) Maintain a constant rate of movement appropriate for existing conditions.
Note. These standards (*) require that the other crewmembers announce drift and altitude changes
before exceeding the standard.
c. Inflight.
(1) Maintain heading ±10 degrees.
(2) Maintain altitude ±100 feet.
(3) Maintain airspeed ±10 KIAS.
(4) Maintain ground track with minimum drift.
(5) Maintain rate of climb or descent ±200 FPM.
(6) Maintain the aircraft in trim ±½ ball width.
d. All tasks with the APU/engines operating (RCMs and NRCMs).
(1) Maintain airspace surveillance (Task 1026).
(2) Apply appropriate environmental considerations.
4. Description. The description explains the preferred method for accomplishing the task to meet the standards.
This manual cannot address all situations; therefore, alternate procedures may be required. Other techniques may
be used, as long as the task is accomplished safely and the standards are met. The description applies in all
modes of flight during day, night, IMC, NVG, or CBRN operations. When specific crew actions are required, the
task will be broken down into crew actions and procedures as follows:
a. Crew actions. These define the portions of a task performed by each crewmember to ensure safe,
efficient, and effective task execution. The designations P* (pilot on the controls), and P (pilot not on the
controls) do not refer to PC duties. When required, PC responsibilities are specified. For all tasks, the
following responsibilities apply.
(1) All crewmembers. Perform crew coordination actions, and announce malfunctions or emergency
conditions. Monitor engine and systems operations, and avionics (navigation and communication) as
necessary. During VMC, focus attention primarily outside the aircraft, maintain airspace surveillance,
and clear the aircraft. Provide timely warning of traffic and obstacles by announcing the type of hazard,
direction, distance, and altitude. Crewmembers also announce when attention is focused inside the
aircraft—except for momentary scans—and announce when attention is focused back outside.
(2) PC. The PC is responsible for conducting the mission and for operating, securing, and servicing
the aircraft they command. The PC will ensure that a crew briefing is done and that the mission is
performed according to the mission briefing, ATC instructions, regulations, and SOP requirements.
011-237/280 (UH60) 4-2

(3) PI/CE/MO/OR. Their responsibility is completing tasks assigned by the PC.
(4) P*. The P* is responsible for aircraft control, obstacle avoidance, and the proper execution of
emergency procedures. The P*will announce any deviation, and the reason, from instructions issued.
The P* will announce changes in altitude, attitude, airspeed, or direction.
(5) P. The P is responsible for navigation, in-flight computations, assisting the P* (as requested), and
properly executing emergency procedures. When duties permit, the P assists the P* with obstacle
clearance.
(6) CE/MO/OR. The CE, MO, and OR are responsible for maintaining airspace surveillance, traffic
and obstacle avoidance, safety, security of passengers, and equipment. They provide assistance to the
P* and P as required. They are also responsible for maintaining the aircraft or mission equipment
according to their MOS.
(7) Trainer/evaluator. When acting as PI during training and evaluations, the trainer/evaluator will act
as a functioning crewmember and perform as required, unless they are training or evaluating
crewmember response to an ineffective crewmember. In the aircraft, the trainer/evaluator will ensure
safe landing areas are available for engine failure training and that aircraft limits are not exceeded.
b. Procedures. This section explains the portions of a task that an individual or crew accomplishes.
5. Considerations. This section defines consideration for accomplishing the task under various flight
modes—for example, night, NVG, environmental conditions, snow/sand/dust and mountain/pinnacle/ridgeline
operations. Crewmembers must consider additional aspects to a task when performing in different
environmental conditions. Including environmental considerations in a task does not relieve the commander of
the requirement for developing an environmental training program per TC 3-04.11. Specific requirements for
different aircraft series or mission equipment (H-60M, ERFS, Volcano, and so forth) may also be addressed as a
consideration. Training considerations establish specific actions and standards used in the training environment.
a. Night and NVD. Wires and other hazards are much more difficult to detect and must be accurately marked
and plotted on maps. Crewmembers use proper scanning techniques to detect traffic and obstacles and to avoid
spatial disorientation. The P should make all internal checks (for example, computations and frequency changes).
Visual barriers (areas so dimly viewable that a determination cannot be made if they contain barriers or obstacles)
will be treated as physical obstacles. Altitude and ground speed are difficult to detect and using artificial
illumination may sometimes be necessary. Crewmembers determine the need for artificial lighting prior to
descending below barriers and adjust search/landing light for best illumination angle without causing excessive
reflection into the cockpit. Entering IMC with artificial illumination may induce spatial disorientation. Cockpit
controls will be more difficult to locate and identify. Crewmembers take special precautions to identify and
confirm the correct switches and levers.
b. Night unaided. The P* should not view white lights, weapons flash, or ordnance explosions directly as they
will impair night vision. The P* allows time for dark adaptation or, if necessary, adjusts altitude and airspeed until
adapted. The P* will exercise added caution when performing flight tasks before reaching full dark adaptation.
Dimly visible objects may be easier to detect using peripheral vision but may tend to disappear when viewed
directly. Off-center viewing techniques are used to locate and orient on objects.
c. NVD. Using NVDs degrades distance estimation and depth perception. Aircraft in flight may appear closer
than they actually are—due to the amplification of navigation lights and the lack of background objects to assist in
distance estimation and depth perception. Weapons flash may temporarily impair or shut down NVG.
6. Training and evaluation requirements. Training and evaluation requirements define whether the task will be
trained/evaluated in the aircraft, simulator, or academic environment. Listing aircraft/simulator under the
evaluation requirements does not preclude the evaluator from evaluating elements of the task academically to
determine depth of understanding or planning processes. Some task procedures allow multiple ways to achieve
the standards. The master task list (MTL) provides the modes and conditions of flight in which the task must be
evaluated. The commander may also select mission and additional tasks for evaluation.
7. References. The references listed are sources of information relating to that particular task. Certain
references apply to many tasks. In addition to the references listed with each task, the following common
references apply as indicated.
011-237/280 (UH60) 4-3

a. All flight tasks (tasks with APU/engines operating).
(1) AR 95-1.
(2) TC 3-04.4.
(3) TC 3-04.14-2
(4) Appropriate aircraft operator’s manual/CL/MTFs.
(5) DOD FLIP.
(6) Federal Aviation regulations (FARs)/host-nation regulations.
(7) Unit/local SOPs.
(8) Aircraft logbook.
b. All instrument tasks.
(1) AR 95-1.
(2) TC 3-04.5.
(3) FAA Instrument Flying Handbook (FAA-H-8083-15).
(4) FAA Instrument Procedures Handbook (FAA-H-8261-1).
(5) DOD FLIP.
(6) Aeronautical Information Manual.
c. All tasks with environmental considerations (TC 3-04.4).
d. All tasks used in a tactical situation.
(1) TC 21-24.
(2) ATP 3-04.1.
(3) TC 3-04.45.
(4) ATTP 3-18.12.
e. All medical tasks.

(1) ATP 4-02.2.
(2) TC 8-800.
(3) Appropriate aircraft operator’s manual.
(4) Unit SOP and treatment protocol.
Warning
A degraded visual environment (DVE) is a circumstance where weather, obscurants or obstacles
hinder the ability of the crew to determine where they are in relation to the surrounding terrain.
Utilization of the coupled flight director prior to encountering DVE will aid and assist in the
prevention of spatial disorientation, reduce crew workload, fatigue and prevent accidents. When
operating and/or training in DVE in a UH60M, utilization of the coupled flight director will be
the primary means of flight operations..
Warning
Hovering OGE reduces available ground references and may increase the possibility of spatial
disorientation. The primary method of conducting maneuvers requiring OGE hover capability is
coupled to the flight director “HVR POS”, to aid in maintaining a stabilized hover. When
conditions exist where radar altitude fluctuations are made due to terrain, obstacles, or wind, “RAD
ALT” should be placed in the active standby mode by pressing and holding the collective trim
button to manually control altitude with collective.
011-237/280 (UH60) 4-4

TASK 1000
Participate in a Crew Mission Briefing
CONDITIONS: Before flight in an H-60 helicopter, given a DA Form 5484 (Mission Schedule/Brief)
information and either Table 4-1 or a unit-approved crew briefing CL.
STANDARDS: Appropriate common standards and the following additions/modifications:

1. The pilot in command (PC) will acknowledge an understanding of DA Form 5484 and will actively
participate in a crew mission briefing.
2. The PC will ensure a mission briefing is conducted using table 4-1, or a more detailed unit-approved crew
briefing CL.
3. Crewmembers will acknowledge a complete understanding of the aircrew mission briefing.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. A designated briefing officer will evaluate and then brief essential areas of the mission to the PC
according to AR 95-1. The PC will acknowledge a complete understanding of the mission briefing and will
initial DA Form 5484.
b. The PC has overall responsibility for the crew mission briefing. The PC may direct other crewmembers
to perform all or portions of the briefing.
c. Crewmembers will direct their attention to the crewmember conducting the briefing. They will address
any questions to the briefer and acknowledge that they understand the assigned actions, duties, and
responsibilities. Lessons learned from previous debriefings should be addressed as applicable during the
crew briefing.
Note. An inherent element of the mission briefing is establishing the time and location for the
crew-level after action review (Task 1500).
2. Procedures. Brief the mission using a unit-approved crew mission briefing CL. Refer to table 4-1 for a
suggested format for the minimum mandatory crew-briefing CL. Identify mission and flight requirements that
will demand effective communication and proper sequencing and timing of actions by the crewmembers.
011-ACC-1000 (UH60) 4-5

Table 4-1 Crew Briefing Checklist (Example)
1. Mission overview.
a. Flight Routes.
b. Weather- departure, enroute, destination and void times.
c. Highest risk associated with mission.
2. Required items, mission equipment, and personnel.
3. Analysis of the aircraft.
a. Logbook and preflight deficiencies.
b. Performance planning.
(1) Comparison of computed ETF/ATF with logbook.
(2) Recomputation of PPC, if necessary.
(3) Max torque available and GO/NO GO data.
(4) Single engine capability - MIN/MAX – IAS.
(5) Emergency SE IAS – Airspeed to maintain between SE MIN/MAX
IAS based on the mission and briefed for purposes of crew
coordination.
c. Mission deviations based on aircraft analysis.
4. Crew actions, duties, and responsibilities.
a. Aircrew coordination – two challenge rule, terminology.
b. Transfer of flight controls (P*).
c. Airspace surveillance procedures.
d. Brief emergency actions.
(1) Mission considerations.
(2) Degraded Visual Environment (DVE)
(3) IIMC.
(4) Egress procedures and rendezvous point
(5) Actions to be performed by P*, P, and NRCM.
5. General crew duties: Announce when focused inside (time limit

appropriate for conditions, when VMC).
a. Pilot on the controls (P*).
(1) Fly the aircraft - primary focus outside when VMC, inside when IMC.
(2) Cross-check systems and instruments.
(3) Monitor/transmit on radios as directed by the PC.
b. Pilot not on the controls (P).
(1) Tune radios and set transponder.
(2) Navigate.
(3) Copy clearances, ATIS, and other information.
(4) Cross-check systems and instruments.
(5) Monitor/transmit on radios as directed by the PC.
(6) Read and complete CL items as required.
(7) Set/adjust switches and systems as required.
c. Crew chief, medic, and other assigned crewmembers.
(1) Secure passengers and cargo.
(2) Perform other duties assigned by the PC.
6. Time and place for crew-level after action review.
7. Crewmembers' questions, comments, and acknowledgment of mission
briefing.
011-ACC-1000 (UH60) 4-6

TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS:
1. Training will be conducted academically.
2. Evaluation will be conducted academically.
REFERENCES: Appropriate common references, the appropriate aircraft operator’s manual, TC 3-04.8, and DA Form 5484.
011-ACC-1000 (UH60) 4-7

TASK 1004
Plan a Visual Flight Rules Flight
CONDITIONS: Before VFR flight in an H-60 helicopter, given access to weather information, NOTAMS,
flight planning aids, necessary charts, forms, and publications.

1. Determine whether the aircrew and aircraft are capable of completing the assigned mission.
2. Determine whether the flight can be performed under VFR IAW AR 95-1, applicable Federal Aviation
Regulations (FARs)/host-nation regulations, local regulations, and SOPs.
3. Determine the departure, enroute, and destination procedures.
4. Select route(s) and altitudes that avoid hazardous weather conditions; do not exceed aircraft or equipment
limitations, and conform to VFR cruising altitudes IAW DOD FLIP.
5. For cross-country flights, determine the distance ±1 nautical mile, true airspeed ±5 knots, ground speed ±5
knots, and estimated time enroute (ETE) ±1 minute for each leg of the flight. Compute magnetic heading(s) ±5
degrees.
6. Determine the fuel required IAW AR 95-1, ±100 pounds.
7. Complete and file the flight plan IAW AR 95-1 and DOD FLIP.
8. Perform mission risk assessment IAW unit SOP.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The PC may direct the other crewmembers to complete some elements of the VFR flight planning.
b. The other crewmembers will complete the assigned elements and report the results to the PC.
2. Procedures. Using appropriate military, FAA, or host-nation weather facilities, obtain information about
the weather. After ensuring that the flight can be completed under VFR IAW AR 95-1, check NOTAMs,
chart updating manuals (CHUMs) and other appropriate sources for any restrictions that apply to the flight.
Obtain navigational charts that cover the entire flight area, and allow for changes in routing that may be
required because of the weather or terrain. Select the course(s) and altitude(s) that will best accomplish the
mission. Determine the magnetic heading, ground speed, and ETE for each leg. Compute total distance
and flight time. Calculate the required fuel using a CPU-26A/P computer/Weems plotter (or
equivalent) or approved mission planning software. Complete the appropriate flight plan and file it with
the appropriate agency.
NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS: More detailed planning is necessary at

night because of visibility restrictions. Checkpoints used during the day may not be suitable for night or
NVG use.

1. Training. Training will be conducted academically.
2. Evaluation. Evaluation will be conducted academically.
REFERENCES: Appropriate common references.
011-SRW-1004 (UH60) 4-8

TASK 1006
Plan an Instrument Flight Rules Flight
CONDITIONS: Before instrument flight rules flight in an H-60 helicopter, given access to weather information,
NOTAMs, flight planning aids, necessary charts, forms, and publications.

1. Determine whether the aircrew and aircraft are capable of completing the assigned mission.
2. Determine whether the flight can be performed under IFR IAW AR 95-1 and applicable Federal
Aviation Regulations (FARs)/host-nation regulations, local regulations, and SOPs.
3. Determine the departure, enroute, and destination procedures.
4. Select route(s) and altitudes that avoid hazardous weather conditions, do not exceed aircraft or equipment
limitations, and conform to IFR cruising altitudes IAW DOD FLIP.
5. If off airway, determine the course(s) ±5 degrees.
6. Select an approach that is compatible with the weather, approach facilities, and aircraft equipment; determine
if an alternate airfield is required.
7. Determine distance ±1 nautical mile, true airspeed ±5 knots, ground speed ±5 knots, and ETE ±1 minutes for
each leg of the flight.
8. Determine the fuel required IAW AR 95-1 and TC 3-04.5, ±100 pounds.
9. Complete and file the flight plan IAW AR 95-1 and the DOD FLIP.
10. Perform mission risk assessment IAW unit SOP.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The PC may direct the other RCM to complete some elements
of the IFR flight planning.
b. The other RCM will complete the assigned elements and report the results to the PC.
2. Procedures. Using appropriate military, FAA, or host-nation weather facilities, obtain information about
the weather. Compare destination forecast and approach minimums, and determine whether an alternate
airfield is required. Ensure that the flight can be completed IAW AR 95-1. Check the NOTAMs and other
appropriate sources for any restrictions that apply to the flight. Obtain navigation charts that cover the entire
flight area, and allow for changes in routing or destination that may be required because of the weather.
Select the route(s) or course(s) and altitude(s) that will best accomplish the mission. When possible,
select preferred routing. Determine the magnetic heading, ground speed, and ETE for each leg, to include
flight to the alternate airfield if required. Compute the total distance and flight time. Calculate the
required fuel using a CPU-26A/P computer/Weems plotter (or equivalent) or approved mission
planning software. Complete the appropriate flight plan and file it with the appropriate agency.

011-SRW-1006 (UH60) 4-9

TASK 1010
Prepare a Performance Planning Card
CONDITIONS: Given the Aviation And Missile Command (AMCOM)–approved performance planning software
and computer, or a blank DA Form 5701-60-R (H-60 Performance Planning Card), the appropriate aircraft
operator’s manual, mission conditions, engine torque factors, and aircraft basic weight.
Note. Performance planning will be completed prior to every mission. The approved performance
planning software is the most accurate and preferred method for calculating performance data.
Note. The AMCOM user’s manual for the PPC Program provides instructions for using the
performance planning software. This software may be obtained at the following website https://
mpc.mission-planning.org
Note. The AMCOM-approved performance planning software or the charts in the AMCOM-
approved aircraft operator’s manual/CL must be used for performance planning.
Note. Instructions for manually computing individual elements of the performance planning card can
be found in appendix D.

1. Compute all applicable items of the PPC using the most current software.
2. Input the appropriate information into the software.
3. Compute PPC values using accurate conditions for the time of takeoff within the following parameters:
a. Free air temperature (FAT) ±5 degrees Celsius.
b. Pressure altitude (PA) ±1,000 feet.
c. Gross weight ±500 pounds.
d. Engine torque factor (ETF) ± 0.05.
4. When manual calculations are required, calculate PPC values IAW the appropriate operator’s manual and
per the instructions in appendix D (now known as TSP 011-237-IMCA and located at: https://ww.us.army.mil/
suite/page/691190 ) . Compute values within following parameters:
a. Torque values ±2 percent.
b. Weight values ±500 pounds.
c. Fuel flow ±100 pounds per hour.
d. Airspeeds ±5 knots.
5. Correlate planning information to determine aircraft and mission capabilities.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The PC will compute or direct other members of the crew to compute or obtain the aircraft performance
data using one of the following procedures.
b. Most current AMCOM approved electronic PPC software.
c. Performance data computed using the appropriate operator’s manual.
d. The PC will verify that the aircraft meets the performance requirements for the mission and will brief the
other crewmembers on the performance planning data.
011-237/280-1010 (UH60) 4-10

2. Procedures.
a. Use of the PPC is mandatory to organize performance planning data required for the mission.
b. Determine and have available aircraft performance data required to complete the mission.
Note. The data presented in the performance charts in the aircraft operator’s manual are primarily
derived for either a "clean" or "high drag" aircraft. When the external equipment or configuration
differs significantly from the clean or high drag configuration, drag compensations will be made.
This configuration is referred to as the alternative or sling load configuration, and the appropriate
drag compensation is described.
Note. Figures 1 and 2 provide examples of an H-60 PPC.
Figure 1. Sample DA Form 5701-60-R, page 1
011-237/280-1010 (UH60) 4-11

Figure 2. Sample DA Form 5701-60-R, page 2
c. Explanation of items on DA Form 5701-60-R.
(1) Departure data.
(a) Item 1-PA. Forecast maximum pressure altitude (PA) for the mission and current PA for
time and location of departure.
(b) Item 2-FAT. Forecast maximum free air temperature (FAT) for the mission and FAT for
Note. Maximum PA and FAT will be used when computing all items in the departure section except
for GO/NO GO TORQUE OGE/IGE, item 10 and PREDICTED HOVER TORQUE, item 12, which
will be computed using PA and temperature for time and location of departure.
(c) Item 3-AIRCRAFT GWT. Total planned aircraft gross weight (GWT) at takeoff. This
includes the aircraft basic weight, crew, internal load, internal fuel, and when applicable, external
011-237/280-1010 (UH60) 4-12

stores support system (ESSS) stores and sling load. Use the actual weight of the aircraft and all
additions for these computations.
(d) Item 4-STORES WEIGHT. Planned weight of any jettisonable items such as external
loads, ESSS wing stores and volcano.
(e) Item 5-FUEL WEIGHT. Total planned fuel weight (internal and external) at takeoff.
(f) Item 6-ATF/ETF. Aircraft torque factor (ATF) is the ratio of individual aircraft’s power
available to a specification power at 35 degrees Celsius. The ATF is an average of both engines
and allowed to range from .90 to 1.0. Engine torque factor (ETF) is the ratio of individual engine
torque available to specification torque at a reference temperature of 35 degrees Celsius. The
ETF is allowed to range from .85 to 1.0. The ATF and ETF values are found on the engine health
indicator test (HIT) log.
(g) Item 7-TORQUE RATIO. Torque ratio (TR) is the ratio of torque available to
specification torque at the desired ambient temperature and incorporates ambient temperature
effects on engine performance. The tr equals the ATF/ETF for temperatures of 35 degrees
Celsius and above.
(h) Item 8-MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE. The maximum torque available is also referred to
as intermediate rated power (IRP)—30 minute limit (T700 and T701) or maximum rated power
(MRP)—10 minute limit (T701). The maximum torque available—2.5 minute limit (T701) is also
referred to as SINGLE ENGINE CONTINGENCY POWER—2.5 minute limit or one engine
inoperative (OEI). MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE is based on TGT, NG or fuel flow limiting.
Note. Certain temperature and PA combinations will exceed the aircraft operator’s manual, chapter 5
torque limitations. This item represents actual maximum torque available values. During normal
aircraft operations, the aircraft operator’s manual, chapter 5 torque limitations shall not be exceeded.
Note. Adjust the maximum torque available as required for planned use of engine bleed air
accessories (anti-ice, cockpit/cabin heaters, AMOGS/OBOGS) according to the operator’s manual.
(i) Item 9-MAX ALLOWABLE GWT OGE/IGE. This is the maximum weight the aircraft is
capable of at a 10-foot hover height for IGE operations, or to a 100-foot hover for OGE operations.
This weight will be limited by engine capabilities or aircraft structural design.
Note. If OGE capability does not exist, the MAX HOVER HEIGHT IGE, item 11, must be
computed.
Note. If the blade erosion kit and/or externally mounted MEDEVAC equipment is installed, adjust
the maximum allowable GWT according to the aircraft operator’s manual.
If the blade erosion kit is installed, adjust the maximum allowable GWT according to the aircraft
operator’s manual.
Note. Tab data values represent a 100-foot hover height OGE and 10-foot hover height IGE.
(j) Item 10-GO/NO GO TORQUE OGE/IGE. This value provides a method to verify the
aircraft weight is at or below maximum weight and is capable of lifting to an IGE or OGE altitude.
The hover altitude is normally 10 feet but may be adjusted based on conditions. GO/NO GO is
computed using the departure PA, item 1, and temperature, item 2.
Note. For sling load operations, select an altitude that will place the load at an altitude of 10 feet.
011-237/280-1010 (UH60) 4-13

Note. MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE GWT OGE/IGE was determined in item 9 using maximum PA
and temperature. When the actual temperature is less than the maximum, the torque required to hover
at a given gross weight is less. During the hover power check, exceeding the GO/NO GO torque
value prior to the WHEEL HEIGHT ~ FT used during planning indicates the aircraft is heavier than
the MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE GWT OGE/IGE (as applicable) when maximum PA and FAT
conditions are encountered.
Note. If MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE GWT OGE/IGE, item 9, was limited by the maximum gross
weight per the operator’s manual, chapter 5, exceeding this torque value prior to the WHEEL
HEIGHT ~ FT used during planning indicates the aircraft is above the maximum structural weight
limit.
(k) Item 11-MAX HOVER HEIGHT IGE. Maximum hover height when aircraft gross
weight exceeds max allowable gross weight OGE and power is not available for an OGE hover.
the aircraft gross weight according to the aircraft operator’s manual.
(l) Item 12-PREDICTED HOVER TORQUE. Estimated torque required for a stationary
hover, using takeoff gross weight, and current PA and FAT.
Note. At the time of departure, maximum torque available may be higher than what is listed in
MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE, item 8, due to item 8 being computed using maximum FAT for the
mission. At the time of departure, engine performance may be increased due to a lower FAT. If this
is the case, the aircraft may be able to sustain hover capability, single engine even though MAX
TORQUE AVAILABLE, item 8, may be less than PREDICTED HOVER TORQUE – SINGLE
ENGINE.
Note. PREDICTED HOVER TORQUE – (SINGLE ENGINE) is computed using a specific wheel
height. If the predicted hover torque exceeds the MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE, the aircraft may
still be capable of sustaining single-engine hover at a lower wheel height.
(m) Item 13-MIN SE AIRSPEED – AIRSPEED – IAS – WO/W STORES. Minimum (MIN)
airspeed to sustain level flight single engine (SE) without or with stores. Value derived from
cruise charts using departure conditions. Consideration should be given to an IGE takeoff if
conditions merit.
(n) Item 14-ZERO FUEL WEIGHT: The zero fuel weight on the DD Form 365-4 (Weight
and Balance Clearance Form F-Tactical/Transport) is computed using standard, average, or
estimated weight for personnel, equipment, and fuel. Actual mission weight could vary from that
on the DD Form 365-4. If the load configuration is different than that on the 365-4, the PC may
use the appropriate DD Form 365-4 from the aircraft logbook and add additional weights of cargo
and personnel, then subtract indicating fuel, or use the HOVER chart from the CL to compute the
adjusted ZERO FUEL WEIGHT.
Note. The PC must adjust for certain hover conditions such as wind and surface condition when
utilizing the hover method.
Note. Although data needed to compute ZERO FUEL WEIGHT is noted at a hover, the calculation
should be made when practical.
(o) Item 15-REMARKS: examples of these may include drag factors, fuel requirements for
the mission, GO/NO GO for sling loads, and EMER SE-IAS.
011-237/280-1010 (UH60) 4-14

Note. The EMER SE-IAS is the emergency single-engine indicated airspeed (IAS) based on the
mission and briefed to the crew for the purpose of crew coordination. This airspeed is selected from
the MIN/MAX-IAS (SINGLE ENGINE) range computed in item 29, CRUISE data, and is used
immediately following an emergency that requires adjustment to single-engine airspeed. When an
aircraft does not have single-engine capability, the MAX ENDURANCE-IAS (DUAL ENGINE),
item 24, or the OPTIMUM IAS AT MAX ALLOWABLE GWT (SINGLE ENGINE), item 34, as
appropriate should be briefed as the emergency single-engine airspeed.
Note. Normally only one EMER SE-IAS is selected. However, when the MIN/MAX-IAS (SINGLE
ENGINE) range, item 29, is wide, the crew may select two emergency single-engine airspeeds, one
slow and one fast based on mission profile, modes of flight, environmental conditions or other
factors.
Note. There is no power margin available when operating single-engine at the MIN/MAX-IAS
(SINGLE ENGINE), item 29. These airspeeds are computed using the maximum torque available
single-engine for the lowest ETF engine. It is not recommended that the aircraft be flown at airspeeds
that require maximum power for continued single-engine flight.
Note. The GO/NO GO TORQUE for sling loads is determined by using the same process as item 10
above, using the MAX ALLOWABLE GWT OGE and a wheel height that suspends the load
approximately 10 feet AGL.
(2) Cruise data. The maximum continuous power (MCP) line on the CRUISE chart is used to define
power levels that an engine can produce continuously and remain out of time limited engine operating
limitations (30 minute, 10 minute or 2.5 minute TGT values). The TORQUE AVAILABLE ~30 MIN
lines (T700 and T701) and the TORQUE AVAILABLE ~10 MIN lines for (T701) are used to define a
power level that will be limited and only used for a defined period of time. The SE~30 MIN lines
(t700) and se~2.5 MIN lines (t701) represent maximum single engine power OEI and are used to
define single engine flight performance.
(a) Item 16-PA. Planned cruise PA.
(b) Item 17-FAT. Forecast FAT at the planned cruise PA.
(c) Item 18-MIN/MAX-IAS. (DUAL ENGINE). Minimum and maximum airspeeds based
on gross weight, power available, and conditions.
Note. This item represents the actual maximum indicated airspeed value based on torque available.
If the planned aircraft configuration has an associated maximum airspeed limitation, note this
airspeed value in item 15, REMARKS. During normal aircraft operations, the aircraft operator’s
manual, chapter 5, airspeed limitations, shall not be exceeded.
Note. For alternative or external load configurations, refer to the operator’s manual, chapter 7/7A,
section VI, DRAG. Determine and add together the appropriate drag multiplying factors.
Note. The torque change to compensate for drag (alternative or external load configuration) at
minimum indicated airspeed is often negligible and not computed.
(d) Item 19-CRUISE SPEED-IAS/TAS (DUAL ENGINE). Selected IAS that falls within the
range of MIN/MAX-IAS (IASKTS scale).
(e) Item 20-MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE (DUAL ENGINE).
Note. If mission requirements dictates use of the (701) 30-minute dual engine maximum torque
available, enter the bottom of the CRUISE chart at the TORQUE AVAILABLE ~ 30-MIN line
adjusted for the ETF of the weakest engine and follow the slant of the line up to item 34 CRUISE
SPEED-IAS (DUAL ENGINE) CRUISE).
011-237/280-1010 (UH60) 4-15

Note. If mission requirements dictate use of (T700 or T701) continuous torque available, refer to the
dual engine torque value derived from item 21 below.
Note. The maximum torque available may exceed the transmission torque limit. During normal
aircraft operations, the aircraft operator’s manual, chapter 5, torque limitations shall not be exceeded.
Note. Maximum torque available is derived from the cruise charts and takes into account the effect
of ram-air on engine performance at a selected airspeed. Torque values may vary when flying at
airspeeds other than the planned cruise airspeed.
Note. Adjust as required for planned use of engine bleed air accessories (anti-ice, cockpit/cabin
heaters, AMOGS/OBOGS) according to the operator’s manual.
Note. Adjust as required for planned use of engine anti-ice and cockpit heater according to the
aircraft operator’s manual.
(f) Item 21-CRUISE TORQUE/CONT TORQUE AVAILABLE (DUAL ENGINE).
Note. The continuous torque available is also referred to as MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS POWER
(MCP).
Note. Compare the CRUISE TORQUE with the CONTINUOUS TORQUE to determine whether the
aircraft will be operating in a time limited condition (above maximum continuous power) for this
IAS.
Note. The continuous torque available may exceed the transmission torque limit. During normal
Note. Adjust CONTINUOUS TORQUE for planned use of engine bleed air accessories (anti-ice,
cockpit/cabin heaters, AMOGS/OBOGS) according to the operator’s manual.
Alternative or external load configuration.
Note. If the new torque value exceeds the dual engine transmission torque limit, the planned cruise
airspeed must be reduced.
Note. The adjusted cruise torque reflects the power required to overcome the added drag.
(g) Item 22-CRUISE FUEL FLOW (DUAL ENGINE).
Note. Adjust as required for FAT and/or planned use of engine bleed air accessories (anti-ice,
(h) Item 23-MAX RANGE-IAS/TORQUE (DUAL ENGINE). Airspeed which yields the
maximum distance per pound of fuel for a specific configuration, weight, and altitude. The
airspeed is derived from the cruise chart for a no-wind condition.
Note. A method of adjusting the maximum range airspeed to reduce flight time and minimize loss in
range is to increase IAS by 2.5 knots for every 10 knots of effective headwind and decrease IAS by
2.5 knots for every 10 knots of effective tailwind.
(i) Item 24-MAX ENDURANCE-IAS/TORQUE (DUAL ENGINE). This IAS and torque
yields the minimum fuel flow for a specific weight and altitude. In addition, total drag is at its
lowest, and at this airspeed the aircraft will remain aloft for the longest period of time.
011-237/280-1010 (UH60) 4-16

(j) Item 25-CRITICAL TORQUE (DUAL ENGINE). Critical torque (CT) is the dual engine
torque value, which when exceeded, may not allow the aircraft to maintain % RPM R within
normal limits under single-engine operations in the same flight conditions.
(k) Item 26-MAX ALLOWABLE GWT and OPTIMUM IAS AT MAX ALLOWABLE
GWT (DUAL ENGINE). The maximum allowable gross weight the aircraft is capable of flying at
cruise conditions and the associated maximum endurance airspeed.
Note. The torque change to compensate for drag (alternative or sling load configuration) at MAX END–
IAS is often negligible and not computed.
(l) Item 27-MAX R/C-IAS/TORQUE (DUAL ENGINE). IAS that allows the aircraft to
climb from one altitude to a higher altitude in the least amount of time when using maximum
torque available.
Note. The torque change to compensate for drag (alternative or sling load configuration) at MAX
END-IAS is often negligible and not computed.
(m) Item 28-MAX ALTITUDE-MSL/MAX ENDURANCE-IAS (DUAL ENGINE). The

maximum altitude the aircraft is capable of flying at maximum endurance airspeed.
Note. Several different cruise charts may have to be referenced when computing the MAX
ALTITUDE-MEAN SEA LEVEL (MSL). It is recommended to start with the 10,000 FOOT
CRUISE chart and forecast temperature.
Note. MAX END-IAS is used to calculate MAX ALTITUDE-MSL.
Note. Ensure FAT is adjusted for pressure altitude in the CRUISE charts.
Note. The torque change to compensate for drag (alternative or sling load configuration) at max
END-IAS is negligible and not computed.
(n) Item 29-MIN/MAX-IAS (SINGLE ENGINE). Minimum and maximum airspeeds based
on gross weight, power available and conditions.
Note. Single engine level flight may not be possible at takeoff but may become possible as fuel is
consumed.
(o) Item 30-CRUISE SPEED-IAS (SINGLE ENGINE). Select a CRUISE SPEED-IAS that
falls within the range of MIN/MAX-IAS (SINGLE ENGINE), item 29 above.
(p) Item 31-MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE (SINGLE ENGINE).
Note. The maximum torque available may exceed the transmission torque limit. During normal
Note. Max torque is derived from the cruise charts and takes into account the effect of ram-air on
engine performance at a selected airspeed. Torque values may vary when flying at airspeeds other
than the planned cruise airspeed.
Note. The maximum torque available ~ 30 MIN for the (T700) engine can also be derived from the
CL when ETF values are between 1.0 and 0.9 (utilize ETF instead of ATF and interpolate as
required).
011-237/280-1010 (UH60) 4-17

(q) Item 32-CRUISE TORQUE/CONT TORQUE AVAILABLE (SINGLE ENGINE).
Note. Compare the cruise torque to the CONT TORQUE AVAILABLE to determine whether the
IAS.
Note. The continuous torque available may exceed the transmission torque limit. During normal
Note. Adjust the CONT TORQUE for planned use of engine bleed air accessories (anti-ice,
(r) Item 33-CRUISE FUEL FLOW (SINGLE ENGINE).
cockpit/cabin heaters, AMOGS/OBOGS, etc.) According to the operator’s manual.
(s) Item 34-MAX ALLOWABLE GWT and OPTIMUM IAS AT MAX ALLOWABLE
GWT (SINGLE ENGINE). The maximum allowable gross weight the aircraft is capable of flying
at maximum endurance airspeed.
Note. If the MAX ALLOWABLE GWT is less than the AIRCRAFT GWT, then the aircraft cannot
maintain single engine level flight for the conditions. As fuel is consumed, single engine capability
may become possible.
Alternative or external load configuration.
Note. If the adjusted torque value does not intersect the AIRCRAFT GWT (item 3, departure data),
the aircraft cannot maintain single-engine level flight for the conditions. As fuel is consumed, single
engine capability may become possible.
(t) Item 35-MAX ALTITUDE-MSL/MAX ENDURANCE-IAS (SINGLE ENGINE). The

maximum altitude the aircraft is capable of flying at maximum endurance airspeed single engine.
Note. When the capability to maintain level flight after an engine failure or malfunction is not
possible, continued flight may be possible by adjusting airspeed to MAX END–IAS and adjusting
collective to the MAXIMUM TORQUE AVAILABLE to attain minimum rate of descent while
descending to a lower PA (where level flight may be possible) or jettisoning the external stores (if no
allowable altitude/temperature combination cruise charts yield a GWT greater than or equal to the
AIRCRAFT GWT, item 3, departure data).
Note. The torque change to compensate for drag (alternative or sling load configuration) at MAX
END–IAS is often negligible and not computed.
Note. If aircraft is equipped with stores and no CRUISE chart will yield a MAX ALLOWABLE
GWT (SINGLE ENGINE) that is greater than or equal to the AIRCRAFT GWT, level flight is not
possible. Subtract the weight of the stores and adjust the AIRCRAFT GWT to reflect the new
AIRCRAFT GWT (without stores) and recompute the MAX ALTITUDE–MSL (SINGLE
ENGINE).
Note. If level flight cannot be maintained either with or without stores, record NA in MAX
ALTITUDE–MSL (SINGLE ENGINE) block.
(u) Item 36-MAX ANGLE. Value derived from the AIRSPEED FOR ONSET OF BLADE
STALL chart in the aircraft operator’s manual, chapter 5. While not a limitation, the value
011-237/280-1010 (UH60) 4-18

provides the level flight angle of bank at which blade stall will begin to occur as a function of
airspeed, gross weight, PA, and temperature.
(v) Item 37-VNE-IAS. Value derived from the AIRSPEED OPERATING LIMITATIONS
chart in the aircraft operator’s manual, chapter 5. The value defines the maximum allowable
airspeed as a function of altitude, temperature, and gross weight.
(3) Arrival data. Complete this section in its entirety if arrival conditions at destination have increased
from departure data in any of the following by the minimum amount: 5 degrees Celsius, 1,000 feet PA,
or 500 pounds.
Note. If mission requirements dictate the need for additional arrival information, complete the second
arrival section as described below using applicable PA, FAT, and landing gross weight data.
Additional copies of page 2 may be attached for multiple arrivals.
(a) Item 38-PA. Forecast PA for time of arrival.

(b) Item 39-FAT. Forecast FAT for time of arrival. If unavailable, use maximum forecast
FAT for the mission.
(c) Item 40-LANDING GWT. Estimated gross weight for arrival.
(d) Item 41-TORQUE RATIO. Torque ratios for dual and single engine are computed the
same as item 7 (departure data), using arrival FAT.
(e) Item 42-MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE. Maximum torque available for dual and single
engine are computed the same as item 8 (departure data), using arrival forecast PA and FAT.
Note. Dual engine information may also be derived from the tabular performance data in the aircraft
operator’s CL.
(f) Item 43-PREDICTED HOVER TORQUE. The predicted hover torque is computed the
same as item 12 (departure data), using arrival forecast PA and FAT.
(g) Item 44-MAX ALLOWABLE GWT OGE/IGE. The maximum allowable gross weight is
computed the same as item 24 (departure data), using arrival forecast PA and FAT.
(h) Item 45-MAX HOVER HEIGHT IGE. The maximum hover height is computed the same
as item 11 (departure data), using arrival forecast PA and FAT.
(i) Item 46-MIN SE AIRSPEED IAS–WO/W STORES. The minimum single-engine
airspeed is computed the same as item 13 (departure data), using arrival forecast PA and FAT.

REFERENCES: DD Form 365-4, DA Form 5701-60-R, Turbine Engine Health Indicator (HIT) Log,the
appropriate aircraft operator’s manual, and appendix D of this manual.
011-237/280-1010 (UH60) 4-19

TASK 1011
Determine Dynamic Inflight Performance
CONDITIONS: Given an operator’s and crewmembers CL with tabular data, electronic data module, FMS
configured with mission conditions, engine torque factors, and aircraft basic weight.
Note. Performance data values contained in the tabular data portion of the CL were derived for
aircraft operating in the clean configuration. For alternative or external drag configurations the charts
in the operator’s manual must be used.
Note. To ensure accurate values are derived when using tabular data, the aircrew must be accurate in
determining aircraft zero fuel weight.

1. Verify planned performance values as required by environmental and aircraft configuration differences.
2. Update aircraft performance data when either of the following conditions apply with intent to land or takeoff:
a. When operating within 3,000 pounds of MAX ALLOWABLE GWT OGE.
b. Increase of 1,000 feet pressure altitude from the PPC.
c. Increase of 5 degrees Celsius from the PPC.
3. Update aircraft performance data using automated planning software or data found in the operator’s and
crewmembers CL for the following items:
a. Maximum torque available.
b. Maximum allowable gross weight OGE.
c. Torque required to hover at maximum gross weight OGE and IGE.
d. Aircraft gross weight.
4. When not utilizing automated software determine values within following parameters:
a. Torque values ±2 percent.
b. Weight values ±500 pounds.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The PC will compute or direct crewmembers to compute aircraft performance.
b. The PC will verify that the aircraft meets the performance requirements for the mission and will brief the
other crewmembers on the performance data.
2. Procedures.
a. When conditions have changed from the planned PPC data or an in-flight update is required; derive
values for MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE, MAX ALLOWABLE GWT OGE, and GO/NO-GO TORQUE.
b. Determine and have available aircraft performance data required to complete the mission.
Note. The procedures for determining performance planning data are the same for the UH 60A/L/M
and H-60A/L/M aircraft unless specifically noted in the appropriate items.
Note. Tabular performance data. Figures 1 and 2, explain the tabular performance data presented in
the CL MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE. Use the MAXIMUM TORQUE AVAILABLE *–30-
minute limit (T700) or 10-minute limit, figures 1 and 6 in the operator’s manual CL.
011-237/280-1011 (UH60) 4-20

At the intersection of pressure altitude (height pressure) (HP) ~FT and FREE AIR TEMPERATURE
° C read the MAXIMUM TORQUE AVAILABLE for the aircraft torque factor (ATF). If the ATF is
between .90 and 1.0, interpolate value per the example in figure 1.
Note. The maximum torque available is also referred to as intermediate rated power (IRP)—30-
minute limit (T700 and T701) or maximum rated power (MRP)—10-minute limit (T701).
Note. Certain temperature and PA combinations will exceed the aircraft operator’s manual, chapter 5
torque limitations. This item represents actual maximum torque available values. During normal
aircraft operations, the aircraft operator’s manual, chapter 5 torque limitations shall not be exceeded.
Note. Adjust the maximum torque available as required for planned use of engine anti-ice and
cockpit heater according to the operator’s manual.
Note. If the blade erosion kit is installed, adjust the maximum torque available according to the
011-237/280-1011 (UH60) 4-21

Figure 1. Example maximum torque available chart
 MAX ALLOWABLE GWT OGE. Use MAXIMUM OGE HOVER WEIGHT AND TORQUE
REQUIRED ANTI-ICE OFF (T700 or T701) as appropriate; figures 4 and 9 in the operator’s manual
CL.
 At the intersection of the HP ~ FT and FREE AIR TEMPERATURE ° C read the MAXIMUM
ALLOWABLE GWT in the GW ~ 100 LB column under the aircraft ATF. If the ATF is between .90
and 1.0 interpolate value per the example in figure 2.
Note. If the OGE weight is less than the structural limit, then the OGE hover torque is also the
maximum torque.
Note. If the blade erosion kit is installed, adjust the maximum allowable GWT according to the
Note. Tab data values represent a 100 foot hover height OGE and 10-foot hover height IGE.
011-237/280-1011 (UH60) 4-22

Note. Maximum hover weight is limited to 22,000 pounds, 100-percent torque transmission limit, or
30-minute engine torque limit.
 TORQUE REQUIRED TO HOVER at MAX GWT OGE and IGE. Use MAXIMUM OGE HOVER
WEIGHT AND TORQUE REQUIRED ANTI-ICE OFF (T700 or T701) as appropriate; figures 4 and
9 in the operator’s manual CL.
 At the intersection of the HP~FT and FREE AIR TEMPERATURE Celsius read the MAXIMUM
Q~OGE percentage under the aircraft ATF and read TORQUE REQUIRED to HOVER OGE at MAX
GWT. If the ATF is between .90 and 1.0, interpolate value per the example in figure 2.
 At the intersection of the HP~FT and FREE AIR TEMPERATURE Celsius read the MAXIMUM
Q~IGE percentage under the aircraft ATF and read TORQUE REQUIRED to HOVER IGE at MAX
GWT. If the ATF is between .90 and 1.0, interpolate value per the example in figure 2.
Note. Tab data values represent a 100-foot hover height OGE and 10-foot hover height IGE.
011-237/280-1011 (UH60) 4-23

Figure 2. Maximum OGE hover weight and torque required chart
011-237/280-1011 (UH60) 4-24

Figure 3. Maximum OGE hover weight and torque required chart (continued)

1. Training will be conducted in the aircraft or academically.
2. Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft or academically.
REFERENCES: Appropriate common references, the appropriate aircraft operator’s manual, DD Form 365-4, DA Form
5701-60-R, and Task 1012.
011-237/280-1011 (UH60) 4-25

TASK 1012
Verify Aircraft Weight and Balance
CONDITIONS: Given crew data, aircraft configuration, mission cargo, passenger data, the appropriate aircraft
operator’s manual, and completed DD Form(s) 365-4 (Weight and Balance Clearance Form F-Tactical/Transport)
from the aircraft logbook.

1. Verify that CG and gross weight remain within aircraft limits for the duration of the flight per the
appropriate aircraft operator’s manual.
2. Identify all mission or flight limitations imposed by weight or CG.
3. Ensure DD Form(s) 365-4 has been completed within 90 days.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The PC will brief crewmembers on any limitations.
b. Crewmembers will continually monitor aircraft loading (such as fuel transfers, sling loads, cargo load)
during the mission to ensure CG remains within limits.
2. Procedures.
a. Using the completed DD Form 365-4, verify that aircraft GWT and CG will remain within the allowable
limits for the entire flight. Note all GWT, loading task/maneuver restrictions/limitations. If there is no
completed DD Form 365-4 that meets mission requirements, the PC will ensure adjustments are made to
existing DD Form 365-4 (to meet the criteria outlined in AR 95-1) and the aircraft is capable of completing
the assigned mission.
b. Verify the aircraft CG in relation to CG limits at predetermined times during the flight when an aircraft’s
configuration requires special attention; for example, when it is a critical requirement to keep a certain
amount of fuel in a particular tank. Conduct CG checks for fuel transfer, sling loads, and cargo loading
operations.

REFERENCES: Appropriate common references, the appropriate aircraft operator’s manual, and DD Form 365-4.
011-ACC-1012 (UH60) 4-26

TASK 1013
Operate Mission Planning System
CONDITIONS: Given approved computer and mission planning software, a mission briefing, signal operating
instructions (SOI) information, weather information, navigational maps, DOD FLIP, intelligence data, and other
materials as required.

1. Configure and operate the approved mission planning software.
2. Evaluate and enter all pertinent weather data, as appropriate.
3. Select and enter appropriate primary and alternate routes.
4. Select and enter appropriate tactical/terrain flight mission planning control features.
5. Select and enter appropriate communication data.
6. Load mission data to data transfer device, if applicable.
7. Print out time distance heading (TDH) cards, waypoint lists, crew cards, communication cards, and
kneeboard cards as required.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions. The PC will assign tasks. The crew receives the mission briefing. Any crewmember may
enter data into the approved mission planning software and brief the crew on the mission.
2. Procedures. Plan the flight according to Tasks 1004, 1006, or 2012 as applicable, using all appropriate data.

REFERENCES: Appropriate common references, Task 1004, Task 1006, and Task 2012.
011-ACC-1013 (UH60) 4-27

TASK 1014
Operate Aviation Life Support Equipment
CONDITIONS: Given the appropriate ALSE for the mission.

1. Inspect/perform operational checks on ALSE.
2. Use personal and mission ALSE.
3. Brief passengers in using ALSE.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions. The PC will verify that all required ALSE is onboard the aircraft before takeoff.
2. Procedures. On the basis of mission requirements, obtain the required ALSE. Inspect equipment for
serviceability and perform required operational checks. Secure the required ALSE in the aircraft per the
appropriate aircraft operator’s manual and the unit SOP. Brief passengers on using ALSE.
REFERENCES: Appropriate common references and the appropriate ALSE technical manuals.
011-ACC-1014 (UH60) 4-28

TASK 1016
Perform Internal Load Operations
CONDITIONS: In an H-60 helicopter loaded with passengers/cargo.

1. RCM.
a. Perform or ensure that a thorough passenger briefing has been conducted and that a passenger manifest is
on file according to AR 95-1. Conduct the passenger briefing per the appropriate aircraft operator’s manual/
CL and unit SOP.
b. Ensure that the passengers/cargo is restrained.
c. Ensure that floor loading limits are not exceeded.
2. NRCM.
a. Perform a thorough passenger briefing and ensure that a passenger manifest is on file according to AR
95-1. Conduct the passenger briefing per the appropriate aircraft operator’s manual/CL and unit SOP.
b. Load the aircraft per the load plan, if applicable.
c. Ensure that floor loading limits are not exceeded.
d. Secure passengers/cargo according to the appropriate aircraft operator’s manual.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The PC will formulate a load plan, ensure that a DD Form 365-4 (Weight and Balance Clearance Form
F-Tactical/Transport) is verified, if required, and ensure that the aircraft will be within gross weight
and CG limits. The PC will ensure that the crew loads the cargo, uses proper tie-down procedures, and
completes a passenger briefing as required. The PC will determine whether the aircraft is capable of
completing the assigned mission and will ensure that aircraft limitations will not be exceeded.
b. The NRCM will complete a passenger briefing as directed and will ensure
passengers are seated and wearing seat belts according to AR 95-1. The NRCM will
monitor passengers/cargo during the flight for security.
2. Procedures.
a. Load cargo per the cargo plan or DD Form 365-4, as appropriate. Secure and restrain all cargo to meet
restraint criteria. (For additional information, see Task 1012.)
b. Brief passengers for the flight and seat them according to the load plan or DD Form 365-4, as
appropriate. Conduct the passenger briefing per the appropriate aircraft operator’s manual /CL or unit SOP
and information about the mission. Ensure that the passengers understand each element of the briefing.
Note. If the aircraft is not shut down for loading, a passenger briefing may be impractical. Passengers
may be prebriefed or passenger briefing cards may be used per local directives or the unit SOP.
Note. Hazardous cargo will be handled, loaded, and transported per AR 95-27.

1. Training may be conducted in the aircraft or academically.
2. Evaluation may be conducted in the aircraft or academically.
REFERENCES: Appropriate common references, the appropriate aircraft operator’s manual, AR 95-27, DD Form 365-4, FM
55-450-2, and TM 55-1500-42-23.
011-237/280-1016 (UH60) 4-29

TASK 1020
Prepare Aircraft for Mission
CONDITIONS: In an H-60 helicopter and given a warning order or mission briefing and required mission
equipment.

1. Install, secure, inspect, and inventory all mission equipment.
2. Prepare the aircraft for the assigned mission.
DESCRIPTION: Procedures. After receiving a mission briefing, determine the required mission equipment. Ensure
that it is installed, secured, inventoried, and operational before flight. If an airworthiness release (AWR) is required
for mission equipment, ensure that a current AWR is in the aircraft logbook and that all inspections and checks have
been completed according to the AWR. Check the equipment that requires aircraft power for operation per
procedures in the appropriate aircraft operator’s manual/CL or appropriate mission equipment operator's manuals.

1. Training will be conducted in the aircraft.
2. Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft.
REFERENCES: Appropriate common references and the appropriate airworthiness releases.
011-237/280-1020 (UH60) 4-30

TASK 1022
Perform Pre-Flight Inspection
CONDITIONS: With an H-60 helicopter and given the appropriate aircraft operator’s manual/CL.

1. RCM.
a. Perform the preflight inspection per the appropriate aircraft operator’s manual/CL.
b. Review aircraft logbook for service intervals and deficiencies.
c. Enter appropriate information on DA Form 2408-13 (Aircraft Status Information Record), and DA Form
2408-13-1 (Aircraft Inspection and Maintenance Record), per DA PAM 738-751 if required.
2. NRCM. Assist in all before preflight and preflight duties per the appropriate aircraft operator’s manual/CL,
unit SOP, and for the designated duty position.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The PC is responsible for ensuring that a preflight inspection is conducted using the appropriate aircraft
operator’s manual/CL. The PC may direct other crewmembers to complete elements of the preflight
inspection as applicable and will verify that all checks have been completed according to the appropriate
aircraft operator’s manual/CL. The PC will report any aircraft discrepancies that may affect the mission and
will ensure that the appropriate information is entered on DA Form 2408-13 and DA Form 2408-13-1.
b. The crewmembers will complete the assigned elements and report the results to the PC.
2. Procedures.
a. Ensure the preflight inspection is conducted per the appropriate aircraft operator’s manual/CL. If
circumstances permit, accomplish preflight inspection during daylight hours.
b. The NRCM, if available, will ensure all cowlings and equipment are secured upon
completing the preflight.
NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS: If performing the preflight inspection

during the hours of darkness, a flashlight with an unfiltered lens to supplement available lighting should be
used. Hydraulic leaks, oil leaks, and other defects are difficult to see using a flashlight with a colored lens. TC
3-04.4 contains details on preflight inspection at night.

1. Training will be conducted at the aircraft.
2. Evaluation will be conducted at the aircraft.
REFERENCES: Appropriate common references and DA PAM 738-751.
011-ACC-1022 (UH60) 4-31

TASK 1024
Perform Before-Starting Engine through Before-Leaving Helicopter Checks
CONDITIONS: In an H-60 helicopter and given the appropriate aircraft operator’s manual/CL.
STANDARDS: Appropriate common standards and the following additions/modifications.
1. Perform procedures and checks per the appropriate aircraft operator’s manual/CL and HIT check
procedures.
2. Enter appropriate information on DA Form 2408-12, DA Form 2408-13, DA Form 2408-13-1, and the
HIT log.
3. View exceedance data as required. (UH60M)
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. Each crewmember will complete the required checks pertaining to the assigned crew duties per the
appropriate aircraft operator’s manual/CL. Crewmembers will coordinate with each other before entering
data into aircraft systems.
b. The pilot not on the controls (P) will read the CL and announce APU and engine starts.
c. The appropriate crewmember(s) will clear the area around the aircraft before APU start and each engine
start.
d. A NRCM will perform duties as required by his or her duty position and as
directed by the PC, according to the unit SOP, while maintaining situational awareness.
e. The PC will ensure the appropriate information is entered on DA Form 2408-12, DA Form 2408-13, DA
Form 2408-13-1, the HIT log according to the unit SOP, and DA PAM 738-751.
f. Secure the aircraft after completing the flight per the appropriate aircraft operator’s manual, the IETM EM
0271, TM 1-1500-250-23, and the unit SOP.
2. Procedures. Perform the before-starting-engine through before-leaving-helicopter checks per the aircraft
operator’s manual/CL. The call and response method should be used, as appropriate. The crewmember
reading the CL will read the complete CL item. The crewmember performing the check will answer with the
appropriate response. For example, for the call “Anti-collision/position lights – as required” the response
might be “Anti-collision lights, both, night; position lights, steady, bright.” Responses that don’t clearly
communicate action of information should not be used. For example, when responding to the call,
“Systems – check” replying with “check” doesn’t clearly indicate that the systems are within the normal
operating range. A response of “All in the normal operating range” communicates more accurate
information. Perform the HIT check and when complete, record data on the HIT log. After the flight,
enter all information required on the appropriate Department of the Army (DA) forms.
NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS: Before starting the engines, ensure that
internal and external lights are operational and set. Internal lighting levels must be high enough to easily see the
instruments and to start the engines without exceeding operating limitations.
SNOW/SAND/DUST CONSIDERATIONS: Ensure all rotating components and inlets/exhausts are clear of ice
and/or snow before starting APU/engines.

1. Training may be conducted in the aircraft or the simulator.
2. Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft unless flight activity category (FAC) 3 or instrument
APART is allowed in simulator.
REFERENCES: Appropriate common references, DA PAM 738-751, the HIT log, IETM EM 0271, and TM 1-
1500-250-23.
011-237/280-1024 (UH60) 4-32

TASK 1026
Maintain Airspace Surveillance
CONDITIONS: In an H-60 helicopter, given VMC conditions.

1. Brief airspace surveillance procedures prior to flight. This will include scan sectors.
2. Announce any unplanned drift or altitude changes, clear the aircraft, and immediately inform other
crewmembers of all air traffic or obstacles that pose a threat to the aircraft.
3. Announce when attention is focused inside the aircraft using a time limit that is appropriate for the
conditions and announce when attention is focused back outside.
4. Maintain airspace surveillance in assigned scan sectors.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew Actions.
a. The PC will brief airspace surveillance procedures prior to the flight. The briefing will include areas of
responsibility and scan sectors.
b. The P* will announce the intention to perform a specific maneuver and will remain focused outside the
aircraft. The P* is responsible for clearing the aircraft and obstacle avoidance.
c. The P and NRCM, as duties permit, will assist in clearing the aircraft and will provide adequate warning
of obstacles, unusual drift, or altitude changes. The P and NRCM will announce when attention is focused
inside the aircraft and again when attention is reestablished outside.
d. When landing, the crew will confirm the suitability of the area and that the aircraft is clear of barriers.
2. Procedures.
a. Maintain close surveillance of the surrounding airspace. Keep the aircraft clear from other aircraft and
obstacles by maintaining visual surveillance (close, mid, and far areas) of the surrounding airspace. Inform the
crew immediately of air traffic or obstacles that pose a threat to the aircraft. Call out the location of traffic or
obstacles by the clock, altitude, and distance method. (The 12 o’clock position is at the nose of the aircraft.)
Give distance in miles or fractions of miles for air traffic and in feet for ground obstacles. When reporting air
traffic, specify the type of aircraft (fixed-wing or helicopter) and, if known, the model. The altitude of the air
traffic should be reported as the same altitude, higher, or lower than the altitude at which you are flying.
b. Prior to changing altitude, visually clear the aircraft for hazards and obstacles inclusive of what is ahead,
above, below, and to the left and right of the aircraft.
c. Prior to performing a descending flight maneuver, it may sometimes be desirable to perform clearing “S”
turns to the left or right. The clearing “S” turns will provide the aircrew with a greater visual scan area.
d. During a hover or hovering flight, inform the P* of any unannounced drift or altitude changes. When
landing, the crew will confirm the suitability of the area.
011‐237/280‐1026 (UH60) 4-33

Note. The NRCM will Maintain Airspace Surveillance in support of the following tasks:
 1038, Perform Hovering Flight
 1040, Perform VMC Takeoff
 1052, Perform VMC Maneuvers
 1054, Select Landing Zone-Pickup Zone-Holding Area
 1058, Perform VMC Approach
 1155, Negotiate Wire Obstacles
NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS: Using proper scanning techniques will
assist in detecting traffic and obstacles, and in avoiding spatial disorientation. Hazards such as wires are
difficult to detect.

1. Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator.
011-237/280-1026 (UH60) 4-34

TASK 1028
Perform Hover Power Check
CONDITIONS: In an H-60 helicopter, at an appropriate hover height, and with performance planning information
available.

1. Determine whether aircraft weight exceeds maximum gross weight.
2. Verify aircraft gross weight.
3. Determine sufficient power is available to perform the mission.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The PC will determine whether the aircraft is capable of completing the assigned mission and will ensure
that aircraft limitations will not be exceeded.
b. The P* will announce his or her intent to bring the aircraft to a stationary hover for a hover power check.
During the ascent, check for proper CG and control response. Remain focused outside the aircraft and
announce when the aircraft is stabilized at the desired hover altitude. Use a 10-foot stationary hover in the
direction of takeoff preferably into the wind when performing a hover power check.
Note. A 3 to 5 knot crosswind or tailwind may increase torque required by up to 4% over zero wind
values.
c. The P will monitor the aircraft instruments and verify the power check. The P will compare the actual
hover performance data to the computed data on the PPC and announce the results to the P*. If GO/NO
GO IGE or OGE torque is indicated prior to reaching the planned hover height used during performance
planning, the P will tell the P* to stop the hover power check and land the aircraft. The PC will confirm
the GO/NO GO torque and adjust the mission as required.
d. The NRCM will remain focused primarily outside the aircraft to assist in clearing
and to provide adequate warning of obstacles.
Note. If an adjusted zero fuel weight is required, the data should be recorded when time permits and
for accuracy conducted into the wind.
2. Procedures.
a. Use the hover height computed during performance planning when performing this task unless the
mission or terrain constraints dictate otherwise.
b. At desired hover height, monitor the aircraft instruments and verify the power check. Compare the actual
performance data to that computed.
Note. If the torque required to maintain a stationary hover does not exceed the GO/NO GO torque
OGE, any maneuver requiring OGE/IGE power or less may be attempted. If the torque required to
maintain a stationary hover exceeds the GO/NO GO torque OGE but does not exceed the GO/NO
GO torque IGE, all IGE maneuvers may be attempted. If the torque required to maintain a stationary
hover exceeds the GO/NO GO IGE and structural limits have been exceeded, further flight is
prohibited until appropriate maintenance action is performed.
011-237/280-1028 (UH60) 4-35

2. Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft unless flight activity category (FAC) 3 or instrument
APART is allowed in the simulator.
011-237/280-1028 (UH60) 4-36

TASK 1032
Perform Radio Communication Procedures
CONDITIONS: In an H-60 helicopter.

1. RCM.
a. Program, check, and operate aircraft avionics.
b. Establish radio contact with the desired unit or air traffic control (ATC) facility. When communicating
with ATC facilities, use correct radio communication procedures and phraseology per the DOD FLIP and
Department of Transportation/Federal Aviation Administration (DOT/FAA) 7110.65.
c. Operate intercommunication system.
d. Explain two-way radio failure procedures per the DOD FLIP or host-nation regulations.
2. NRCM.
a. Operate intercommunication system.
b. Use the appropriate radio to communicate with the desired facility (as required for NRCM.)
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The PC will determine radio frequencies per mission requirements during the crew briefing and will
indicate whether the P* or P will establish and maintain primary communications.
b. The P* will announce information not monitored by the P.
c. The P will adjust avionics to required frequencies. The P will copy pertinent information and announce
information not monitored by the P*.
d. During normal operations, the NRCM will monitor external communications so as not to interrupt when
external communications are being transmitted or received. (Monitoring external communications may not
be desirable during operations requiring extensive internal communication; for example, sling loads, hoist,
rappelling, or emergencies.)
e. Certain operations may require that the NRCM transmit on an aircraft radio; for example, MEDEVAC.
The NRCM will coordinate with the PC before using aircraft radios.
f. Crew actions for two-way radio failure:
(1) P* or P will announce two-way radio failure to all crewmembers.
(2) The PC will direct the efforts to identify and correct the avionics malfunction.
(3) The P* will focus outside the aircraft VMC or inside IMC on the instruments, as appropriate, but
should not participate in troubleshooting the malfunction.
(4) The P will remain focused primarily inside the aircraft to identify and correct the avionics
malfunction.
011-237/280-1032 (UH60) 4-37

2. Procedures.
a. Adjust avionics to the required frequencies. Continuously monitor the avionics as directed by the PC.
When required, establish communications with the desired facility. Monitor the frequency before
transmitting. Transmit the desired/required information. Use the correct radio call sign when
acknowledging each communication. When advised to change frequencies, acknowledge instructions.
Select the new frequency as soon as possible unless instructed to do so at a specific time, fix, or altitude.
Use radio communication procedures and phraseology as appropriate for the area of operations. Use
standard terms and phraseology for all intercommunications.
b. Procedure for two-way radio failure. Attempt to identify and correct the malfunctioning radio and
announce the results. If two-way radio failure is confirmed, comply with procedure outlined in the Flight
Information Handbook.

1. Training may be conducted academically.
2. Evaluation may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator. Additionally, two-way radio failure may be
conducted academically.
REFERENCES: Appropriate common references and Department of Transportation/Federal Aviation

Administration (DOT/FAA) 7110.65.
011-237/280-1032 (UH60) 4-38

TASK 1034
Perform Ground Taxi

1. Maintain speed appropriate for conditions.
2. Maintain the desired ground track within ±3 feet.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The P* will ensure that the parking brake is released and the tail wheel is locked or unlocked as required
before starting the ground taxi. The P* will announce his or her intent to begin ground taxi operations, the
intended direction of any turns, and that the aircraft is clear of all traffic and obstacles. The P* will remain
focused primarily outside the aircraft.
b. The P and NRCM will help clear the aircraft and
provide adequate warning of traffic and obstacles. They also will announce when their attention is focused
2. Procedures. Ensure the area is suitable for ground taxi operations. Initiate the taxi by centering the cyclic and
increasing the collective slightly to start forward movement. If required, adjust lateral cyclic, pedals, or both to
release the tail wheel lockpin. Avoid droop stop pounding contact by using proper cyclic and collective control
applications. Ensure that both sets of brakes operate properly, conditions permitting. Use left or right pedal
input to turn the aircraft and lateral cyclic as necessary to maintain a level fuselage attitude in the turns. To
regulate the taxi speed, use a combination of collective, slight forward cyclic and brakes. Be aware that high
gross weights, soft, rough, or sloping terrain may require using more than normal power.
Note. During taxi with the tail wheel unlocked, fuselage roll attitude is controlled with the cyclic.
The attitude indicator, inclinometer, as well as outside visual cues, may be used to reference fuselage
roll attitude. The normal method for ground taxi is with the tail wheel in the unlocked position.
Note. While ground taxiing, minor heading changes may be made with the tail wheel locked.
However, care should be taken not to break or bend the tail wheel-locking pin. A slight fuselage roll
in the opposite direction may indicate excessive pedal input with the tail wheel locked. Excessive
collective application may activate the drag beam switch.
Note. Depending on ground velocity, emergency stops may be performed by lowering the collective
and applying the wheel breaks or by bringing the aircraft to a hover.
Note. Excessive cyclic input and insufficient collective application may result in droop stop
pounding or main rotor contact with mission equipment.
DROOP STOP POUNDING: DSP is a phenomenon that can occur when there is excessive downward
blade travel causing the blades to strike the droop stops when they are in the fly position. The conditions, which
combine to induce this type DSP, include excessive aft cyclic, low collective, and all wheels on the ground. The
maneuver that is most likely to produce DSP is the roll-on landing in conjunction with aerodynamic braking;
however, DSP can also occur during taxi and down slope landings.
NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS: The landing light should be used for
unaided ground taxi and the searchlight with installed infrared (IR) bypass filter when wearing NVGs. Using
proper scanning techniques will help detect obstacles that must be avoided.
011-237/280-1034 (UH60) 4-39

SNOW/SAND/DUST CONSIDERATIONS: If ground reference is lost because of blowing snow/sand/dust, lower
the collective, neutralize the flight controls, and apply wheel brakes until visual reference is reestablished. When
initiating ground taxi, apply pressure and counterpressure to the pedals to ensure the wheels/skis are not frozen to
the ground, if appropriate. Use caution when taxiing near other maneuvering aircraft because of limited visual
references and possible relative motion illusion.
Note. Because of decreased visual references and relative motion illusions, limit ground speed to a
safe rate.
Note. At night, use of the landing, search, or anti-collision lights may cause spatial disorientation in
blowing snow/sand/dust.

2. Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft or simulator.
011-237/280-1034 (UH60) 4-40

TASK 1038
Perform Hovering Flight
CONDITION: In an H-60 helicopter.

1. Perform a smooth, controlled ascent to hover.
2. Perform a smooth, controlled descent with minimum drift at touchdown.
3. M For coupled hover, engage the appropriate hover mode.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The P* will announce his or her intent to perform a specific hovering flight maneuver and will remain
focused primarily outside the aircraft to monitor altitude and avoid obstacles. The P* will ensure and
announce that the aircraft is cleared prior to turning or repositioning the aircraft. The P* will announce
when terminating the maneuver.
b. The P and NRCM will assist in clearing the aircraft and
provide adequate warning of obstacles, unannounced drift, or altitude changes. They will announce when
their attention is focused inside the aircraft and again when attention is reestablished outside.
2. Procedures.
a. Takeoff to a hover. With the collective full down, place the cyclic in a neutral position and increase the
collective smoothly. Apply pedals to maintain heading, and coordinate the cyclic for a vertical ascent. As
the aircraft leaves the ground, check for the proper control response and aircraft CG.
b. Hovering flight. Adjust the cyclic to maintain a stationary hover or to move in the desired direction.
Control heading with the pedals, and maintain altitude with the collective. The rate of movement and
altitude should be appropriate for existing conditions. To return to a stationary hover, apply cyclic in the
opposite direction while maintaining altitude with the collective and heading with the pedals.
c. M Coupled hovering flight. Engage coupled hover (HVR) mode by either pressing in (Z axis) on the
cyclic trim beeper or manually selecting HVR on the FD/DCP. Directional flight is achieved by moving
the cyclic trim beeper in the direction of desired travel until desired rate of movement is established. The
rate of movement and altitude should be appropriate for existing conditions. Change altitude by adjusting
either the collective trim beeper or the RALT P-SYNC knob on the FD/DCP.
Note. Air taxi is the preferred method for ground movements on airports provided ground operations
and conditions permit. Unless otherwise requested or instructed, pilots are expected to remain below
100 feet AGL. However, if a higher than normal airspeed or altitude is desired, the request should
be made prior to lift-off. The pilot is solely responsible for selecting a safe airspeed for the
altitude/operation being conducted. Using air taxi enables the pilot to proceed at an optimum
airspeed/altitude, minimize downwash effect, conserve fuel, and expedite movement from one point
to another.
d. Hovering turns. Apply pressure to the desired pedal to begin the turn. Use pressure and counter-pressure
on the pedals to maintain the desired rate of turn. Coordinate cyclic control to maintain position over the
pivot point while maintaining altitude with the collective. Hovering turns can be made around any vertical
axis (for example, the nose, mast, tail of the aircraft, or a point in front of the aircraft). However, turns
other than about the center of the aircraft will increase the turn radius proportionately.
e. M Coupled hovering turns. Change aircraft heading by adjusting the collective trim beeper.
Note. Cyclic turns should only be used when necessary.
011-237/280-1038 (UH60) 4-41

Note. When landing from a hover to an unimproved area, the crew must check for obstacles under
the aircraft.
M Note. The P* should closely monitor the collective during coupled hover operations near the
ground.
NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS:

1. Movement over areas of limited contrast—such as tall grass, water, or desert—tends to cause spatial
disorientation. Seek hover areas that provide adequate contrast and use proper scanning techniques. If
disorientation occurs, apply sufficient power and execute an instrument takeoff (ITO) (Task 1170). If a go-
around is not feasible, try to maneuver the aircraft forward and down to the ground to limit the possibility of
touchdown with lateral or aft movement.
2. When performing operations during unaided night flight, ensure that the searchlight or landing light (white
light) is in the desired position. Using the white light will impair night vision for several minutes. Therefore,
exercise added caution if resuming flight before reaching full dark adaptation.
SNOW/SAND/DUST CONSIDERATIONS:
1. During ascent to a hover, if visual references do not deteriorate to an unacceptable level, continue ascent to
the desired hover altitude.
2. . For hover taxi: During takeoff to a hover, simultaneously accelerate the aircraft to a ground speed that keeps
the snow/sand/dust cloud aft of the main rotor mast.
3. M For coupled hover taxi: Prior to takeoff, select the hover (HVR) display on the PFD to obtain cues
for maintaining position and velocity reference (VREF). During takeoff to a hover, press in on the cyclic trim
beeper (Z axis) and adjust to an appropriate altitude. Move the cyclic trim beeper in the desired direction to
accelerate the aircraft to a ground speed or velocity reference (VREF) that keeps the snow/sand/dust
cloud aft of the main rotor mast. Hover velocity hold (HVR VHLD) will be displayed on the appropriate FD/
DCP and will maintain the aircraft at the desired velocity until the pilot changes the references used by the
flight director (FD).
Note. Maintain optimum visibility by observing references close to the aircraft. Exercise caution
when operating in close proximity to other aircraft or obstacles.
Note. When visual references deteriorate making a hover taxi unsafe, determine whether to abort the
maneuver, ground taxi, air taxi, or perform an ITO (Task 1170).
Note. Hovering OGE reduces available ground references and may increase the possibility of spatial
disorientation. Be prepared to transition to instruments and execute an ITO (Task 1170) or
unusual attitude recovery (Task 1182) if ground reference is lost.
Note. At night, use of landing, search, or anti-collision light may cause spatial disorientation while in
blowing snow/sand/dust.
CONFINED AREA CONSIDERATIONS: Select good references to avoid unanticipated drift. All crewmembers
must be focused primarily outside for obstacle avoidance.

011-237/280-1038 (UH60) 4-42

TASK 1040
Perform Visual Meteorological Conditions Takeoff
CONDITIONS: In an H-60 helicopter given VMC conditions and with maximum torque available
known.

1. Maintain aircraft in trim above 50 feet AGL or as appropriate for transition to mission profile.
2. When operating within 3,000 lbs of MAX GWT OGE, estimate the point where the aircraft will enter ETL
and establish an abort line to assist in determining type of takeoff
3. Determine the type of takeoff that requires the minimum amount of power to clear the obstacles, taking into
account gross weight, power available, and distance from obstacles:
a. Constant angle
b. Vertical
c. Level Acceleration
d. Rolling Takeoff
4. Additional Standards for rolling takeoff:
a. Before liftoff—
1.) Establish and maintain power, as necessary.
2.) Maintain alignment with takeoff direction ±5 degrees.

3.) Accelerate to desired/planned takeoff speed not to exceed 60 knots ground speed.
b. After liftoff—
1.) Adjust power, as required, not to exceed aircraft limits.
2.) Maintain ground track alignment with the takeoff direction with minimum drift.
3.) Maintain maximum rate of climb airspeed ±5 KIAS.
4.) Maintain aircraft aligned with runway (or suitable liftoff surface) below maximum rate of climb
airspeed.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The PC will determine the direction of takeoff by analyzing the tactical situation, the wind, the long axis
of the takeoff area, and the lowest obstacles, and will confirm that required power is available by
comparing the information from the PPC to the hover power check and or dynamic performance update if
applicable.
b. After assessing the LZ, wind, and obstacles, the P* will select the type of takeoff—level acceleration,
constant angle, vertical, or rolling take off. The P* will then determine the ETL point for the takeoff
selected and establish an abort plan.
Note. In having to determine the ETL point, the P* is forced to accurately consider the effects of
control inputs, wind, and surface considerations. In considering a NOE deceleration as part of the
abort plan, the P* must consider the amount of power and tail rotor authority available for the abort
and the amount of airspeed at the time of the abort.
Note. For training any under or over estimation of the point must be explained in the post-task
analysis following the takeoff maneuver. The amount of power determined necessary for the
maneuver would also be the hypothetical limit for establishing the takeoff escape plan. Power used
beyond that determined necessary would have to be explained in the takeoff post-task analysis.
011-237/280-1040 (UH60) 4-43

Note. When conducting operations with jettisonable external stores, the P will be prepared to jettison
the stores when operating below minimum single-engine airspeed or as briefed during the crew
briefing.
c. The P* will remain focused primarily outside the aircraft throughout the maneuver to provide obstacle
clearance. The P* will announce whether the takeoff is from the ground or from a hover and his or her intent
to abort or alter the takeoff. The P* will select reference points to assist in maintaining the takeoff flight
path.
d. The P and NRCM will announce when ready for takeoff and will remain focused primarily outside
the aircraft to assist in clearing and to provide adequate warning of obstacles. The P will monitor
power requirements and advise the P* if power limits are being approached. The P and NRCM
will announce when their attention is focused inside the aircraft and again when attention is
reestablished outside.
e. The NRCM will assist in clearing the aircraft, advise the P* when the tail and main landing gear are off the
ground, and obstacle avoidance.
Note. To determine maximum torque available when IGE hover power is not present, apply
collective, not to exceed dual engine torque and TGT limits, while observing the TGT. Maximum
torque available will be indicated by a droop in rotor RPM with further increase in the collective.
Note the torque and reduce the collective. Fluctuation in torque from flight control inputs and
environmental conditions should be factored in to the torque value used for the maneuver.
2. Procedures.
a. Constant Angle or Vertical. Select reference points to maintain ground track. With the cyclic and pedals
in the neutral position, increase power. Continue applying power as required to transition to mission
profile. As the aircraft leaves the ground, maintain heading with pedals and apply forward cyclic as
required to establish an accelerative attitude appropriate for the terrain and to avoid obstacles. Adjust the
cyclic to continue the acceleration to the desired climb airspeed, and maintain the desired ground track.
Make the required power adjustments to clear obstacles in the flight path, and obtain the desired rate of
climb. Maintain heading with the pedals when below 50-feet AGL or until making the transition to terrain
flight; then place the aircraft in trim. After obtaining the desired airspeed, adjust the cyclic as necessary to
stop the acceleration and maintain desired climb airspeed. Maintain takeoff power until reaching minimum
single engine airspeed and then adjust power as necessary to continue the desired rate of climb or transition
to mission profile.
(1). In this maneuver, the angle can range from vertical to flat. It demands that more power is available
than the power required to hover. The angle is initiated from the point of hover (or ground) to a point
in space. The goal is for the P* to accurately predict the amount of power required to clear the obstacle
given a particular angle. The P* initiates the takeoff by coordinating all the flight controls to begin a
constant angle climb over a predetermined path. Power is used as required, and the P notes the amount
as well as when it was used.
(2). Vertical takeoffs are also constant angle takeoffs. As in very steep to vertical approaches, there is a
point where there is no discernible difference in power required between vertical takeoffs and those of
a lesser angle. In some wind conditions, less power is required to depart vertically than at a lesser
angle.
Note. If P* is unsure if takeoff method will clear obstacles, P* should consider a vertical takeoff even
though it requires more power than other methods. The intent is if the rotors start to droop, the
aircraft is already over a clear area and the aircraft can descend and land safely. If obstacles are too
close and P* runs out of power attempting another type of takeoff, there may not be enough power to
abort and may cause the rotor to droop and the aircraft may settle into the obstacles. A vertical
takeoff should eventually turn into a level acceleration as soon as aircraft starts transitioning forward.
011-237/280-1040 (UH60) 4-44

b. Level acceleration. This is a situation where the power required to hover is the maximum power
available. The P* will coordinate cyclic and pedals as necessary to accelerate the aircraft. The first
objective is to achieve ETL without allowing the aircraft to settle to the surface. If it becomes apparent that
the aircraft will contact the surface, apply sufficient aft cyclic to prevent contact or abort if necessary, and
analyze for cause. As the transverse flow shudder develops, increase forward cyclic. As the aircraft enters
ETL, make a significant forward cyclic input to prevent blowback. Maintain altitude and allow the aircraft
to accelerate until the climb point is reached. Adjust the cyclic as necessary and climb to the necessary
height. If using the best angle, ensure ETL is not lost. Estimate the point where the aircraft will enter ETL
and establish an abort line.
Note. Level acceleration does not need to be conducted at 10 feet. It can be initiated at any altitude
that power allows to ensure obstacle clearance.
Note. Recommendation—Practice this maneuver paralleling barriers rather than into them until
proficiency is attained.
Note. Avoid unnecessary nose low accelerate attitudes; 5 degrees nose low is recommended for
acceleration. However, 10 degrees nose low should not be exceeded.
Note. Performing this maneuver in certain environments may require OGE hover power. Evaluate
each situation for power required versus power available.
(1) From the ground with less than OGE power. Select reference points to maintain ground track. With
the cyclic and pedals in the neutral position, increase power until the aircraft becomes “light on the
wheels.” Continue applying power until the aircraft is airborne. As the aircraft leaves the ground, apply
forward cyclic as required to avoid obstacles and to accelerate smoothly through ETL at an altitude
appropriate for the terrain. Adjust the cyclic to continue the acceleration to the desired climb airspeed
and maintain the desired ground track. Make the required power adjustments to clear obstacles in the
flight path and to obtain the desired rate of climb. Maintain heading with the pedals when below 50
feet AGL or until making the transition to mission profile; then place the aircraft in trim. After
obtaining the desired airspeed, adjust the cyclic as necessary to stop the acceleration. Adjust power
as necessary to continue or to stop the rate of climb.
(2) From a hover with less than OGE power. Apply forward cyclic to accelerate the aircraft while
applying power to maintain the desired hover altitude. Perform the rest of the maneuver as for a takeoff
from the ground with less than OGE power.
WARNING
If the takeoff is aborted, it may be impossible to stop the aircraft
before clearing the barriers (depending on aircraft weight, speed,
surface composition, and size of the takeoff area). Some situations
requiring this maneuver will usually result in very marginal single-
engine characteristics. This increased risk factor will be addressed
during the mission risk assessment process.
c. Rolling takeoff. A rolling takeoff may be used when hover power for takeoff is marginal or insufficient
and a takeoff must be made, or as an alternate method of takeoff when sufficient power is available
(dissipate dust, reduce rotor downwash). Use the rotor system thrust to accelerate the aircraft to a more
efficient speed for flight.
Note. For training, use 10 percent torque below the aircraft 10-foot hover torque to simulate the
maximum torque available.
011-237/280-1040 (UH60) 4-45

(1) Verify that the takeoff surface is suitable for the maneuver to include abort stopping distance and
select ground reference points.
(2) With appropriate crew actions completed, select ground reference points for longitudinal alignment
with the desired takeoff direction. Maintain aircraft position with neutral cyclic and increase the
collective to establish the aircraft “light on the wheels.” The amount of percentage torque will depend
on gross weight. Begin accelerating the aircraft forward by smoothly applying forward cyclic while
progressively increasing the collective to a power setting that will ensure that the main landing gear
wheels remain in contact with the surface until takeoff airspeed is achieved. Use the pedals to maintain
heading aligned with the desired takeoff direction. The tailwheel may come off the surface as the
stabilator begins to produce lift with forward airspeed.
(3) Upon reaching takeoff airspeed, adjust the collective to maximum torque available or as
planned/briefed and cyclic as necessary to allow the aircraft to become airborne. Depending on liftoff
speed the stabilator may cause a slight nose down attitude. At approximately 20 feet above the surface,
apply forward cyclic to maintain an in-ground-effect level acceleration to the maximum rate-of-climb
airspeed. Place the aircraft in trim as soon as maximum rate of climb airspeed is achieved after the
aircraft becomes airborne commensurate with surface obstacles. Trade off altitude as necessary to gain
airspeed if the area is clear of obstacles. Maintain heading with pedals so the aircraft is aligned with the
runway/surface takeoff direction when the aircraft is below maximum rate-of-climb airspeed should
the takeoff need to be aborted. Upon reaching maximum rate-of-climb airspeed, adjust the attitude to
maintain the maximum rate-of-climb airspeed and maintain power as necessary until reaching the
desired level-off altitude and maintain aircraft in trim.
(4) Maintain the takeoff power setting until reaching climb airspeed. Adjust power as required to
establish the desired rate of climb and cyclic to maintain the desired airspeed. Alternate attention
between cross-checking instruments and assisting in obstacle avoidance. The P* and NRCM should
maintain orientation outside the aircraft and concentrate on obstacle avoidance. The P should make all
internal checks.

1. If sufficient illumination exists to view obstacles, accomplish the takeoff in the same way as a VMC
takeoff during the day. Visual obstacles, such as shadows, should be treated the same as physical obstacles. If
sufficient illumination does not exist, perform a Vertical takeoff by applying takeoff power first followed by
a slow acceleration to ensure obstacle clearance. The P* may perform the takeoff from a hover or from the
ground.
2. Maintain desired ground track. Reduced visual references during the takeoff—and throughout the ascent at
night—may make it difficult to maintain the desired ground track. Knowledge of the surface wind direction and
velocity will assist in maintaining the desired ground track.
3. Use proper scanning techniques to avoid spatial disorientation.
light) is in the desired position. Using the white light will impair night vision several minutes. Therefore,
NIGHT OR NVG CONSIDERATIONS (ROLLING TAKEOFF):

1. If sufficient illumination or NVD resolution does not exist, a rolling takeoff should not be performed.
2. Reduced visual references during the takeoff and throughout the ascent at night may make it difficult to
maintain the desired ground track. Knowledge of the surface wind direction and velocity will assist in
establishing the crab angle required to maintain the desired ground track.
3. The landing light or searchlight is recommended at night to view obstacles and maintain awareness of the
rotor tip path plane. Ensure ground clearance with the searchlight or landing light as the helicopter lifts off the
ground.
011-237/280-1040 (UH60) 4-46

SNOW/SAND/DUST CONSIDERATIONS: As the aircraft leaves the surface, maintain heading with the pedals
and a level attitude with the cyclic. as the aircraft clears the snow/sand/dust cloud and clears the barriers, accelerate
to climb airspeed and trim the aircraft.
Note. In some cases, applying collective to blow away loose snow/sand/dust from around the aircraft
is beneficial before performing this maneuver.
Note. Be prepared to transition to instruments and execute an ITO if ground reference is lost.
Note. At night, use of the landing, search, or anti-collision lights may cause spatial disorientation
while in blowing snow/sand/dust.
SNOW/SAND/DUST CONSIDERATIONS (ROLLING TAKEOFF): This task may be used in environments

where these conditions are present. It may allow the aircraft to get ahead of the blowing conditions into clear air
before takeoff. This maneuver should be aborted if visual cues become lost when power is applied. Extreme care
should be taken to confirm that the snow, sand, or dust conditions do not cover rough areas in the takeoff path that
could damage the aircraft.
CONFINED AREA CONSIDERATIONS: Confirm the takeoff plan prior to departure. Perform a hover power
check. Re-position the aircraft, if desired, to afford a shallower departure angle and minimize power requirements.
During departure, adjust the cyclic and the collective as required to establish a constant departure angle to clear
obstacles. All crewmembers must focus primarily outside for obstacle avoidance.
MOUNTAIN/PINNACLE/RIDGELINE CONSIDERATIONS: Analyze winds, obstacles, and density altitude.

Perform a hover power check or determine power requirements through dynamic in flight update methods.
Determine the best takeoff direction and path for conditions. After clearing any obstacle(s), accelerate the aircraft to
the desired airspeed.
Note. Where drop-offs are located along the takeoff path, the aircraft may be maneuvered down slope
to gain airspeed.
MUD/MUSKEG/TUNDRA CONSIDERATIONS: Perform one of the following takeoff techniques.

1. From dry muskeg/tundra areas. A vertical takeoff may be best in drier areas where the aircraft has not sunk
into the muskeg/tundra or where obstacles prohibit motion. Smoothly increase the collective until the crew
confirms that the wheels/skis are free. Adjust controls as necessary to perform a VMC takeoff.
2. From wet areas. In wet areas where the aircraft is likely to have sunk or is stuck in the mud/muskeg/tundra,
the following technique may be best: With the cyclic in the neutral position, smoothly increase the collective.
As hover power is approached, place the cyclic slightly forward of the neutral position and slowly move the
pedals back and forth. Continue increasing the collective and "swim" the aircraft forward to break the suction of
the wheels/skis. When free, adjust the controls as necessary to perform a VMC takeoff.
Note. Before performing operations in a mud/muskeg/tundra environment, the crew must understand
dynamic roll over characteristics.
TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS

1. Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator. All four types of takeoffs must be taught in
RL progression.
2. Evaluator may select any or all types of takeoff for evaluation. Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft.
011-237/280-1040 (UH60) 4-47

TASK 1044
Navigate By Pilotage and Dead Reckoning
CONDITIONS: In an H-60 helicopter with the appropriate maps, plotter, flight computer, and flight log.

1. Maintain orientation within ½ mile or 800 meters.
2. Arrive at checkpoints/destination at estimated time of arrival (ETA) ±1 minute.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The P* will focus primarily outside the aircraft and respond to navigation instructions or cues
given by the P. The P* will acknowledge commands issued by the P for the heading, altitude, and
airspeed changes necessary to navigate the desired course. The P* will announce significant surface
features to assist in navigation.
b. The P will direct the P* to change aircraft heading, altitude, and airspeed as appropriate to navigate the
desired course. The P will use rally terms, specific headings, relative bearings, or key terrain features to
accomplish this task. He or she will announce all plotted wires before approaching their location. The
P and NRCM will monitor aircraft instruments, assist in clearing the aircraft, and provide adequate
warning to avoid traffic and obstacles. The P and NRCM will announce when their attention is focused
2. Procedures.
a. Both pilotage and dead reckoning will be used to maintain the position of the aircraft along the planned
route. Planned headings will be adjusted as necessary to compensate for the effects of the wind.
b. Perform a ground speed check as soon as possible by computing the actual time required to fly a known
distance. Adjust estimated times for subsequent legs of the flight route using the computed ground speed.
Compare planned ground speed with computed ground speed and adjust airspeed as required to arrive at
each control point at its original ETA.
NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS: More detailed flight planning is required
when the flight is conducted at night. Interior cockpit lighting should be considered when selecting colors for
preparing navigational aids such as maps and kneeboard notes.

1. Training may be conducted in the aircraft or the simulator.
011-237/280-1044 (UH60) 4-48

TASK 1046
Perform Electronically Aided Navigation
CONDITION: In an H-60 helicopter with an electronically aided navigation system installed and operational.

1. Operate the installed electronically aided navigational system per the appropriate TM.
2. Determine the position of the aircraft along the route of flight within 300 meters.
3. M Configure the FD/DCP and MFD for desired processed data.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The P* will focus primarily outside the aircraft and respond to navigation instructions or cues
given by the P. The P* will acknowledge commands issued by the P for the heading, altitude, and
airspeed changes necessary to navigate the desired course. The P* will announce significant terrain
features to assist in navigation.
b. The P will be the primary operator of the electronically aided navigation system. The P will direct the P*
to change aircraft heading, altitude, and airspeed as appropriate to navigate the desired course. The P will
use rally terms, specific headings, relative bearings, or key terrain features to accomplish this task. The P
will announce all plotted wires before approaching their location. The P and NRCM will monitor aircraft
instruments, assist in clearing the aircraft, and provide adequate warning to avoid traffic and obstacles.
2. Procedures.
a. A/L Perform the turn-on, test, and programming procedures per the appropriate TM. If the CIS processed
data is selected, the displayed course may be flown. The proper updating and shutdown procedures will be
performed per the appropriate TM.
b. M Program the desired routes using the FMS and digital map.

011-237/280-1046 (UH60) 4-49

TASK 1048
Perform Fuel Management Procedures
WARNING
Failure to monitor fuel balancing operations could result in engine
flameout because of fuel starvation.
CONDITIONS: In an H-60 helicopter with a (CPU)-26A/P computer, calculator, or M FMS.

1. RCM
a. The PC will verify that the required amount of fuel is onboard at the time of takeoff.
b. Initiate an alternate course of action if the actual fuel consumption varies from the planned value and the
flight cannot be completed without the planned use of the required reserve.
c. Balance/manage fuel tank levels to maintain aircraft within CG limits.
2. RCM/NRCM
a. Initiate an in-flight fuel consumption check within 10 minutes of leveling off or within 10 minutes of
entering into the mission profile.
b. Within 15 to 30 minutes after taking the initial readings, compute the fuel consumption rate ±50 pounds
per hour and complete the fuel consumption check.
c. Monitor the remaining fuel quantity and the continuing rate of consumption.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. Prior to takeoff the crew will verify the required amount of fuel is onboard at the time of takeoff. The P
or NRCM will record the initial fuel figures, fuel flow computation, burnout, and reserve times. The P or
NRCM will announce when initiating the fuel check and when completing the fuel check. The P or NRCM
also will announce the results of the fuel check.
b. The P* will acknowledge the results of the fuel check.
c. The PC will confirm the results of the fuel check.
d. If applicable, the P will announce when the fuel transfer switch or fuel selector lever(s) are repositioned
and when the fuel transfer/balancing operation is completed.
e. The NRCM will acknowledge and monitor the fuel transfer/balancing operation until the operation is
completed.
2. Procedures.
a. When performing the before takeoff check, determine the total fuel onboard, and compare it with fuel
required for the mission. If the fuel onboard is inadequate, add sufficient fuel or abort or revise the mission.
b. Initial airborne fuel reading. Within 10 minutes after leveling off or within 10 minutes of entering into
the mission profile, record the total fuel quantity and the time of reading. Complete the fuel consumption
check 15 to 30 minutes after taking the initial airborne fuel reading. Determine whether the remaining fuel
is sufficient to complete the flight without the planned use of the required reserve.
Note. Crews should verify ability to transfer fuel from external to internal tanks before using external
tank fuel quantities in fuel reserve/burnout computations.
011-237/280-1048 (UH60) 4-50

Note. Do not perform fuel consumption checks while transferring fuel from external fuel tank(s) to
internal fuel tanks.
c. Fuel quantity and consumption. Periodically monitor the fuel quantity and consumption rate. If the fuel
quantity or flow indicates a deviation from computed values, repeat the fuel consumption check to
determine if the amount of fuel is adequate to complete the flight. Periodically check individual fuel tank
indicators to determine that the system is operating properly.
Note. If an emergency or urgent situation requires placing an ENG FUEL SYS selector to cross-feed
(for example, fuel filter bypass caution light), recalculate burnout time and reserve entry time based
on the usable fuel remaining.
d. Main fuel balance operations. Place the ENG FUEL SYS selector of the lowest fuel indicator to
crossfeed (XFD). After the fuel quantities equalize, return the selector to direct (DIR).
e. Auxiliary fuel management. Follow procedures outlined in the appropriate aircraft operator’s manual
when using the external extended range fuel system. When using nonstandard auxiliary fuel systems, use
the appropriate manufacturer’s operator’s manuals.

2. Evaluation may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator.
REFERENCES: Appropriate common references and the manufacturer's operator’s manual.
011-237/280-1048 (UH60) 4-51

TASK 1052
Perform Visual Meteorological Conditions Flight Maneuvers
CONDITIONS: In an H-60 helicopter given VMC conditions.
STANDARDS: Appropriate common standards and (RCM only) enter, operate in, and depart a traffic pattern.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The P* will remain focused primarily outside the aircraft. The P* will announce and
clear each turn, climb, and descent.
b. The P and NRCM will assist in clearing the aircraft and will provide adequate
warning of traffic and obstacles. They will announce when their attention is focused inside the aircraft
and again when attention is reestablished outside.
2. Procedures. Adjust cyclic as required to maintain the desired airspeed, course, ground track, or heading as
appropriate. Adjust collective as required to maintain the desired climb/descent rate or altitude and
maintain aircraft in trim with the pedals. Perform traffic pattern operations per ATC directives, local
SOPs, and TC 3-04.4.
NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS: The P* will focus primarily outside the
aircraft and should concentrate on obstacle avoidance and aircraft control. The P will make all internal cockpit
checks.
1. Training may be conducted in aircraft or simulator.
011-237/280-1052 (UH60) 4-52

TASK 1054
Select Landing Zone - Pickup Zone - Holding Area
WARNING
Not all hazards will be shown on a map. When using a map
reconnaissance to determine suitability, the added risk of unknown
hazards must be addressed during the mission risk assessment
process.
CONDITIONS: In an H-60 helicopter given a map or photo data.

1. Perform map, photo, or visual reconnaissance.
2. Determine that the LZ, PZ, or holding area is suitable for operations and provide accurate and detailed
information to supported unit (if applicable).
3. (For power critical landings), Establish altitude, airspeed, and flight path for conducting a high
reconnaissance commensurate with terrain and environmental conditions.
4. Determine approximate wind direction and velocity at touchdown point and identify other pertinent wind
characteristics in proximity to LZ.
5. Assess the LZ size, axis, surface conditions, and obstacles.
6. Plan ingress and egress routes to include escape routes required above and below ETL.
7. Confirm the winds and tentative plan formulated in the high reconnaissance by performing a thorough low
reconnaissance.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The crew will confirm the location of plotted hazards and call out location of unplotted hazards.
b. On approaching the landing area, the crew will identify the LZ and determine its suitability for landing
and takeoff.
c. (For power critical landings) The P* will establish a high reconnaissance pattern appropriate for the
terrain and wind. Using tabular data, or other in flight dynamic updates such as EDM with IPAC or
H-60M with FMS software, the P will determine whether OGE capability exists and the maximum power
available. The P*/P will assess the wind in and around the LZ using as necessary wind/terrain analysis,
visible indications, and cockpit indications. The P*/P will determine suitable ingress and egress routes and
select the landing point. The routing should reflect power available, wind conditions, and escape options
available for an aircraft at maximum gross weight. When the wind direction and conditions are in doubt,
the best escape routes should dictate the approach and departure routes. An example of a LZ sequence is
listed at the end of this task but units may make their own (table 1). The purpose of a LZ sequence is help
pilots remember the crucial steps to ensure safe landings in a power critical landing.
Note. The best possible route is that route requiring the least amount of power for the landing intended—
to the ground or a particular hover height—without compromising a viable escape.
011-237/280-1054 (UH60) 4-53

Note. The difference between a go-around and an escape is that a go-around is a proactive maneuver
with full control available while an escape is a reactive maneuver used to manage unplanned events.
The collective will usually be maintained or reduced during an escape maneuver.
d. The tentative plan for the landing and takeoff is established in the high reconnaissance. The low
reconnaissance is performed to confirm or refute information determined in the high reconnaissance. It is
performed as low and as slow as good judgment dictates but not below ETL. The P*/P must use cockpit or
visual cues to confirm wind predictions, verify the suitability of the landing point, confirm that the escape
routes identified are viable, confirm the altitude of the landing point, and verify environmental conditions
are the same as those selected in the tabular data. The P* will thoroughly brief the maneuver and crew
duties including those duties required if an escape plan is executed.
Note. This is a training maneuver unto itself and should not be rushed or performed haphazardly.
Small errors or omissions may result in incorrect power calculations. The pilots must anticipate the
aircraft’s limits and their own limits. At no time in power management training will pilots knowingly
attempt to execute landing or takeoffs at less than actual torque values.
e. The P* will remain focused primarily outside the aircraft throughout the maneuver for aircraft control
and obstacle avoidance. The P* will announce his or her intent to deviate from the maneuver.
f. The P and NRCM will assist in LZ reconnaissance and clearing the aircraft. They will provide
adequate warning of obstacles and will acknowledge the P*'s intent to deviate from the
maneuver.
2. Procedures. Gather map or photo data on potential LZ(s) or conduct an in-flight suitability check when map
or photo data is unreliable. Determine the suitability by evaluating size, long axis, barriers, surface conditions,
tactical situation, and effects of the wind. Select a flight path, altitude, and airspeed that afford the best
observation of the landing area, as required. Determine an approach, desired touchdown point, and departure
path. The tactical, technical, and meteorological elements must be considered in determining suitability.
Note. If wind conditions will be a factor, a wind evaluation should be performed. Techniques
for evaluating wind conditions are found in TC 3-04.4.
Note. Depending on the mission, an in-flight suitability check may not be feasible. Suitability may be
determined by a map reconnaissance. Make a final determination of suitability upon arrival to the
LZ/PZ.
a. Tactical.
(1) Mission. Determine whether the mission can be done from the selected LZ. Consider flight time,
fuel, number of sorties, and access routes.
(2) Location. To reduce troop fatigue, consider distance of PZ or LZ from supported unit or objective.
Also consider the supported unit's mission, equipment, and method of travel to/from PZ/LZ.
(3) Security. Consider size and proximity of threat elements versus availability of security forces. The
supported unit normally provides security. Consider cover and concealment, key terrain, avenues of
approach and departure. The area should be large enough to provide dispersion.
b. Technical.
(1) Number and type of aircraft. Determine if the size of the LZ can support all the aircraft at once or if
they must rotate into LZ for in-flight linkup.
(2) Landing formation. Plan landing formation for shape and size of LZ.
(3) Sling loads. For missions requiring sling loads at or near maximum gross weight of the helicopter,
select larger LZs where barriers have minimum vertical development.
011-237/280-1054 (UH60) 4-54

(4) Surface conditions. Consider slopes; blowing sand, snow, or dust. Be aware that vegetation may
conceal surface hazards (for example, large rocks, ruts, or stumps). Areas selected should also be free
of sources of rotor wash signature.
(5) Obstacles. Hazards within the LZ that cannot be eliminated must be plotted. Plan approach and
departure routes over lowest obstacles.
c. Meteorological.
(1) Ceiling and visibility. Ceiling and visibility are critical when operating near threat elements.
IIMC recovery can expose the aircraft and crew to radar guided and heat-seeking weapons, with few
options for detection and avoidance. If one aircrew of a multiship operation must respond to IIMC,
the element of surprise will be lost, the assets onboard will not be available for the mission, and the
entire mission may be at risk.
(2) Winds. Determine approach and departure paths.
(3) Pressure altitude (PA). High PA may limit loads and, therefore, require more sorties.
Note. Avoid planning approach or departure routes into a rising or setting sun or moon.
Table 1. Landing zone sequence example
1. Identify Landing Zone

a. Temp, PA
b. Suitability - Size, slope, surface, long-axis, obstacles
2. Power Requirements
a. Max TQ, Hover TQ
b. Tab data OGE weight
c. A/C weight (0 fuel wt + fuel)
d. Difference (+/-)
e. Percent TQ (+/-)
f. Max TQ (Verbalize)
g. Hover TQ (Verbalize)
3. Wind
a. Assessment of the direction and velocity of the wind by
cockpit indicators, visual indicators, GPS, last known or forecast
wind, or flight maneuvers.
b. Analysis of terrain, trees, buildings and their effects upon
wind creating updrafts, downdrafts, headwinds, tailwinds,
crosswinds and demarcation lines from a large scale down to
the touchdown point.
4. Route
a. In, Out, Escape - Wind should dictate route in, out, and
escape.
b. In calm wind use the route that affords the best escape.
5. Low Reconnaissance-Verify wind, escape, and touchdown point.
6. Approach/Takeoff-Predicted, expended, actual.
011-237/280-1054 (UH60) 4-55

1. Unimproved and unlit areas are more difficult to evaluate at night because of low contrast. Knowledge of the
various methods for determining the height of obstacles is critical to successfully completing this task. Visual
obstacles such as shadows should be treated the same as physical obstacles.
CONFINED AREA CONSIDERATIONS: Determine a suitable axis and path for a go-around. For multi
aircraft operations, determine the number of aircraft that the area can accommodate safely.
SNOW/SAND/DUST CONSIDERATIONS: Devaluate surface conditions for the likelihood of encountering a

whiteout/brownout. Determine a suitable axis and path for a go-around.
MOUNTAIN/PINNACLE/RIDGELINE CONSIDERATIONS: When practical, position the aircraft on the

windward side of the area. Evaluate suitability—paying particular attention to PA and winds. Determine a
suitable axis and escape route for a go-around. Operations at high altitudes are more likely to expose the crews to
visual detection, radar, or heat-seeking weapons.

011-237/280-1054 (UH60) 4-56

TASK 1058
Perform Visual Meteorological Conditions Approach
CONDITIONS: In an H-60 helicopter given VMC conditions with the landing area reconnaissance complete.
STANDARDS: Appropriate common standards and the following additions/modifications (RCM):
1. Select a suitable landing area (analyze suitability, barriers, wind, approach path, touchdown point, and
takeoff direction).
2. Ensure that sufficient power exists for the type of approach/landing desired.
3. Maintain a constant approach angle clear of obstacles to desired point of termination (hover) or touchdown
(surface).
4. Maintain rate of closure appropriate for the conditions.
5. Maintain ground track alignment with the landing direction, as appropriate.
6. Align aircraft with landing direction below 50 feet AGL or as appropriate for transition from terrain flight.
7. Perform a smooth and controlled termination to a hover or touchdown to the surface.
8. Monitor wind conditions using cockpit indicators (CI).
9. Determine wind direction and velocity at the landing point.
DESCRIPTION:
WARNING
During limited visibility landings, once the main landing gear contact
the ground, the cyclic must be centered prior to placing the collective
to the full down position. Excessive aft cyclic may result in contact
between the main rotor blades and the aft section of the helicopter
resulting in loss of drive and directional control.
1. Crew actions.
a. The P* will maintain his or her primary focus outside the aircraft while conducting a cross-reference of CI
to execute the approach. During the approach, the P* will announce any deviation to the briefed approach,
particularly any deviation in escape routing. Upon completing the approach, the P* will conduct a hover
power check in the intended landing direction, over the intended landing point, and at the altitude selected in
the reconnaissance. The crew will then verify whether conditions (surface, wind, and temperature/pressure
altitude) are the same as they predicted during the reconnaissance.
b. The P and NRCM will confirm the suitability of the
area, assist in clearing the aircraft, and provide adequate warning of traffic and obstacles. The P and NRCM
will acknowledge any deviation during the approach. The P and NRCM will announce when their attention is
focused inside the aircraft and again when attention is reestablished outside.
c. If power is in question, the P should conduct the in-flight dynamic update using TAB data, EDM utilizing
IPAC, or H-60M use of the FMS performance planning software and conduct a landing zone sequence. An
example is provided in this task but units may develop their own.
2. Procedures. Select an approach angle that allows obstacle clearance while descending to the desired point of
termination. Once the termination point is sighted and the approach angle is intercepted (on base or final),
adjust the collective as necessary to establish and maintain a constant angle. Maintain entry airspeed until the
rate of closure appears to be increasing. Above 50 feet AGL, maintain ground track alignment and the aircraft in
011-237/280-1058 (UH60) 4-57

trim. Below 50 feet AGL, align the aircraft with the landing direction. Progressively decrease the rate of descent
and rate of closure until reaching the termination point (hover or touchdown).
a. True airspeed compared to ground speed indicates headwind/tailwind or no wind. This is also used to
control horizontal closure speed.
b. Heading compared to ground track indicates crosswind direction.
c. Torque compared to pedal position (aircraft must be aligned with ground track [below 50 feet], airspeed
slightly above ETL, and referencing a known torque/pedal reference setting) indicates crosswind direction.
d. The vertical speed indicator (VSI) indicates rate of vertical closure and the possibility of inadequate
torque applied.
e. The early or abrupt movement of the airspeed indicator needle to zero indicates a tailwind. Airspeed
indicator behavior is referenced against previous no-wind condition.
f. The duration of the transverse flow shudder and the distance remaining to termination when it ceases also
indicates the presence of a headwind or tailwind. The “normal” distance is referenced during no-wind
conditions. This is also used to control horizontal closure speed.
g. The correlation of airspeed, torque and VSI indicates and measures the presence and strength of updrafts
and downdrafts.
h. To a hover. The approach to a hover may terminate with a full stop over the planned termination point, or
continue movement to transition to hovering flight. Progressively decrease the rate of descent and rate of
closure until an appropriate hover is established over the intended termination point.
i. To the surface. Proceed as for an approach to a hover, except determine an approach angle that allows
obstacle clearance while descending to the desired point of touchdown. (The decision to terminate to the
surface with zero speed or with forward movement will depend on the aircraft's loading or environmental
conditions.)
j. Touchdown with minimum lateral movement. After surface contact, ensure that the aircraft remains
stable until all movement stops. Smoothly lower the collective to the full down position and neutralize the
pedals and cyclic. Apply brakes if required.
Note. If wind conditions may be a factor, a wind evaluation should be performed. Techniques
for evaluating wind conditions are found in TC 3-04.4.
Note. Steep approaches can place the aircraft in potential settling with power conditions.
Note. Performing this maneuver in certain environments may require hover OGE power.
Evaluate each situation for power required versus power available.

1. Altitude, apparent ground speed, and rate of closure are difficult to estimate at night. The rate of descent
during the final 100 feet should be slightly less than during the day to avoid abrupt attitude changes at low
altitudes. After establishing the descent during unaided flights, airspeed may be reduced to approximately 50
knots until apparent ground speed and rate of closure appear to be increasing. Progressively decrease the rate of
descent and forward speed until termination of maneuver.
2. Surrounding terrain or vegetation may decrease contrast and cause degraded depth perception during the
approach. Before descending below obstacles, determine the need for artificial lighting.
Use proper scanning techniques to avoid spatial disorientation.
exercise added caution when resuming flight before reaching full dark adaptation.
011-237/280-1058 (UH60) 4-58

SNOW/SAND/DUST CONSIDERATIONS:
1. Termination to a point OGE. This approach requires OGE power and may be used for most snow landings
and some sand/dust landings. Make the approach to a hover OGE over the intended landing location. Slowly
lower the collective and allow the aircraft to descend. The rate of descent will be determined by the rate in
which the snow/sand/dust is blown from the intended landing point. Remain above the snow/sand/dust cloud
until it dissipates and visual references can be seen for touchdown. After ground contact, slowly lower the
collective to the full down position and neutralize the flight controls.
2. Termination to the surface with forward speed. This termination may be made to an improved landing surface
or suitable area with minimal ground references. Once the appropriate approach angle is intercepted, adjust the
collective as necessary to establish and maintain the angle. As the apparent rate of closure appears to increase,
progressively reduce the rate of descent and closure to arrive at the touchdown area slightly above ETL. At
this point, maintain the minimum rate of closure that ensures that the snow/sand/dust cloud remains behind the
pilot's station. Apply slight aft cyclic just prior to touchdown to prevent burying the wheels or toes of the skis.
When the wheels or heels of the skis contact the snow/ground, slowly lower the collective and allow the
aircraft to settle. Lower the collective as necessary, neutralize the flight controls, and apply brakes as necessary
to stop forward movement.
3. Termination to the surface with no forward speed. This termination should be made to landing areas where
slopes, obstacles, or unfamiliar terrain precludes a landing with forward speed. It is not recommended when
new or powder snow or fine dust is present because whiteout/brownout conditions will occur. The termination is
made directly to a reference point on the ground with no forward speed. The angle should be slightly steeper
than a normal approach and the approach speed faster than a normal approach. After ground contact, slowly
lower the collective to the full down position, neutralize the flight controls, and apply brakes as necessary to
ensure no forward movement.
Note. When landing in deep snow, the aircraft wheels/skis may settle at different rates and the
aircraft will normally terminate in a tail low attitude.
Note. During sand/dust landings, all doors and windows should be closed and vent blowers turned
off.
Note. Hovering OGE reduces available ground references and may increase the possibility of spatial
disorientation. Be prepared to transition to instruments and execute an instrument takeoff if ground
reference is lost.
Note. At night, using the landing, search, or anti-collision light may cause spatial disorientation while
in blowing snow/sand/dust.
CONFINED AREA CONSIDERATIONS: An approach to the forward one-third of the useable landing area will
reduce the approach angle and minimize power requirements. Before beginning the approach, the crew will
determine and brief an escape route in case a go-around is necessary. During the approach, continue to determine the
suitability of the area and the possible need for a go-around. If possible, make the decision to go-around before
descending below the barriers or going below ETL. After touchdown, check aircraft stability as the collective is
lowered.
MOUNTAIN/PINNACLE/RIDGELINE CONSIDERATIONS: Select a shallow to steep approach angle,

depending on the wind, density altitude, gross weight, and obstacles. Before beginning the approach, the crew will
determine and brief an escape route in case a go-around is necessary. During the approach, continue to determine the
suitability of the intended landing point. The rate of closure may be difficult to determine until the aircraft is close to
the landing area. Reduce airspeed to slightly above ETL until the rate of closure can be determined. Before reaching
the near edge of the landing area, the descent should be stopped and the rate of closure slowed. At this point, decide
whether to continue the approach or make a go-around. If a go-around is required, it should be performed before
decelerating below ETL. If the approach is continued, terminate in the landing area to a hover or to the surface.
After touching down, check aircraft stability as the collective is lowered.
011-237/280-1058 (UH60) 4-59

Note. To successfully operate into small areas, the P* may have to place the nose of the aircraft over
the edge of the landing area. This may cause a loss of important visual references when on the final
approach. All crewmembers must assist in providing information on aircraft position in the landing
area.
MUD/MUSKEG/TUNDRA CONSIDERATIONS: Select a suitable area and terminate the approach to a 10-foot
hover over the intended touchdown point. Begin a vertical descent until the aircraft touches down. Check aircraft
stability while lowering the collective. If the area is suitable, lower the collective to the full down position and
neutralize the cyclic and pedals.

011-237/280-1058 (UH60) 4-60

TASK 1062
Perform Slope Operations
CONDITIONS: In an H-60 helicopter and given a slope area.

1. RCM.
a. Select a suitable landing area.
b. Set the parking brake before landing.
c. Perform a smooth and controlled descent and touchdown.
d. Maintain heading ±5 degrees.
e. Do not allow aircraft to drift ±3 feet until touchdown. Then no drift allowed.
f. Perform a smooth and controlled ascent from the surface.
2. NRCM.
a. Confirm suitable landing area.
b. Confirm parking brake set before landing.
c. Announce drift and altitude.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The P* will announce his or her intent to perform a slope operation and establish the helicopter over the
slope. The P* will ensure the brakes are set and will announce his or her intended landing area and any
deviation from the intended maneuver. P* should be aware of the common tendency to become tense and,
as a result, to over control the aircraft while performing the slope operation. The P* will note the aircraft
attitude at a hover, prior to starting descent to land on the slope.
b. The P and NRCM will provide adequate warning of obstacles, unannounced drift, or altitude changes.
The P will assist in setting the parking brakes and verify when they are set. The P will note the aircraft
attitude on the VSI, and notify the P* prior to exceeding aircraft slope limitations. The P and NRCM will
confirm the suitability of the intended landing area and announce when their attention is focused inside the
aircraft and again when attention is reestablished outside.
2. Procedures.
a. Landing. Select a suitable area for slope operations. If possible, orient the aircraft into the wind. Set the
parking brakes. Announce the initiation of the slope landing. Smoothly lower the collective until the tail or
main landing gear contacts the ground. Adjust the cyclic to maintain the aircraft in a level attitude while
maintaining heading with the pedals. Continue lowering the collective and simultaneously apply cyclic into
the slope to maintain the position of the up slope wheel until the landing gear is firmly on the ground.
Coordinate the collective and cyclic to control the rate of attitude change when lowering the down slope
gear to the slope. With the down slope gear on the ground, simultaneously lower the collective full down
and neutralize the cyclic. If cyclic or aircraft slope limits are reached before the aircraft is firmly on the
ground, return the aircraft to a hover. Select a new area where the slope is less steep and attempt another
slope landing.
b. Takeoff. Before takeoff, announce initiation of an ascent. Smoothly increase the collective and apply the
cyclic into the slope to maintain the position of the up slope wheel. Continue to increase the collective to
raise the down slope wheel(s), maintain heading with the pedals, and simultaneously adjust the cyclic to
attain a hover attitude. As the aircraft leaves the ground, adjust the cyclic to accomplish a vertical ascent to
a hover with minimum drift.
011-237/280-1062 (UH60) 4-61

Note. Before performing slope operations, the crew must understand dynamic roll over and droop
stop pounding characteristics.
Note. When the tail wheel is locked and on the ground, over controlling the pedals may result in roll
oscillations caused by the thrust of the tail rotor.
Note. Crewmembers must be aware of the helicopter’s normal hovering attitude before putting a
wheel on the ground.
NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS: When conducting slope operations, determine the need
for artificial illumination before starting the maneuver. Select reference points to determine slope angles.
(References probably will be limited and difficult to ascertain.) If, at any time, successful completion of the
landing is doubtful, abort the maneuver. When performing operations during unaided night flight, ensure that the
searchlight or landing light (white light) is in the desired position. Using the white light will impair night vision
for several minutes. Therefore, exercise added caution if resuming flight before reaching fully dark adaptation.

011-237/280-1062 (UH60) 4-62

TASK 1064
Perform a Roll-On Landing
CONDITIONS: In an H-60 helicopter given a suitable landing area.

1. Select a suitable landing area.
2. Maintain a constant approach angle clear of obstacles to desired point of touchdown.
3. Maintain ground track alignment with the landing direction, as appropriate.
4. Perform a smooth, controlled touchdown and termination, appropriate for the conditions, below 60 knots
ground speed and aligned with the landing direction ±5 degrees prior to touchdown.
5. Ensure speed at touchdown is no slower than that appropriate for the conditions.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The P* will announce his or her intent to perform a roll-on landing, when beginning the approach, the
intended point of landing, and any deviation from the approach.
b. The P will verify that the brakes are released before starting the approach. The P and NRCM will confirm
the suitability of the landing area and will provide adequate warning of hazards or obstacles. They will
announce when their attention is focused inside the aircraft and again when attention is reestablished
outside.
2. Procedures: When the desired approach angle is intercepted, adjust the collective as necessary to maintain a
constant angle of approach and adjust the cyclic for an attitude that will result in an optimum airspeed for the
conditions. Before touchdown, align the aircraft with the landing direction. Before tail wheel touchdown,
increase the collective as necessary to make a smooth touchdown below 60 knots ground speed. After tail wheel
contact, use collective to smoothly lower the landing gear to the surface. If desired, use aerodynamic braking
while maintaining the main landing gear off the ground to assist in stopping the roll out. Allow the aircraft to
descend to the surface by adjusting the collective as necessary and centering the cyclic to allow a smooth
touchdown. After the main landing gear is on the surface, center the cyclic to avoid droop stop pounding, then
lower the collective, and apply the brakes as necessary.
Note. When it is necessary to perform a roll-on landing because of a single engine failure, the P*
should not decelerate the aircraft below minimum single engine airspeed until the aircraft is at a
point from which obstacles in the flight path will be cleared and a safe landing can be assured.
DROOP STOP POUNDING/AERODYNAMIC BRAKING:

1. DSP is a phenomenon that can occur when there is excessive downward blade travel causing the blades to
strike the droop stops when they are in the fly position. The conditions, which combine to induce this type DSP,
include excessive aft cyclic, low collective, and all wheels on the ground. The maneuver that is most likely to
produce DSP is the roll-on landing in conjunction with aerodynamic braking; however, DSP can also occur
during taxi and down slope landings. Aerodynamic braking is a procedure that uses the aerodynamic forces of
the rotor system to slow or stop the aircraft. Once the tail wheel is on the ground, using the aft cyclic in
conjunction with an increase in collective will slow or stop the aircraft.
2. Aerodynamic braking is permissible while the tail wheel is on the ground before main gear contact. Once the
main wheels contact the ground, the cyclic must be centered, collective lowered (center cyclic before lowering
the collective), and brakes applied (only when collective is full down as required). If a pilot attempts to slow the
aircraft after main wheel contact by using aft cyclic as they lower the collective, the pilot will hear an audible
4/Rev knocking. This is the first indication of DSP. With more rear cyclic applied, DSP will become heavy (you
may also feel the pounding in the airframe) and main rotor blade contact with the ALQ-144 and tail rotor drive
shaft may result.
011-237/280-1064 (UH60) 4-63

Note. This maneuver may be performed in an environment where obscurants (for example, sand,
dust, or snow) are present.
NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE CONSIDERATIONS: Altitude, apparent ground speed, and rate
of closure are difficult to estimate at night. The rate of descent at night during the final 100 feet should be slightly
slower than during the day to avoid abrupt attitude changes at low altitudes.
ROUGH/UNPREPARED SURFACE CONSIDERATIONS: Closely monitor touchdown speed when landing to

a rough or unprepared surface. Consistent with the situation and aircraft capabilities, a more pronounced
deceleration before touchdown coupled with more effective aerodynamic braking after tail wheel touchdown may be
appropriate. Note that the wheel brakes may be less effective. If the surface is soft, exercise care when lowering the
collective until the aircraft comes to a complete stop.

011-237/280-1064 (UH60) 4-64

TASK 1066
Perform Extended Range Fuel System Operations
CONDITIONS: In an H-60 helicopter with an extended range fuel system (ERFS) consisting of the appropriate fuel
tanks.
Note. ERFS encompasses any authorized extended range fuel system such as crashworthy external
fuel system (CEFS), and internal auxiliary fuel system (Robertson).

1. RCM.
a. Verify that the required amount of fuel is onboard at the time of each takeoff.
b. Initiate an alternate course of action if the actual fuel consumption varies from the planned value and the
flight cannot be completed with the required reserve.
c. Balance/manage fuel tank levels (if appropriate) to maintain aircraft within CG limits.
d. Verify that the aircraft will remain within weight and CG limitations for the duration of the flight.
e. Recognize and respond to ERFS malfunctions.
f. Perform or describe appropriate emergency procedures per the appropriate aircraft operator’s manual/CL.
2. NRCM.
a. Complete all preflight duties per the appropriate aircraft operator’s manual/CL and unit SOP.
b. Recognize and alert the P to ERFS malfunctions.
DESCRIPTION: Monitor the main fuel quantity indicators and the auxiliary fuel management panel to ensure that
the system is operating normally. Operate the fuel management system panel in the AUTO or MANUAL mode, as
required.

011-237/280-1066 (UH60) 4-65

TASK 1068
Perform Go-Around

1. Determine when a go-around is required.
2. Immediately apply appropriate power to initiate go-around.
3. Immediately adjust pitch attitude to clear obstacles and achieve appropriate climb airspeed for conditions.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The P* will announce his or her intent to perform a go-around and will remain primarily focused
outside to avoid obstacles.
b. The P and NRCM will assist in clearing the aircraft and provide adequate warning of obstacles. The P
will also monitor systems instruments to ensure aircraft limits are not exceeded.
2. Procedures.
a. When it becomes doubtful that a safe landing can be done, announce "go-around." Immediately apply
power (if available) and simultaneously adjust pitch attitude to stop the descent and clear any obstacles.
Maintain aircraft in trim and adjust to the appropriate climb speed for conditions. Maintain the appropriate
ground track.
b. M The P* may engage the GO ARND mode by pressing the go-around button (GO ARND) button on
the cyclic grip or engage the GO ARND mode by pressing the GO ARND button on the respective FD/
DCP.
Note. The decision to go-around may be made at any time but in limited power situations should be
determined before descending below the barriers or decelerating below ETL.
CAUTION
M Selecting the coupled GO ARND mode during limited power conditions
or operating at high gross weight may exceed aircraft limitations.
SNOW/SAND/DUST CONSIDERATIONS: If during the go-around, visual references are lost, initiate an
ITO immediately.
MOUNTAINOUS AREA CONSIDERATIONS: Perform one of the following:

1. Where escape routes exist, turn the aircraft away from the terrain, apply forward cyclic and lower the
collective, if possible. Accelerate the aircraft to an appropriate airspeed for conditions and complete the go-
around.
2. Where escape routes do not exist, adjust aircraft for maximum rate of climb to ensure obstacle clearance.
Upon clearing obstacles, accelerate aircraft to an appropriate airspeed for conditions and complete the go-
around.
011-237/280-1068 (UH60) 4-66

011-237/280-1068 (UH60) 4-67

TASK 1070
Respond To Emergencies
CONDITION: In an H-60 helicopter, given a specific emergency condition or the indications of a specific
malfunction.
Note. Emergency procedures training should focus on emergencies which can reasonably be
expected to occur. Disabling systems for other than the emergencies listed below will not be
performed in the aircraft and should be done in the SFTS when available.
Note. For standardization evaluations and RL progressions, the following emergency

procedures will be evaluated:
 Single engine failure (at altitude and at a hover).

 Decreasing RPM R to include performing lockout in flight.
A/L  Degraded AFCS with stability augmentation system (SAS) 1, SAS 2, TRIM, FPS, and BOOST
switches off
M  Degraded AFCS with TRIM, FPS, and SAS/BOOST switches off.
 Stabilator malfunctions.

1. RCM.
a. Identify the malfunction, determine the appropriate emergency procedure, and perform or describe the
appropriate immediate action procedures outlined in the appropriate aircraft operator’s manual/CL.
b. Select a suitable landing area.
c. For AFCS OFF, when a hover is required, maintain altitude ±5 feet and heading ±20 degrees.
2. NRCM.
a. Prepare the aircraft, crew, and passengers for an emergency landing.
b. Look for a suitable landing area and alert the crew to the landing area’s location.
c. Assist in evacuating passengers to designated assembly area according to the crew briefing.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. Any crewmember detecting an emergency will immediately announce the emergency to the other
crewmembers. If time permits, lock shoulder harnesses, make a mayday call, and tune transponder to
emergency, as appropriate.
b. The P* will perform the underlined and non-underlined steps as appropriate depending on the
environmental or aircraft conditions for the pilot on the controls (that is, non-circled items) as per the
appropriate aircraft operator’s manual/CL and initiate the appropriate type of landing. During VMC, the
P* will focus primarily outside the aircraft to maintain aircraft control and to provide adequate
clearance from traffic or obstacles. During IMC, the P* will remain focused inside the aircraft on the
flight instruments to maintain aircraft control.
c. The P will perform as directed or briefed. The P will perform the underlined and non-underlined steps
for the pilot not on the controls (that is, circled items) as per the appropriate aircraft operator’s manual/
CL. If time permits, the P will verify all emergency checks with the appropriate aircraft operator’s
manual/CL. The P will request appropriate emergency assistance as described in the Flight Information
Handbook.
011-ACC-1070 (UH60) 4-68

d. The NRCM will prepare the passengers for an emergency landing. During the descent the NRCM
will look for a suitable landing area, alert the crew to the landing area’s location and assist in clearing the
aircraft. After landing, the NRCM will assist in evacuating the passengers to the designated assembly
area. If normal exits cannot be used, the NRCM will use the nearest emergency exit to expedite the
evacuation. The NRCM will keep communications to a minimum to allow the P* or P to attempt
communications outside the aircraft. After accounting for all crewmembers and passengers, the NRCM
will assist the other crewmembers in any follow-on action (firefighting first aid, emergency signaling, or
survival equipment).
2. Procedures. Analyze the information given (for example, aircraft response, caution/advisory lights, engine
instrument caution advisory system [EICAS] and power pod indications as required). Determine the
malfunction and select the appropriate emergency procedure. Perform the emergency procedure per the
appropriate aircraft operator’s manual/CL.
NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE CONSIDERATIONS: Take special precautions to

identify the correct switches/levers when performing emergency procedures at night or while
wearing NVGs.

1. Training will be conducted in the aircraft or simulator.
011-ACC-1070 (UH60) 4-69

TASK 1082
Perform Autorotation
CONDITIONS: In an H-60 helicopter and given an emergency procedure requiring autorotation.

1. Identify the malfunction, determine the appropriate emergency procedure, and perform or describe the
appropriate procedures outlined in the aircraft operator’s manual/CL.
2. Select a suitable landing area.
3. Adjust airspeed appropriate to ensure landing area.
4. Perform a deceleration and termination as directed by the instructor pilot (IP) or as appropriate for the type of
emergency per the appropriate aircraft operator’s manual.
DESCRIPTION:
WARNING
The deceleration altitude during an autorotation should be
determined using outside visual references and cockpit indications,
as necessary. Pilots should avoid focusing on the radar altimeter
during critical phases of the maneuver.
1. Crew actions.
a. The P* will enter the autorotation and remain focused primarily outside the aircraft throughout the
maneuver and will announce “autorotation.” The P* will monitor RPMR, trim, airspeed, and announce the
intended point of termination. The P* will acknowledge any announced warnings, recommendations, or
control input made by the P.
b. The P will monitor RPM R, aircraft trim, and airspeed and provide adequate warning for corrective
actions. If time permits, lock shoulder harnesses, place transponder to emergency; and make a mayday call. If
the P must make a control input to prevent exceeding any limitations, the P will announce his or her
actions to the P*. The P will cross monitor and back up the performance of the emergency procedures and
flight control inputs, and confirm actions per the CL, time permitting.
c. The P and NRCM will confirm the suitability of the landing area, assist in
clearing the aircraft, and provide adequate warning of obstacles.
d. The NRCM will prepare the passengers for an emergency landing. During the descent the NRCM will keep
communications to a minimum to allow the P* or P to attempt communications outside the aircraft.
2. Procedures.
a. Recognize the emergency and enter autorotation or during training select the correct entry point. An
autorotation may be done either “straight in” or “with turn.” When executing an autorotation with turn,
aircrews must be aware of the tendency for RPM R to increase. Smoothly lower the collective (at a
moderate rate) to the full down position. Apply pedal as required to maintain the aircraft in trim. Adjust the
cyclic to assume airspeed appropriate for the conditions, and initiate a turn, if necessary.
Note. When turning to the right, an increase in RPM R will develop rapidly in relation to the rate of
cyclic application. The RPM R increase can be quite rapid with a corresponding rapid right turn. The
increase in RPM R will even be further aggravated with heavy gross weight aircraft, and high density
altitude. Adjust the collective as necessary to prevent rotor overspeed.
011-237/280-1082 (UH60) 4-70

Note. When executing an autorotation with turn to the left, a slight to moderate increase in RPM R
will normally occur. However, when right lateral cyclic is rapidly applied from a left turn condition
into a right turn condition, an even greater increase in RPM R will be evident. The increase in RPM
R will even be further aggravated with heavy gross weight aircraft and high density altitude. Adjust
the collective as necessary to prevent rotor overspeed. An autorotation may be done “straight in” or
“with turn.”
b. During the descent, the P* and P will monitor and maintain RPM R within limits to prevent an overspeed
or underspeed condition, and the P* will adjust the collective as necessary to establish and maintain a
steady state autorotation. The P will call out RPM R, airspeed, and aircraft in trim. (Steady state autorotation
is defined as RPM R within limits; airspeed is not below 80 KIAS; torque, trim, and aircraft in position to
land at the desired touchdown point.)
Note. During training if steady state autorotation is not attained by 300 feet AGL, the IP will
command a “power recovery”, terminate the maneuver and execute a go-around as required.
c. Between 50 and 75 feet AGL, the aircraft must be in a decelerative attitude. The P* will adjust the cyclic
for a smooth, progressive deceleration based on the size and surface of the landing area. Maintain ground
track and apply pedal to align the aircraft with the direction of touchdown.
WARNING
Reaction time must be factored into the deceleration altitude and will
vary with the proficiency of the pilot on the controls. The P will cross
monitor the P* and ensure the control inputs are made as required.
d. Terminate the autorotation by one of the three following methods. (During training the instructor pilot
[IP] will announce which is to be used.)
Note. During training when applying the collective for power recovery (to include go-around) or
termination with power, be aware of the tendency for initial RPM R decay. The IP will ensure the
main rotor RMPR is maintained within limits and sufficient power is available to complete the
required maneuver.
e. Power recovery. Upon receiving the command "power recovery," the P* will apply the collective as
necessary to arrest the rate of descent while simultaneously maintaining trim with the pedals. The P*
continues to apply sufficient collective to arrest the rate of descent and establish a normal climb.
f. Terminate with power. Upon receiving the command "terminate with power," the P* will adjust the
collective to arrest the descent at an altitude that will ensure that the tail wheel will not contact the ground.
(Conditions permitting; ground speed at the termination of the maneuver should be the same as for
touchdown.)
Note. For training ensure aircraft attitude is adjusted for landing as much as possible during the
termination portion of the maneuver. If possible, avoid excessive nose high landing attitudes that
would cause the stabilator to contact the ground and land in a excessive nose high attitude had an
actual touchdown occurred.
g. Touchdown autorotations may only be conducted in an emergency or in the simulator. During

touchdown autorotations, the P* will adjust the cyclic and collective to smoothly cushion the main gear
onto the landing surface. After the main wheels are on the ground, the P* smoothly lowers the collective to
full down, neutralizes the cyclic, and maintains heading and ground track with the pedals. The P* will use
the brakes as necessary to stop roll out.
011-237/280-1082 (UH60) 4-71

Note. When conducting autorotation training/evaluation in the aircraft (power levers at fly), the P*
should limit the torque to below 10 percent to ensure that an autorotational descent (not a steep
approach) is occurring. Torque spikes as a result of collective application to arrest RPM R are
acceptable as long as the collective is reduced below 10-percent dual engine torque. The intent of the
torque limit is to ensure the rotor is decoupled from the engines and autorotational descent is
established.
NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE CONSIDERATIONS: Suitable landing areas will be much more
difficult to locate at night. Hazards will be difficult to detect in the landing area. Use the landing light/
searchlight as appropriate.

2. Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft, or simulator. When conducted in the simulator the mode of flight
must be replicated.
011-237/280-1082 (UH60) 4-72

TASK 1108
Perform Auxiliary Power Unit Operations (NRCM Only)
WARNING
ASE systems, when energized, may cause thermal burns or blindness

when personnel are too close to an active system. Observe all
operators' manual restrictions.
Flight controls and stabilator systems may cause damage when

aircraft alternating current (AC) power is applied. Ensure flight
controls and stabilator systems are clear before applying AC power
to the aircraft.
Prior to APU operations, remove the pitot covers, rotor blade

tie-downs, and mooring chains and engage the gust lock.
CONDITIONS: In an H-60 helicopter with a qualified and current APU operator stationed in a pilot seat during
APU operations.

1. Preflight all systems to be operated during APU operations.
2. Operate APU, systems, and equipment according to the appropriate aircraft operator’s manual/CL.
3. Shut down systems, equipment, and APU according to the appropriate aircraft operator’s manual/CL.
4. Enter appropriate information (if required) on DA Form 2408-12, DA Form 2408-13, and DA Form
2408-13-1.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The NRCM will coordinate with and brief any additional ground support personnel prior to APU start.
Perform preflight inspection of the APU. Ensure that the rotor blade tie- downs and mooring chains
are removed, and that the gust lock is engaged. The NRCM will brief all concerned personnel on
procedures to be followed in the event of an emergency. The NRCM will direct assistance from any
additional ground support personnel to aid in keeping the APU exhaust and stabilator areas clear
during the APU start sequence and any subsequent ground checks.
b. Additional ground support personnel should assist the NRCM as directed.
2. Procedures. Brief the additional ground support personnel as necessary. Perform preflight inspection of the
APU ensuring exhaust plug, rotor blade tie-downs, mooring chains, fluid levels, APU accumulator pressure is a
minimum of 2,800 pounds, and backup hydraulic pump has been checked or removed as applicable. If an
additional cockpit crewmember is available, direct the crewmember’s assistance with monitoring the master
warning fire light during the APU start sequence. Confirm that the SAS 1 switch and the APU accumulator
(ACCUM) LOW advisory lights are OFF. Place the FUEL PUMP switch to the APU BOOST position and note
the PRIME BOOST PUMP ON advisory light illuminates. Confirm the APU exhaust area is clear. Place the
APU control (CONTR) switch to ON. Maintain positive control of the APU switch throughout the start
sequence. After the APU ON advisory light illuminates, release the APU CONTR switch. Verify the stabilator
area is clear and brief the additional cockpit crewmember that the engine out audio should sound when the APU
generator is engaged. Place the APU generator switch to ON. Verify the APU GEN ON advisory light
illuminates. The BACKUP PUMP advisory light should come on in about 4 seconds. Reset the engine out audio
011-237/280-1108 (UH60) 4-73

using either MASTER CAUTION PRESS TO RESET switch or if external power was used to perform the start,
select the EXT PWR switch to OFF. Direct the external power cable to be disconnected and the power
generating equipment to be secured at a safe distance outside the rotor disk unless further use is anticipated. The
APU ACCUM LOW light should extinguish after either 90 or 180 seconds.
SINGLE CREWMEMBER CONSIDERATIONS:

1. Clearing the APU and stabilator. When performing this task without additional crewmember support, the
NRCM will just prior to APU start confirm the APU exhaust area and stabilator is clear. During the APU run,
the NRCM will remain at either pilot station. The NRCM will ensure the stabilator area remains clear
throughout any stabilator operations.
2. Disabling stabilator auto mode. Because the stabilator area cannot be observed from the cockpit, the NRCM
may elect to disable the stabilator auto mode for safety. After applying AC power, momentarily engage the cyclic
mounted stabilator slew-up switch or the stabilator automatic flight control system (AFCS) panel MAN SLEW
switch to the UP position. During aircraft systems troubleshooting, it is important to remember that the stabilator
may slow down if AC power is interrupted and then restored.
NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE CONSIDERATIONS: During night operations, ensure adequate lighting
(anti-collision, position lights) is on, and fire guard has a flashlight. This task is prohibited while wearing night
vision devices (NVDs).

011-237/280-1108 (UH60) 4-74

TASK 1142
Perform Digital Communications

1. Configure the appropriate tactical internet system for desired operation.
2. Transmit, receive, review, and delete messages and mission information as required.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The P* is primarily responsible for obstacle avoidance and clearing the aircraft.
b. The P or other crewmembers will operate the system and announce when focused inside.
2. Procedures. Operate system (J-VMF, EDM, and BFT) in accordance with the appropriate technical manual
and configure in accordance with unit SOP.

REFERENCES: Appropriate common references, TM 1-1680-377-13&P, and TM 11-7010-326-10.
011-237/280-1142 (UH60) 4-75

TASK 1155
Negotiate Wire Obstacles

1. Locate and estimate the height of wires.
2. Determine the best method to negotiate the wire obstacle.
3. Safely negotiate the wire obstacle.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The P* will remain focused primarily outside the aircraft and will announce visual contact with wires and
supporting structures.
b. The P and NRCM will announce visual contact with wires and supporting structures. They will also
provide adequate warning to avoid hazards, wires, poles, or supporting structures. They will announce when
the aircraft is clear and when their attention is focused inside the aircraft and again when attention is
2. Procedures.
a. Announce when wires are seen. Confirm the location of wire obstacles with other crewmembers.
Announce the method of negotiating the wires and when the maneuver is initiated.
b. Locate guy wires and supporting poles. Estimate the amount of available clearance between the wires
and the ground to determine the method of crossing.
c. Overflight. Before crossing the wires, identify the highest wire. Cross near a pole to aid in visual
perception and minimize the time that the aircraft is unmasked.
Note. The crew must maintain proper scanning techniques to ensure obstacle avoidance and aircraft
clearance.
NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE CONSIDERATIONS: Wires are difficult to detect at night and with night vision
goggles (NVG). Flying under wires should not be performed at night or while using NVG, unless the location has
been checked during daylight conditions and all hazards have been identified.

011-237/280-1155 (UH60) 4-76

TASK 1162
Perform Emergency Egress
WARNING
Removing an injured crewmember or passenger may increase the
severity of the injuries. Analyze the risk of additional injury versus
the risk of leaving the crewmember or passenger in the aircraft until
assistance arrives.

1. Perform or describe using emergency exits on the aircraft per the appropriate aircraft operator’s manual.
2. Perform or describe the emergency egress of a pilot, NRCM, or passenger from his or
her seat.
3. Perform or describe the emergency engine shutdown of the aircraft per the appropriate aircraft operator’s
manual.
4. Assist in marshaling passengers to designated assembly area.
5. Perform or describe duties as briefed in the crew mission briefing.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The PC will direct an emergency egress. The PC will determine if the egress will be done before the
rotor blades have stopped. (If the PC is incapacitated, the next ranking RCM/NRCM will perform this
function.) The PC will also determine and announce if an emergency engine shutdown will be performed.
b. The P* and P will egress their respective positions and assist with passenger egress.
c. The NRCM will direct passenger egress.
d. All crewmembers will perform duties as briefed during the crew briefing and assist with the egress of
incapacitated crewmembers and passengers, if required.
2. Procedures.
a. If an emergency egress occurs, use the cabin/cockpit doors. If they are jammed, use the emergency
release. If the emergency release does not work, break out the Plexiglas windows with the crash axe, boot,
or other suitable object. Once out, guide yourself and passengers to clear the aircraft in a safe direction and
meet at the assembly point. Account for all personnel.
b. Perform the emergency egress of a pilot from his or her seat per the appropriate aircraft operator’s
manual. The instructions may also be found on the back of the seat.
c. Perform emergency engine shutdown procedures per the appropriate aircraft operator’s manual.
d. Consideration should be given to utilizing the rotor brake if installed.
011-237/280-1162 (UH60) 4-77

OVERWATER CONSIDERATIONS: If egress must be made from an aircraft that has gone into the water, do not
exit until rotor blades have stopped. Secure a handhold within the cockpit to maintain orientation, employ
underwater breathing device (if equipped), and wait for cockpit and cabin area to fill with water. Once aircraft is full
of water, use the cargo/cockpit doors. If they are jammed, use the emergency release. If the emergency release does
not work, break out the windows with the crash axe, boot, or other suitable object, and swim clear of the aircraft. Do
not activate life preserver until clear of aircraft and on surface.

1. Training will be conducted in the aircraft or academically.
2. Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft or academically.
011-237/280-1162 (UH60) 4-78

TASK 1166
Perform Instrument Maneuvers
CONDITIONS: In an H-60 helicopter in IMC or simulated IMC and given appropriate navigational publications.
1. Tune and identify appropriate navigational aids (NAVAIDs).

2. Determine, intercept, and maintain the desired course ±5 degrees.
3. Maintain the desired heading ±5 degrees.
4. Maintain the desired distance measuring equipment (DME) arc ±1 nautical mile.
5. Identify station passage.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The P* will remain focused inside the aircraft and will monitor radios and ATC information. The P*
will acknowledge all directives given by ATC or the P. The P* will announce airspeed, heading, and
altitude changes and any deviation not directed by ATC or the P.
b. The P will select and announce radio frequencies. The P also will monitor radios and ATC information
not monitored by the P*. The P will confirm airspeed, heading, and altitude changes.
c. During VMC or simulated IMC, the P and NRCM will focus primarily outside the aircraft to provide
adequate warning of traffic or obstacles. They will announce when their attention is focused inside the
aircraft and again when attention is reestablished outside.
2. Procedures.
a. Adjust cyclic as required to maintain the desired airspeed and heading. Adjust collective as required to
maintain the desired climb/descent rate or altitude and maintain aircraft in trim with the pedals. Perform
instrument procedures per AR 95-1, TC 3-04.5, aeronautical information manual (AIM), FAA Instrument
Flying Handbook, FAA Instrument Procedures Handbook and Department of Defense flight information
publication (DOD FLIP).
b.When expecting to use the ADF, ensure that the ADF will receive on the desired band and the number
two bearing pointer points at the selected station.
c.When expecting to use the VOR/ILS receiver, ensure that the VOR is operational and the VSI and HSI
give the proper indications per the appropriate aircraft operator’s manual.
d. Before using a selected NAVAID for navigation, tune and identify the NAVAID. After identifying the
desired station and the position of the aircraft in relation to the desired course, turn to an appropriate
intercept heading. Maintain the intercept heading until approaching an on-course indication. Depending on
the rate of closure, start a turn to intercept the desired course.
e. Maintain heading to track the desired course. If the navigational instruments show an off-course
condition, turn as necessary toward the course to reintercept. If navigational instruments do not indicate
movement toward the course within a reasonable time, increase the intercept angle. When reintercepting the
course, turn toward the course and apply the appropriate drift correction (normally one-half of the intercept
angle). Continue to bracket the course by decreasing corrections until obtaining a heading that will maintain
the aircraft on course. Determine arrival at radio intersections per procedures in TC 3-04.5, FAA
Instrument Flying Handbook, FAA Instrument Procedures Handbook or AIM.
011-237/280-1166 (UH60) 4-79

011-237/280-1166 (UH60) 4-80

TASK 1167
Perform Flight Maneuvers using Standby Flight Instrument System (H-60M)
CONDITION: In an H-60M helicopter without reference to the PFD.
STANDARDS: Appropriate common standards and maneuver the aircraft to establish and maintain the desired
altitude, heading, and airspeed as appropriate.
DESCRIPTION: CREW ACTIONS.

1. The Electronic Standby Instrument System (ESIS) is designed for emergency use to land under an emergency
situation where PFD information is not available.
2. The P* maintains pitch, roll, and yaw attitudes utilizing cues provided by the standby flight instrument system
in order exit IMC and land as soon as possible when VMC.
3. During training the P* will maneuver the aircraft to maintain appropriate airspeed, altitude, and heading as
assigned by the instructor.
4. The P and other crewmembers will provide traffic advisories and obstacle clearance.

011-280-1167 (UH60) 4-81

TASK 1168
Perform Command Instrument System Procedures (A/L)
CONDITIONS: In an H-60A/L helicopter.

1. Configure the HSI/VSI mode select panels and CIS to obtain the desired navigational data and
commands.
2. Follow the cyclic roll, cyclic pitch, and collective position indicator commands, as appropriate.
DESCRIPTION: Configure the CIS MODE SEL panel and, if required, the HSI/VSI MODE SEL panel, as
required per the appropriate aircraft operator’s manual.

011-237-1168 (UH60) 4-82

TASK 1169
Perform Flight Director Operations
CONDITIONS: In an H-60M helicopter.
1. Operate the flight director per the aircraft operator's manual.
2. Program the FMS for the desired flight plan.
3. Select the desired display on the MFD.
4. Select the appropriate modes on the FD/DCP.
5. Follow cyclic roll, cyclic pitch and collective position indicator cues as appropriate.
Note. The P* will monitor the PFD for correct aircraft responses if coupled flight is selected.
WARNING
During coupled flight in close proximity to terrain, obstacles or other
hazards the pilot on the controls will be in a position to override any
undesirable inputs.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew Actions. The flight director is primarily the P* responsibility. The P will adjust the FD/DCP
reference(s) when requested by the P* and call out the action. P will monitor the flight instruments and the
FD/DCP selected mode annunciator lights and will immediately advise the P* of any abnormal indications or
changes in selected modes.
2. Procedures. The P* will perform the following procedures:
a. Perform coupled flight maneuvers (climbs, descents, and turns), by selecting the appropriate flight
director modes and references.
b. Perform uncoupled flight maneuvers (climb, descents, and turns) by following flight director cues as
depicted on the PFD.
Note. The H-60M Flight Director set will only use one aircraft reference for each individual mode
that is selected. Changing a mode reference on the uncoupled FD/DCP will change the
active/selected mode reference on the coupled FD/DCP, causing the aircraft to fly to the new
reference. The P will only change reference settings on the uncoupled FD/DCP only after
coordination with the P*.
Note. The P* will maintain control of the coupled flight director. The P* may request the P to make
specific adjustments to the aircraft references from the P’s uncoupled FD/DCP.
Note. While in coupled flight, the transfer of the flight controls from the P* to the P should be done
by the most efficient method possible.

1. Training. Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator.
2. Evaluation. Evaluation may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator.
011-280-1169 (UH60) 4-83

TASK 1170
Perform Instrument Takeoff
CONDITIONS: In an H-60 helicopter in IMC or simulated IMC and aircraft cleared.
1. Comply with appropriate departure procedure.

2. Maintain power as required to climb at or above the minimum climb rate on the departure procedure.
3. Maintain accelerative climb attitude until climb airspeed is attained.
4. Maintain the aircraft in trim after ETL.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The P* will focus primarily outside the aircraft during the VMC portion of the maneuver. The P* will
announce when he or she initiates the maneuver and intents to abort or alter the takeoff. Before the aircraft
enters simulated or actual IMC, the P* will make the transition to the flight instruments.
b. The P will announce when ready for takeoff and will focus primarily outside the aircraft to assist in
clearing during the VMC portion of the maneuver and to provide adequate warning of obstacles. The P will
announce when his or her attention is focused inside the aircraft. As the aircraft enters actual IMC, the P
will announce when IMC and will monitor the flight instruments to assist in establishing coordinated flight
within aircraft operating limits.
c. The NRCM will maintain airspace surveillance during the VMC portion of the maneuver. During
simulated IMC, the P and NRCM will focus primarily outside the aircraft to provide adequate warning of
traffic or obstacles. They will announce when their attention is focused inside the aircraft and again when
attention is reestablished outside.
2. Procedures.
a. On the runway or takeoff pad, align the aircraft with the desired takeoff heading. Set the attitude indicator
for takeoff (wings level on the horizon). Initiate the takeoff by increasing the collective smoothly and
steadily until takeoff power is reached. (Set power as required to accelerate to the desired climb airspeed and
maintain the desired climb rate.) Adjust the pitch attitude to establish the initial accelerative climb attitude.
Visually maintain takeoff clearance and alignment on takeoff and transition to the flight instruments before
entering IMC. Maintain the heading/course required by the departure procedure or air traffic control (ATC)
instructions. When the desired climb airspeed is reached, adjust cyclic to maintain airspeed, and adjust
collective to maintain the desired climb rate.
Note. The takeoff may be initiated from the ground or a hover.
b. M An ITO may be accomplished at a hover by pressing the go-around button on the cyclic or FD/DCP.
The pilot on the controls must closely monitor the PFD to ensure aircraft is conducting the climb
correctly and be prepared to assist the aircraft if necessary.

011-237/280-1170 (UH60) 4-84

TASK 1174
Perform Holding Procedures
CONDITIONS: In an H-60 helicopter in IMC or simulated IMC and given holding instructions and appropriate
Department of Defense flight information publication (DOD FLIP).

1. Tune and identify the appropriate navigational aids (NAVAIDs).
2. Determine, brief and enter the holding pattern.
3. Time and track holding pattern legs.
4. Send the appropriate report to ATC per DOD FLIP.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. Before arrival at the holding fix, the PC will analyze the holding instructions and determine the
holding pattern and proper entry procedures. The PC will brief the other crewmembers on the proposed
entry, outbound heading, and inbound course. (The PC may delegate this task to another RCM.)
b. The P will select radio frequencies and monitor radios. The P will announce ATC information not
monitored by the P*. The P also will compute outbound times and headings to adjust for wind and direct
the P* to adjust the pattern as necessary.
c. The P* will fly headings and altitudes and will adjust inbound and outbound times as directed by ATC or
the P. The P* will announce any deviation as well as ATC information not monitored by the P.
d. During simulated IMC, the P and NRCM will focus primarily outside the aircraft to provide adequate
warning of traffic or obstacles. They will announce when their attention is focused inside the aircraft and
again when attention is reestablished outside.
2. Procedures. Upon arrival at the holding fix, turn (if required) to the predetermined outbound heading or track
and check the inbound course. Maintain the outbound heading or track as published or as directed by ATC.
After the appropriate time outbound, turn to the inbound heading and apply normal tracking procedures to
maintain the inbound course. Note the time required to fly the inbound leg and adjust outbound course and time
if necessary. When holding at a NAVAID, begin timing the outbound leg when abeam the station. This is
indicated by the # 2 bearing pointer or the TO/FROM indicator indicating a FROM indication. When holding at
an intersection, begin timing the outbound leg upon establishing the outbound heading.

011-237/280-1174 (UH60) 4-85

TASK 1176
Perform Non-Precision Approach
CONDITIONS: In an H-60 helicopter, given approach information and appropriate Department of Defense flight
information publication (DOD FLIP).

1. Perform theapproach.
2. Intercept and maintain NDB courses within 5 degrees of course centerline.
3. Intercept and maintain VOR or GPS course line within5 degrees of course centerline.
4. Intercept and maintain localizer courses within 2.5 degrees of course centerline.
5. During airport surveillance radar (ASR) approaches, make immediate heading and altitude changes issued
by air traffic control (ATC) and maintain heading ±5degrees.
6. Comply with descent minimums prescribed for the approach.
7. Perform the correct missed approach procedure as published or per ATC instructions upon reaching the
missed approach point (MAP) if landing cannot be completed per AR 95-1.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The PC is responsible for ensuring that the approach is reviewed and is briefed to all crew members
before initiating the procedure. The PC will confirm with the crew the specific approach to be flown, that
the correct NAVAID/communication frequencies are set.
b. A/L The HSI/VSI mode select panel and CIS are selected as required. The PC may assign other
crewmembers to perform these duties.
c. M Select the appropriate navigation source and bearing pointer on the FD/DCP to be depicted on the
PFD for the approach to be flown.
2. The P* will acknowledge and follow navigation directives issued by either the P or ATC, and announce any
deviations.
3. The P will call out all pertinent or requested approach information and procedures to the P* and will advise
the P* of any unannounced deviations. The P will monitor outside for visual contact with the landing
environment. If the P makes visual contact suitable to complete the landing per AR 95-1, the P will announce
such and may, if directed by the PC, take the controls and complete the landing. If visual contact is not
made at the missed approach point, the P will announce such and call out the missed approach procedures.
4. During VMC, the P and NRCM will focus primarily outside the aircraft to provide adequate warning
of traffic or obstacles. They will announce when their attention is focused inside the aircraft and
again when attention is reestablished outside.
5. For a coupled approach, the P* will configure the FD/DCP for the selected approach and monitor the
PFD for aircraft response. The P should ensure the uncoupled flight director has the appropriate modes
engaged to see visual cues on the PFD.

1. Training may be conducted in the helicopter or simulator.
2. Evaluation may be conducted in the helicopter or simulator.
011-237/280-1176 (UH60) 4-86

TASK 1178
Perform Precision Approach
CONDITION: In an H-60 helicopter given approach information and appropriate Department of Defense flight
information publication (DOD FLIP).

1. Perform the approach.
2. For an ILS approach, intercept and maintain the localizer course within 2.5 degrees of course centerline, and
glide slope within 0.5 degree of glide slope center.
3. For a precision approach radar (PAR) approach, make immediate heading and altitude changes issued by air
traffic control (ATC) and maintain heading ±5 degrees; for final approach, maintain glide slope as directed by
ATC.
4. Comply with the published decision altitude or decision height (DH) prescribed for the approach.
5. Perform the correct missed approach procedure as published or per ATC instructions upon reaching the
decision altitude/DH if landing cannot be done per AR 95-1.
6. M When coupled flight is selected, program FD/DCP for the appropriate approach and monitor for correct
aircraft response.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The PC is responsible for ensuring that the approach is reviewed and is briefed to all crewmembers
before initiating the procedure. The PC will confirm with the crew the specific approach to be flown, that
the correct navigational aid (NAVAID)/communication frequencies are set.
b. A/L The HSI/VSI mode select panel and CIS are selected as required. The PC may assign other
crewmembers to perform these duties.
c. M Select the appropriate navigation source and bearing pointer on the FD/DCP to be depicted on the
PFD for the approach to be flown.
2. The P* will acknowledge and follow navigation directives issued by either the P or ATC, and announce any
deviations.
3. The P will call out all pertinent or requested approach information and procedures to the P* and will
advise the P* of any unannounced deviations. The P will monitor outside for visual contact with the landing
environment. If the P makes visual contact suitable to complete the landing per AR 95-1, the P will announce
such and may, if directed by the PC, take the controls and complete the landing. If visual contact is not made at the
missed approach point, the P will announce such and call out the missed approach procedures.
4. During VMC, the P and NRCM will focus primarily outside the aircraft to provide adequate warning of traffic or
obstacles. They will announce when their attention is focused inside the aircraft and again when attention is
5. M For a coupled approach, the P* will configure the FD/DCP for the selected approach and monitor the PFD for
aircraft response. The P should ensure the uncoupled flight director has the appropriate modes engaged to see
visual cues on the PFD.

011-237/280-1178 (UH60) 4-87

TASK 1182
Perform Unusual Attitude Recovery

1. Analyze aircraft attitude.
2. Without delay, use correct recovery procedures.
a. Attitude—level the wings on the attitude indicator.
b. Heading—maintain heading; turn only to avoid known obstacles.
c. Torque—adjust torque as necessary.
d. Trim—trim aircraft as necessary.
e. Airspeed—adjust airspeed as necessary.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The trainer or evaluator will place the aircraft in unusual attitude and transfer aircraft controls to the P.
The P will acknowledge the transfer of controls, the unusual attitude, and recover the aircraft as P*.
b. The P* will remain focused inside the aircraft during this maneuver and will acknowledge the unusual
attitude recovery and transfer of aircraft controls.
c. The P will assist in monitoring the aircraft instruments. The P will call out attitude, torque, and trim as
necessary.
d. During VMC, the P and NRCM will focus primarily outside the aircraft to provide adequate warning of
traffic or obstacles. They will announce when their attention is focused inside the aircraft and again when
attention is reestablished outside.
2. Procedures.
a. To recover from an unusual attitude, correct the pitch and roll attitude, adjust power, and trim the aircraft
as required to return to level flight. All components are changed simultaneously with little lead of one over
the other. The displacement of controls used in recoveries may be greater than those for normal flight. Care
must be taken in making adjustments as straight-and-level flight is approached. The instruments must be
observed closely to avoid over controlling.
b. M Coupled recovery from an unusual attitude may be accomplished by pressing in on the cyclic trim
beeper (Z axis). The P* must closely monitor the PFD for correct aircraft response.
Note. M Coupled recovery from an unusual attitude will be the primary method of recovery in a UH60M,
this may be accomplished by pressing in on the cyclic trim beeper (Z axis), activating the go around mode on
the cyclic grip or go around on the FD/DCP. The P* must closely monitor the PFD and flight controls for
correct aircraft response.
NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE CONSIDERATIONS: IMC is not a prerequisite for an unusual
attitude. Low level ambient light may induce visual illusions and spatial disorientation. During NVG operations,
video noise may contribute to loss of visual cues.
SNOW/SAND/DUST CONSIDERATIONS: Obscurations other than weather can induce loss of visual contact.
At low altitudes where these conditions would be encountered, it is extremely important that these procedures be
initiated immediately to prevent ground contact.

011-237/280-1182 (UH60) 4-88

TASK 1184
Respond To Inadvertent Instrument Meteorological Conditions
CONDITION: In an H-60 helicopter, in VMC.

1. Announce “IMC”, maintain proper aircraft control, immediately make the transition to instrument flight, and
initiate a climb.
2. Initiate IIMC recovery procedures.
a. Attitude—level the wings on the attitude indicator.
b. Heading—maintain heading; turn only to avoid known obstacles or as briefed for multiship operations.
c. Torque—adjust torque as necessary.
d. Trim—trim aircraft as necessary.
e. Airspeed—adjust airspeed as necessary.
3. Contact air traffic control (ATC), as required. Comply with ATC instructions, local regulations, and SOP.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The P*/P will announce IIMC as appropriate.
b. The PC will announce the minimum altitude to which the crew will climb (and
heading if turn required for single and multiship operations) as the procedure is initiated.
c. The P* will announce when he or she initiates IIMC procedures. The P* will announce if he
or she is disoriented and unable to recover.
d. The P will monitor the cockpit instruments to assist in recovery, set the transponder to emergency, make
the appropriate radio calls, and perform any other crew tasks as directed by the P*. It may be necessary for
the P to take the controls and implement recovery procedures.
e. The NRCM will focus primarily outside the aircraft to provide adequate warning for avoiding terrain or
obstacles. The P and NRCM will perform any other crew tasks as directed by the PC.
2. Procedures. If IIMC are encountered—
a. Immediately adjust the pitch and roll attitude, adjust power, trim, and airspeed as required to ensure
obstacle clearance/avoidance. All components are changed simultaneously with little or no lead-time over
the other.
b. M Pressing the go-around button on the cyclic grip will couple the flight director to current heading and
set the following flight parameters:
(1) Level roll attitude.
(2) 70 KIAS.
(3) 750 FPM rate of climb.
c. Complete the IIMC recovery per local regulations and policies.
Note. M Coupled recovery from IIMC will be the primary method of recovery. This may be accomplished by
pressing in on the cyclic trim beeper (Z axis), activating altitude preselect and vertical speed, by activating
the go around mode on the cyclic grip, or go around on the FD/DCP.
NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE CONSIDERATIONS: When using NVGs, it may be possible to see
through thin obscuration, such as fog and drizzle, with little or no degradation. The NVG may be removed or
flipped up once stable flight is established. It may be beneficial for the P not to completely remove his or her
NVG. The NVG may assist in recovery by allowing the P to see through thin obscuration that would otherwise
prevent him from seeing the landing environment.
011-237/280-1184 (UH60) 4-89

Note. If IMC conditions are entered with the searchlight or landing light on, spatial disorientation
may occur.

011-237/280-1184 (UH60) 4-90

TASK 1194
Perform Refueling Operations
CONDITIONS: In an H-60 helicopter and refueling equipment.

1. Ensure that safety procedures are complied with per ATP 4-43 and the appropriate aircraft operator’s
manual, and ATP 3-04.1.
2. If installed ensure that all doors and windows are closed on the refueling side (for hot refueling operations).
3. Ensure that the aircraft is refueled per ATP 4-43, the appropriate aircraft operator’s manual, ATP 3-04.1,
and the unit SOP.
4. Enter the appropriate information on DA Form 2408-12.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions: cold refueling.
a. A crewmember will guide the refueling vehicle to the aircraft. Ensure that the driver parks the vehicle the
proper distance from the aircraft per ATP 4-43. Verify that all personnel not involved with the refueling
operations are a safe distance away.
b. Ground and refuel the aircraft per ATP 4-43, the appropriate aircraft operator’s manual, and the unit SOP.
Ensure that the tanks are filled to the required level. When the refueling is completed, ensure that all caps are
secured and remove the ground connection if the aircraft will not remain parked. Make the appropriate
entries on DA Form 2408-12.
2. Crew actions: hot refueling.
a. The P and NRCM will assist the P* in positioning the aircraft. Ensure that the proper separation is
maintained between the fuel source, the aircraft, and the refueling equipment. Before refueling the aircraft,
the PC will verify that personnel not involved with the refueling operation are a safe distance away.
b. The crewmember outside the aircraft should be in position to view the refueling personnel and at least one
pilot, and should maintain the ability to communicate with both. They must ensure that the aircraft is
grounded, refueled per ATP 4-43, the appropriate aircraft operator’s manual, and the unit SOP, and assist
with the refueling operation. Ensure that the tanks are filled to the required level. When the refueling is
completed, ensure that all caps are secured and remove the ground connection.
c. The crewmember outside will inform the PC when the refueling is completed. Assist passengers in
boarding the aircraft and in securing their seat belts. Assist the P* and P in clearing the aircraft during the
departure from the refueling area. Make the appropriate entries on DA Form 2408-12.
NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE CONSIDERATIONS: Supplement aircraft lighting at the refueling station by
using an explosion-proof flashlight with an unfiltered lens to check for leaks and fuel venting, and for signaling, as
necessary.

REFERENCES: Appropriate common references, DA PAM 738-751, ATP 4-43, and TC3-21.60.
011-237/280-1194 (UH60) 4-91

TASK 1253
Operate Flight Management System - Central Display Unit
CONDITION: In an H-60M or H-60L helicopter with FMS installed.
STANDARDS: Appropriate common standards and load, configure and utilize mission information as necessary to
complete assigned mission.
DESCRIPTION:
Crew actions.
1. The P* will focus primarily outside the aircraft and respond to information given by the P. The P
monitors all mission equipment and uses the FMS/CDU for communication, navigation, and mission
information.
2. The P will place the FMS into operation during run-up and will operate in flight through shutdown by using
any or all of the following functions:
a. Enter and store data as necessary to effectively complete assigned mission. Transfer data from the DTS to
the FMS/CDU, and save data from the FMS to the DTS/DTU as necessary.
b. Enter and engage flight plan (to include search patterns) of flight plan (FPN) page of the FMS/CDU. The
P should also be able to modify existing flight plans in flight to accomplish mission changes en route.
c. Use the status (STS) page of the FMS/CDU to determine system status and determine mission
accomplishment relative to operational condition of displayed equipment.
d. Select and set up the avionics using the communication (COM) page of FMS/CDU.
e. Use the navigation (NAV) page to select and tune the proper navigation aid.
f. Use the features of the calculator (CLC) page.
g. Fix positions and record positions as waypoints using the FIX page of the FMS/CDU.
h. Address emergency procedure associated with FMS/CDU failures.
NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE CONSIDERATIONS: Ensure lighting is set at an

acceptable level for night or NVG operations.

011-237/280-1253 (UH60) 4-92

TASK 1254
Operate Multifunction Display
CONDITION: In a H-60 helicopter with a MFD installed

1. Operate the installed MFD as per the appropriate aircraft operator's manual.
2. Select the appropriate display to obtain the desired information for the current mission profile.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions. The P* will focus primarily outside the aircraft and respond to information given by the P.
2. Procedures. Perform the turn on, and then select the desired display for each aircraft MFD. Understand
factors and emergencies adversely affecting the MFDs, which could result in degraded mission performance or
the mission being aborted. Perform the proper shutdown procedures in accordance with the appropriate
NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE CONSIDERATIONS: Ensure the MFD lighting adjustment is
set at an acceptable level for night or NVG operations.

REFERENCES: Appropriate common references and the appropriate manufacturer’s references.
011-237/280-1254 (UH60) 4-93

TASK 1260
Operate Digital Map (H-60M)
CONDITION: In an H-60M helicopter.

1. Load digital map data via the DTS.
2. Operate bezel keys on the MFD to select desired map (TAC/ND) configuration and orientation.
3. Operate the multifunction slew controller (MFSC) or the collective cursor slew controller to gain desired
information and to manipulate desired mission data on the digital map display.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The P* will primarily remain focused outside the aircraft.
b. The P will primarily perform digital map operations.
2. Procedures.
a. Select appropriate type of map for display.
b. Select desired viewing range and scale.
c. Select appropriate type of overlay for the tactical situation.
NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE CONSIDERATIONS: Ensure MFD lighting adjustment is set at an acceptable level.

011-280-1260 (UH60) 4-94

TASK 1425
Employ Aviator Night Vision Imaging System
CONDITIONS: Given a set of ANVIS to improve crewmember's night vision during low ambient light
conditions.

1. Conduct operator's checks per TM 11-5855-313-10 for the ANVIS.
2. Properly mount the ANVIS on the flight helmet.
3. Adjust the ANVIS to obtain the optimal sight adjustment point (OSAP)
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. Any crewmember will announce when his or her attention is focused inside the aircraft.
b. After use, ensure batteries are removed. Store the unit.
2. Procedures.
a. Ensure the ANVIS are within inspection dates and check for serviceability.
b. Adjust for proper fit, focus, and diopter setting.
2. Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft only.
REFERENCES: Appropriate common references and TM 11-5855-313-10.
011-SRW-1425 (UH60) 4-95

TASK 1426
React to Aviator's Night Vision Imaging System Failure
CONDITIONS: Given a set of ANVIS and upon recognizing an operational failure.

1. Announce ANVIS failure by crew station.
2. Transfer the flight the controls if applicable.
3. Troubleshoot ANVIS failure.
4. Announce results of troubleshooting
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions. Any crewmember will announce when his or her attention is focused inside the aircraft.
2. Procedures.
a. If the P*’s NVG’s fail or indicate impending failure, the P* will announce “goggle failure” and
transfer the controls to the P. During NOE or contour flight, the P* will begin a climb at a rate that
will ensure obstacle avoidance. During low-level flight, or flight conducted at higher altitude, the P*
will use the procedure described above. A climb is not required.
b. If the P or other crewmembers NVG fail or indicate impending failure, that crewmember will
announce “goggle failure” and troubleshoot the goggles. If the NVG’s are not restored to operation,
make the appropriate report and modify the mission as briefed.
Note. NVG tube failure is infrequent and usually provides ample warning. Only occasionally
will a tube fail completely in a short time. Rarely will both tubes fail at the same time. There is no
remedy for in-flight tube failure.

1. Training may be conducted academically, in the aircraft, or simulator.
2. Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft only.
011-SRW-1426 (UH60) 4-96

TASK 1427
Operate Heads-Up Display for ANVIS
CONDITION: In an H-60 helicopter and given an ANVIS and HUD to aid in maintaining spatial orientation.

1. Conduct Operator's Checks for the HUD IAW TM 11-5855-300-10.
2. Mount HUD to the ANVIS.
3. Power up the HUD IAW TM 11-5855-300-10.
4. Program the HUD for mission requirements.
5. Shutdown the HUD IAW TM 11-5855-300-10
DESCRIPTION: Perform operational procedures for the AN/AVS-7. These include assembly, preparation for
use, operating procedures, and equipment shutdown.
Note. The HUD is considered supplemental to the NVG. Therefore, one RCM may fly with
the HUD and the other without.

011-SRW-1427 (UH60) 4-97

TASK 1500
Participate in a Crew-Level After-Action Review
CONDITIONS: After flight in an H-60 helicopter and given a unit-approved, crew-level after action review CL.
1. The PC will conduct a detailed crew-level after action review using the example shown below or a unit-
approved crew-level after action review CL.
2. All crewmembers will actively participate in the review.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The PC will conduct a crew-level after action review. The PC will use a unit-approved CL similar to the
one shown in table 4-3. The PC will actively seek input from all crewmembers. The PC will ensure that
the results of the review are passed to unit operations and flight standards.
b. All crewmembers will actively participate in the review. The intent is to constructively review the
mission and apply lessons learned into subsequent missions.
2. Procedures. Using an after action review CL, participate in a crew-level after action review of the
mission. The review should be an open and frank discussion of all aspects of the mission. It should include
all factors of the mission and incorporate all crewmembers. The results of the review should be
passed to operations and flight standards.

011-ACC-1500 (UH60) 4-98

Table 4-3. Suggested format for a crew-level after action review checklist
Crew-Level After Action Review Checklist
1. Restate mission objectives with METT-TC considerations.
2. Conduct review for each mission segment:
a. Restate planned actions/interactions for the segment.
b. What actually happened?
(1) Each crewmember states in own words.
(2) Discuss impacts of crew coordination requirements, aircraft/equipment operation,
tactics, commander’s intent, and so forth.
c. What was right or wrong about what happened?
(2) Explore causative factors for both favorable and unfavorable events.
(3) Discuss crew coordination strengths and weakness in dealing with each event.
d. What must be done differently the next time?
(2) Identify improvements required in the areas of team relationships, mission planning,
workload distribution and prioritization, information exchange, and cross monitoring of
performance.
e. What are the lessons learned?
(2) Are changes necessary to—
(a) Crew coordination techniques?
(b) Flying techniques?
(c) SOP?
(d) Doctrine, ATM, TMs?
3. Determine effect of segment actions and interactions on the overall mission.
a. Each crewmember states in own words.
b. Lessons learned.
(1) Individual level.
(2) Crew level.
(3) Unit level.
4. Advise operations/chain of command of significant lessons learned.
011-ACC-1500 (UH60) 4-99

TASK 2012
Perform Tactical Flight Mission Planning
CONDITIONS: Before flight in an H-60 helicopter and given a mission briefing, navigational maps, a navigational
computer, approved mission planning software (if available), and other flight planning materials as required.

1. Analyze the mission using the mission, enemy, terrain and weather, troops and support available, time
available and civil considerations (METT-TC) factors available.
2. Perform a map/photo reconnaissance using the available map media or photos. Ensure that all known hazards
to terrain flight are plotted or entered into the approved mission planning software (if applicable).
3. Select the appropriate altitude(s) and terrain flight modes as appropriate.
4. Select appropriate primary and alternate routes and enter all of them on a map, route sketch, or into the
approved mission planning software.
5. Determine the distance ±1 kilometer, ground speed ±5 knots, and ETE ±1 minute for each leg of the flight.
6. Determine the fuel required and reserve per AR 95-1 ±100 pounds.
7. Obtain and analyze weather briefing to determine that weather and environmental conditions are adequate to
complete the mission.
8. Conduct a thorough crew mission briefing.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The PC/AMC will delegate mission tasks to crewmembers, have the overall responsibility for mission
planning, and will conduct a thorough crew mission briefing. The PC/AMC will analyze the mission in
terms of METT-TC.
b. The other crewmembers will perform the planning tasks directed by the PC/AMC. They will report the
results of their planning to the PC/AMC.
2. Procedures. Analyze the mission using the METT-TC factors. Conduct a map or aerial photo reconnaissance.
Obtain a thorough weather briefing that covers the entire mission. Include sunset and sunrise times, density
altitudes, winds, and visibility restrictions. If the mission is to be conducted at night, the briefing would also
include moonset and moonrise times and ambient light levels, if available. Determine primary and alternate
routes, flight altitudes, and movement techniques. Determine time, distance, and fuel requirements using the
navigational computer or approved mission planning software. Prepare the map, overlay, or approved mission
planning software with sufficient information to complete the mission according to unit SOP. This includes
waypoint coordinates that define the routes for entry into the Doppler/GPS and approved mission planning
software. Consider such items as hazards, checkpoints, observation posts, and friendly and enemy positions.
Review contingency procedures.
Note. Evaluate weather impact on the mission. Considerations should include aircraft performance
and limitations.
NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE CONSIDERATIONS: More detailed flight planning is required
when the flight is conducted in reduced visibility, at night, or in the NVG environment. NVG navigation with
standard maps can be difficult because of map colors, symbology, and colored markers used during map
preparation.
011-SRW-2012 (UH60) 4-100

011-SRW-2012 (UH60) 4-101

TASK 2013
Operate Aircraft Survivability Equipment
CONDITIONS: In an H-60 helicopter equipped with ASE.
1. RCM.
a. Describe the purpose of installed ASE.
b. Perform/describe preflight inspection; turn on, test, operation, emergency procedures, and shutdown of
installed ASE.
c. Employ/describe using installed ASE.
2. NRCM.
a. Prepare equipment for operation.
b. Employ/describe using installed ASE.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The PC will ensure that crewmembers understand the employment of installed ASE during the conduct
of the mission.
b. The PC will also ensure that all ASE payloads and settings are per the mission briefing.
2. Procedures. Perform or describe preflight inspection, turn on, test, operation, emergency procedures, and
shutdown of installed ASE equipment. Evaluate and interpret the ASE visual and aural indications.

1. Training may be conducted in the aircraft, simulator, or academically.
2. Evaluation may be conducted in the aircraft, simulator, or academically.
REFERENCES: Appropriate common references, AFTTP 3-1, computer based ASE trainer (CBAT) programs,
equipment operator’s manuals, and the unit’s S-2/TACOPS officer.
011-237/280-2013 (UH60) 4-102

TASK 2014
Perform Tactical Communications Procedures
CONDITIONS: In an H-60 helicopter and given a signal operating instructions (SOI).

1. Test and operate aircraft avionics and voice security equipment according to the appropriate aircraft
2. Load appropriate COMSEC.
3. Maintain radio discipline.
4. Use the SOI.
5. Recognize and respond to enemy electronic countermeasures.
6. Operate Mark XII identification, friend or foe (IFF) system.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The PC will ensure assigned radio frequencies are briefed during the crew briefing. The PC will indicate
whether the P* or P will establish and maintain primary communications.
b. The P* will announce mission information not monitored by the P and any deviation from directives.
c. The P will manage and announce radio frequencies and copy and decode pertinent information. They will
announce mission information not monitored by the P*.
2. Procedures. Electronic communications should not be used in a tactical environment except when absolutely
necessary. If electronic communication is required, the preferred method is to operate in frequency
hopping (FH)/have-quick secure voice mode. To eliminate confusion and reduce transmission time, the crew
must use approved communication words, phrases, and codes. Plan what to say before keying the
transmitter. Transmit information clearly, concisely, and slowly enough to be understood by the receiving
station. Ideally, keep transmissions under 10 seconds. Do not pass mission critical information on unsecured
nets. Do not identify a unit or an individual by name during non-secure radio transmissions. Follow procedures
listed below.
a. Authentication. Use proper SOI procedures to authenticate all in-flight mission changes, artillery
advisories, when entering or departing a radio net, when challenged, or when requesting authentication.
b. Meaconing, interference, jamming, and intrusion/joint spectrum interference resolution (MIJI/JSIR)
procedures. Keep accurate and detailed records of any MIJI incidents. Report an incident as soon as possible
when a secure communications capability exists. (See Task 2022 for information on transmitting a tactical
report.)
c. Visual methods. Use other visual communication methods such as flags, lights, panels, pyrotechnics, hand
and arm signals, and aircraft maneuvers.
d. Mark XII IFF. Turn on, test, and operate the IFF per the appropriate aircraft operator’s manual. Operate the
IFF per the tactical situation. During shutdown, hold or zeroize the code, as required.

REFERENCES: Appropriate common references, FM 3-04.120, and TM 11-5895-1199-12.
011-237/280-2014 (UH60) 4-103

TASK 2022
Transmit Tactical Reports
CONDITIONS: In an H-60 helicopter and given sufficient information to compile a tactical report.
STANDARDS: Appropriate common standards and transmit the appropriate report using the current signal
operating instructions (SOI).
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The P* and NRCM will focus primarily outside the aircraft to clear the
aircraft and provide adequate warning of traffic or obstacles. The P* will announce any maneuver
or movement before execution.
b. The P will assemble and transmit the report. The P will use the correct format as specified in the SOI and
transmit the report to the appropriate agency. The NRCM(s) must also be able to transmit the report if the P
is unable to do so.
2. Procedures. To save time, minimize confusion, and ensure completeness, report information in an established
format. Assemble the report in the correct format and transmit it to the appropriate agency. Standard
formats may be found in the SOI or other sources.
Note. Encryption is required only if information is transmitted by non-secure means.

REFERENCES: Appropriate common references, FM 2-0, and SOI.
011-237/280-2022 (UH60) 4-104

TASK 2024
Perform Terrain Flight Navigation
CONDITIONS: In an H-60 helicopter and given a mission briefing and required maps and materials.

1. During NOE flight (surface to 25 feet above highest obstacle [AHO]), know the en route location
within 200 meters.
2. During contour flight (25 to 80 feet AHO) or low-level flight (80 to 200 AHO), know the en route
location within 500 meters.
3. Locate each objective within 100 meters.
4. Arrive at each objective at the planned time ±1 minute (if an objective arrival time was given in the
mission briefing).
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The P* will remain focused outside the aircraft and respond to navigation instructions and cues given by
the P. The P* will acknowledge commands issued by the P for heading and airspeed changes necessary to
navigate the desired course. The P* and NRCM will announce significant terrain features to assist the P in
navigation.
b. The P will furnish the P* with the information required to remain on course. The P will announce all
plotted wires before approaching their location. The P will use rally terms and terrain features to convey
instructions to the P*. Examples of these terms are "Turn left to your 10 o'clock," "Stop turn," and "Turn
down the valley to the left." If using the HSI during low-level flight, the P may include headings. The P
should use electronically aided navigation to help arrive at a specific checkpoint or turning point.
c. The P*, P, and NRCM should use standardized terms to prevent misinterpretation of information and
unnecessary cockpit conversation. The crew must look far enough ahead of the aircraft at all times to assist
in avoiding traffic and obstacles.
2. Procedures.
a. During NOE and contour flight, identify prominent terrain features that are located some distance ahead
of the aircraft and which lie along or near the course. Using these terrain features to key on, the P*
maneuvers the aircraft to take advantage of the terrain and vegetation for concealment. If this navigational
technique does not apply, identify the desired route by designating a series of successive checkpoints. To
remain continuously oriented, compare actual terrain features with those on the map. An effective technique
is to combine using terrain features and rally terms when giving directions. This will allow the P* to focus
his or her attention outside the aircraft.
b. For low-level navigation, the time and distance can be computed effectively. This means that the P* can
fly specific headings and airspeeds.
Note. Each of the methods for stating heading information is appropriate under specific conditions.
When a number of terrain features are visible and prominent enough for the P* to recognize them,
the most appropriate method is navigation instruction toward the terrain feature in view. When
forward visibility is restricted and frequent changes are necessary, controlled turning instructions are
more appropriate. Clock headings are recommended when associated with a terrain feature and with
controlled turning instructions.
Note. For additional information, see Task 1044 and Task 1046.
011-237/280-2024 (UH60) 4-105

NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGEL CONSIDERATIONS:
Conducting the flight in reduced visibility or at night requires more detailed and extensive flight planning and
map preparation. TC 3-04.4 contains details on night navigation. NVG navigation with standard maps can be
difficult because of map colors, symbology, and colored marker use during map preparation. Use proper scanning
techniques to ensure obstacle avoidance.

REFERENCES: Appropriate common references and TC 3-25.26.
011-237/280-2024 (UH60) 4-106

TASK 2026
Perform Terrain Flight
CONDITIONS: In an H-60 helicopter with tactical flight mission planning completed.

1. RCM.
a. Maintain altitude and airspeed appropriate for the selected mode of flight, terrain, weather, visibility, and
mission, enemy, terrain and weather, troops and support available, time available, civil considerations
(METT-TC).
b. Maintain aircraft in trim during contour and low-level flight and when appropriate for NOE flight.
c. Accelerate/Decelerate aircraft to the desired airspeed.
d. Maintain aircraft clear of all obstacles.
2. NRCM.
a. Maintain a constant scan of assigned sector.
b. Ensure the aircraft is clear of all obstacles.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The P* will focus primarily outside the aircraft and acknowledge all navigational and obstacle clearance
instructions given by the P. The P* will announce the intended direction of flight or any deviation from
instructions given by the P. During terrain flight, the P* is primarily concerned with threat and obstacle
avoidance.
b. The P will provide adequate warning to avoid obstacles detected in the flight path or identified on the map.
The P and NRCM will assist in clearing the aircraft and provide adequate warning of obstacles, unusual
attitudes, altitude changes, or threat. The P and NRCM will announce when their attention is focused inside
the aircraft and again when attention is reestablished outside.
c. During contour flight, the P will advise the P* whenever an unannounced descent is detected. If the descent
continues without acknowledgment or corrective action, the P will again advise the P* and be prepared to
make a collective control input. The P will raise the collective when it becomes apparent that the aircraft will
descend below 25 feet AHO.
d. During NOE flight, the P will advise the P* whenever an unannounced descent is detected. They will
immediately raise the collective when it becomes apparent that the P* is not taking corrective action and that
the aircraft will descend below 10 feet AHO.
2. Procedures. Terrain flight involves flight close to the earth's surface. The modes of terrain flight are NOE,
contour, and low level. Crewmembers will seldom perform purely NOE or contour flight. Instead, they
will alternate techniques while maneuvering over the desired route. The crew must look far enough ahead
of the aircraft at all times to assist in avoiding traffic and obstacles.
a. NOE flight. Perform NOE flight at varying airspeeds and altitudes as close to the earth's surface as
vegetation, obstacles, and ambient light will permit.
b. Contour flight. Perform contour flight by varying altitude and while maintaining a relatively constant
airspeed—depending on the vegetation, obstacles, and ambient light. Generally, follow the contours of the
earth.
011-237/280-2026 (UH60) 4-107

c. Low-level flight. Perform low-level flight at a constant airspeed and altitude. To prevent or reduce the
chance of detection by enemy forces, fly at the minimum safe altitude that will allow a constant altitude.
d. Terrain Flight Acceleration. Coordinate applying forward cyclic to establish an accelerative attitude
while adjusting collective to maintain the aircraft clear of obstacles. Maintain heading alignment with
the selected flight path and make all control movements smoothly.
e. Terrain Flight Deceleration. Coordinate applying cyclic and collective to establish a decelerative
attitude that keeps the tail clear of all obstacles. Consider variations in the terrain and obstacles when
determining tail clearance. Apply aft cyclic as required to slow to the desired airspeed or to a full stop
while adjusting the collective to maintain the tail clear of obstacles. Maintain heading and make all
control movements smoothly. If the aircraft attitude is changed excessively or abruptly, it may be
difficult to return the aircraft to a level attitude and overcontrolling may result.
Note. Hover OGE power may be required for this task.

Note. Terrain flight is considered sustained flight below 200 feet AGL (except during takeoff and
landing).
Note. The NRCM will Maintain Airspace Surveillance in support of the following tasks:
* 2024, Perform Terrain Flight Navigation
* 2026, Perform Terrain Flight
NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE CONSIDERATIONS:
1. Wires are difficult to detect with the NVG.

2. Use proper scanning techniques to ensure obstacle avoidance.
Note. Because of the limited field of view of the NVG, avoid making abrupt changes in aircraft attitude.
An extreme nose-high attitude limits the forward field of view and may cause disorientation.
OVERWATER CONSIDERATIONS: Overwater flight, at any altitude, is characterized by a lack of visual cues,
and therefore, has the potential of causing visual illusions. Be alert to any unannounced changes in the flight profile
and be prepared to take immediate corrective actions. The radar altimeter low bug should be set to assist in altitude
control. Hazards to terrain flight such as harbor lights, buoys, wires, and birds must also be considered during
overwater flight. These considerations may also apply to flight over desert or broad expanses of snow, especially
under low ambient lighting.
REFERENCES: Appropriate common references, TC 3-04.4 and TC 3-25.26.
011-237/280-2026 (UH60) 4-108

TASK 2034
Perform Masking and Unmasking

1. RCM.
a. Perform a thorough map reconnaissance of the desired observation area.
b. Mask the aircraft from enemy visual and electronic detection.
c. Ensure that aircraft exposure time does not exceed 10 seconds during the unmasking.
d. Observe assigned scan sector during unmasking.
e. Maintain a sufficient distance behind obstacles to allow for safe maneuvering.
f. Move to a new location before subsequent unmasking.
g. Report observations if required.
2. NRCM.
a. Scan assigned sector.
b. Announce if/or when the lateral sides of the aircraft are exposed or unmasked.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The PC will assign scanning sectors to all crewmembers to maximize the area
scanned during the time unmasked.
b. The P* will focus primarily outside the aircraft to clear the aircraft throughout the maneuver. The P* will announce
the type of unmasking before executing the maneuver.
c. The P and NRCM will focus primarily outside the aircraft. d. They will warn the P* of obstacles and unusual or
unanticipated drift and altitude changes.
d. The NRCM(s) will announce when the sides of the aircraft are exposed or unmasked. The P and NRCM will
announce when their attention is focused inside the aircraft and again when attention is reestablished outside.
e. The crew must clear directly below the aircraft if descending vertically or the flight path if moving
laterally.
2. Procedures. Masking is a technique using terrain to mask (cover or conceal) the aircraft from threat detection
and weapons employment. Unmasking is a maneuver used when it becomes necessary to observe points of
interest that are obscured while in a masked position. Before unmasking, a thorough map reconnaissance should
be completed so that all eyes can be focused outside during the unmasking. The three general types of
unmasking are as follows:
a. Unmasking in flight. This type is used when the aircraft has forward speed and can best be described as a
quick "pop up and peek" at the desired point or area of observation. It is usually used while flying behind a ridgeline
or other linear barrier.
b. Unmasking at a hover (vertically). Announce intent to unmask. The crew will acknowledge that they are prepared
to execute the maneuver. Ensure that sufficient power is available to unmask. Increase the
collective to obtain sufficient altitude to see over the mask without exceeding aircraft limitations. Maintain horizontal
main rotor blade clearance from the mask in case of a power loss or a tactical need to mask the
aircraft quickly. When possible, unmask at a safe distance from the mask to allow a rapid descent to a
masked condition if the aircraft is detected or fired upon. Be aware of a common tendency to move forward
or rearward while vertically unmasking and remasking. Establish reference points to assist in maintaining
position during ascents and descents. Keep aircraft exposure time to a minimum.
011-237/280-2034 (UH60) 4-109

c. Unmasking at a hover (laterally). Sometimes, the aircraft may be unmasked by moving laterally from the
mask. Announce intent to hover the aircraft sideward to provide the smallest silhouette possible to enemy
observation or fire. The crew will acknowledge that they are prepared to execute the maneuver. Keep
aircraft exposure time to a minimum.

Note. The Primary method to conduct the hovering phase of masking and unmasking operations in an
H-60M is to be coupled to the flight director “HVR POS” to aid a stabilized hover. When conditions
exist where radar altitude fluctuations are made due to terrain, obstacles, or wind “RAD ALT” should
be placed in the active standby mode by pressing and holding the collective trim button to manually
control altitude with collective.
NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE CONSIDERATIONS: When hovering above 25 feet, the P* may
have difficulty in maintaining altitude and position. Use the radar altimeter to assist in maintaining altitude.
Use references, such as lights, tops of trees, or man made objects above and to the sides of the
aircraft. By establishing a reference angle to these objects, the P* can detect altitude changes when
his or her perspective to these objects changes. Ground objects—fences, trails, roads—provide
excellent references for detecting lateral drift. Proper scanning techniques must be used. The P*
may become spatially disoriented when alternating his or her viewing perspective between high
and low references.

011-237/280-2034 (UH60) 4-110

TASK 2040
Perform Evasive Maneuvers
CONDITIONS: In a H-60 helicopter or appropriate simulator, in a simulated tactical environment, familiar with
classified evasive tactics techniques and procedures (TTP) and all organic ASE, having received simulated enemy
fire.

1. Perform appropriate evasive maneuver (EVM) communications.
2. Perform appropriate EVM for the type of threat.
3. Evaluate any damage to aircraft.
4. Recommend or execute a course of action.
DESCRIPTION:
1. EVMs consist of a combination of classified and unclassified TTP used to defeat enemy surface-to-air fire
(SAFIRE) and aircraft threats. A complete discussion of EVM requires aircrews to consult critical additional
classified information. When specific strengths and weaknesses of U.S. aircraft and ASE are tied to a specific
threat weapon system, the information is classified SECRET NOFORN.
2. Consult with local TACOPS officer for latest area of operations (AOR) threat systems. If the enemy cannot
be avoided through tactical flight procedures, then EVMs are used to avoid or minimize exposure in the
enemy’s weapon engagement zone (WEZ). The WEZ is defined by the four dimensions of the weapon’s
maximum range (R MAX), minimum range (R MIN), maximum altitude, minimum altitude and the weapons
time of flight (TOF). Traditionally Army helicopters employ tactical flight mission planning, tactical flight
procedures, and standoff to avoid the enemy WEZ by staying outside R MAX. Where the enemy locations are
unpredictable, other aspects of the WEZ must be exploited to improve aircraft survivability. Once engaged, the
crew’s primary goal should be to limit enemy weapon effectiveness, and exit the WEZ as quickly as possible by
applying the appropriate EVM, and suppress the system if able. Aircrews should anticipate the possibility of
multiple weapons systems arrayed with interlocking fields of fire when conducting EVM. Aircrews must also
be aware of the difference between cover and concealment during tactical flight.
3. Considerations: When tactics are insufficient, the crew will select and apply the appropriate EVM. Any EVM
must be used in concert with ASE, onboard weapon systems, and other TTP to minimize the SAFIRE threats
to the aircraft. EVM are broadly categorized by whether the enemy weapon is guided or unguided. Generally,
the aircrew must defeat the weapon system for guided weapons and defeat the gunner for unguided weapons.
Both guided and unguided weapons require time to get to the target based on weapon to target range and
projectile velocity. At some ranges, the TOF can be exploited to allow the pilot to maneuver the aircraft out of
danger. However, the time required varies greatly depending on the type of weapon and TOF. Tank main gun
rounds and automatic antiaircraft (AAA) cannons have extremely high velocities and very short TOF whereas
Rocket Propelled Grenades (RPG) and certain antitank guided missiles (ATGMs) have comparatively slow TOF.
4. Communication. Intra-cockpit and inter-flight communication during a SAFIRE or air attack event are
critical in performing EVM in a timely manner. Alerting the rest of the flight maximizes mission survivability
by providing early warning and reaction time, and perhaps maneuver space, with the goal of minimizing other
aircrews exposure to the WEZ if not enabling them to avoid the WEZ altogether. The “threat call” must be both
directive (telling the flight what you want them to do) and descriptive (telling the flight why) to build the
flight’s situational awareness. Always preface threat calls with the flight call sign to avoid potential confusion
in situations where multiple flights are using the same frequency.
a. Aircrew coordination throughout the EVM sequence is of paramount importance. Crews should brief and
practice actions during EVM to ensure efficiency and communication effectiveness. In any case, the person
observing the enemy fire must communicate to the P* in order for the P* to be able to effectively execute
EVM. The aircrew must communicate the threat information to other aircraft in the flight, and after the
immediate danger is past, to the appropriate outside agencies for battlefield situational awareness (SA).
011-237/280-2040 (UH60) 4-111

b. The first crewmember to realize enemy fire will announce the nature and direction of the threat by the
most immediate means available.
c. The P* will announce the direction of threat to other aircraft and his or her intent. The P* will remain
focused outside the aircraft during the event and should be aware that crewmembers involved in returning
suppressive fire may be unavailable for assisting in obstacle avoidance or noting other threat sources. The
P* is responsible for safe performance of evasive maneuvers and aircraft control.
d. The P will be alert for obstacles and new threat sources encountered during the event. The P will remain
oriented on threat location and assist clearing the aircraft and will announce warning to avoid obstacles and
when attention is focused inside the aircraft. The P should note location of the threat quickly and as
accurately as the situation allows. It is imperative that all applicable crewmembers are able to quickly and
accurately locate and transmit threat data in order to maintain individual and collective situational awareness
during quickly changing situations. Not storing/reporting an enemy location may be more detrimental than
the risk of taking time to note the location when contact happens. The crew will transmit a report, (as
required) to other aircraft within the flight, higher HQ, and the owning ground unit/tactical commander.
e. Other crewmembers will remain oriented on the threat location and employ appropriate countermeasures
or suppressive fire as appropriate. They will announce when their attention is focused inside the cockpit; for
example, when firing the weapons.
Note. Crewmembers will not use friendly-type graphic control measures/icons/symbols to mark
enemy locations and vice-versa to avoid fratricide and other unnecessary confusion.
5. Maneuvers
a. Unguided weapons. Unguided weapons (such as small arms, unguided rockets, and tanks) require the
enemy gunner to predict an intercept point by estimating where the target aircraft will be at the TOF of the
projectiles. Once fired, the rounds cannot be corrected. The two basic strategies of defeating unguided
weapons are to present the most difficult targeting (ballistic) solution possible and then to change the
enemy’s ballistic solution as often as possible. The pilot presents the enemy with the most difficult target by
maneuvering in three dimensions. Unguided weapons are generally employed in three basic methods: aimed
fire, curtain fire, and barrage fire—each requires a different countermeasure. Curtain and barrage fire may
not be specifically aimed at an individual aircraft but rather fired into a predicted or suspected air avenue of
approach that the enemy believes will be over flown by the aircraft.
(1) Countering aimed fire: When encountering accurate aimed fire, the crew should immediately alert
the flight, break away from the enemy fire by “jinking” until the aircraft exits the enemy WEZ, while
suppressing with organic weapons if feasible. Jinking is defined as deliberate, controlled changes of
multiple axes in order to elude. Turns can be lateral or vertical, and are most effective when combined;
such as, changing direction and altitude simultaneously. Jinking is used to disrupt/deny the enemy a
weapon’s firing solution by moving the aircraft away from the predicted point of impact/intercept.
Properly executed, jinking maximizes errors in the enemy weapon system’s firing solution by forcing
the gunner to correct for azimuth, range, altitude, and changing velocity constantly and simultaneously.
This maneuver incorporates a change in direction with a (optional) climb or descent every several
seconds. Jinks should be random in direction so as not to become predictive. The jinking maneuver is a
positive but not a violent maneuver. Jinking will be ineffective if the helicopter does not displace over
the ground and cause the enemy to shift his or her aiming point. Therefore, excessively tight turns
should normally be avoided as they result in the helicopter failing to displace out of the enemy’s
weapon’s field of view.
Note. Prolonged jinking may dissipate the aircraft’s kinetic energy and my make the aircraft an easier
target.
(2) Countering barrage fire: If engaged by accurate barrage fire, depart the area of fire as quickly as
possible via the most direct path. Since barrage fire is being aimed into a ‘box,’ turn only to avoid
areas of concentrated fire. Do not “jink,” as this will delay departure from the barrage.
011-237/280-2040 (UH60) 4-112

(3) Countering curtain fire: Turn to avoid flying into curtain fire when possible. When engaged by
accurate curtain fire, depart the area of fire as quickly as possible via the most direct path.
(4) Tanks. Generally the unguided weapons countermeasures listed above are appropriate defenses
against tank fire. Additionally, tank fire control systems and turret slew rates in azimuth and elevation
combined with the limited field of view on the tank gunner’s weapon sight make it very difficult to
track aircraft with high relative velocity. Tank gunners are particularly vulnerable to aircraft displacing
in the vertical plane. If engaged with a semiautomatic command to line of sight (SACLOS) missile
fired from a tank, refer to the procedure listed in paragraph 9c below.
(5) Artillery countermeasures procedure. Artillery can pose a threat to slow-speed helicopters
particularly operating at a readily identifiable firing position. Artillery takes time to shift fires; this
time interval can be used by helicopters to stay ahead of the enemy’s ability to target/shift fires onto
them. If two or more unexplained explosions occur within 500 meters of the aircraft, suspect enemy
artillery and proceed as follows:
(a) Depart the impact area by 500 meters.
(b) Reposition every 20 seconds to avoid enemy adjusting (shifting) fire onto your new location.
(c) Report receiving enemy artillery/mortar fire to facilitate timely counter battery fire from
friendly field artillery.
b. AAA guns. The crew should use the unguided weapons countermeasures above to defeat the
guns/projectiles themselves. For radar aided/directed AAA systems, use the radar countermeasures listed
below.
c. SACLOS Missiles. SACLOS weapon systems include ATGM and certain antiaircraft missiles. These
systems can vary from slow speed ATGMs (~100 meters per second) to very high-speed antiaircraft missiles
(700 meters per second) and may use wires, radio, or laser for the command link. These systems are
countered by departing the missile engagement zone (MEZ) or WEZ prior to weapons impact. Regardless of
the type of SACLOS missile, the weakest part of the guidance system is the enemy gunner. Older ATGMs
glide during most of their flight resulting in low energy and poor missile maneuverability. This combined
with relatively high latency within the guidance systems means the missile can be readily out flown by the
targeted aircraft. With high-speed/high-G SACLOS antiaircraft systems, the missiles themselves are more
difficult to be out flown by a helicopter due to its maneuverability/speed and decreased reaction time by the
aircrew.
d. Radar guided weapons. See Classified Army Aviation TTP.
e. Heat seeking (IR) missiles. See Classified Army Aviation TTP.
f. Fixed wing. Fighter aircraft are characterized by their high performance with high attack speeds. Their
ability to move vertically in excess of 40,000 + FPM that fighter aircraft can easily come and go from the
area without detection by the attack helicopter crew. Fighters can work independently or in a minimum of
two aircraft section. If one is detected, expect another enemy aircraft nearby. When operating in an area of
possible enemy fighter activity, perform the following actions:
(1) Be predictable to friendly fighters by being on the air tasking order (ATO) and squawk the
appropriate transponder codes/modes to avoid fratricide.
(2) Be unpredictable to enemy fighters by using night and/or adverse weather to avoid detection when
possible.
(3) In daylight, avoid flying over areas of high contrast such as bodies of water or open fields if
possible.
Note. If fighters are observed circling, rapidly climbing, or turning towards the aircraft, the crew
should consider a fighter attack imminent.
(4) If hostile fighter activity is observed:

(a) Take defensive (passive) protection measures; verify IFF is operational.
(b) Take offensive (active) protective measures if fighters are identified as enemy (see classified
special instructions [SPINS]).
011-237/280-2040 (UH60) 4-113

(c) See classified Army Aviation TTP for further crew procedures.
(5) Air-to-ground gun/rocket evasive maneuvers. Fighters normally carry limited cannon ammunition
with its high performance working against rocket or gun attack accuracy against helicopter targets. The
enemy fighter will have as little as 0.5-3 seconds to execute a gun or rocket engagement due to their
high speed and the limited effective range of their gun or rockets.
(6) Air-to-ground bomb passive countermeasures. Once dropped, the fighter’s bomb will fall on a
ballistic flight path that can be avoided or mitigated if detected in time. The time of fall of the bombs
can be exploited by the attack helicopter crew to avoid the heart of the enemy’s weapons effect zones.
To avoid being hit by their own fragments, bombs are equipped with time-delayed fuses of 4 to 6
seconds minimum. At 100 KTGS, a helicopter can displace over 300 meters in 6 seconds. Once bombs
depart the fighter, the helicopter should fly perpendicular to the bomb’s line of fall and proceed at
maximum speed and minimum altitude. This will place the helicopter at the edge of the fragment
envelope where fragment density will be at a minimum.
(7) IR/radar missile evasive maneuvers. See classified Army Aviation TTP.
g. Helicopters. Due to their limited performance differential and inability to accelerate out of enemy
weapons range, once engaged it is impractical for helicopters to break contact from one another.
Consequently, the success of helicopter evasive maneuvers will likely depend on seeing the enemy aircraft
first and avoiding its WEZ. The most effective means of avoiding a helicopter WEZ is to achieve “rotor
blade masking” by operating above the enemy helicopter.
(1) Maintain maximum maneuver energy and do not decelerate below “bucket speed” (approximately
maximum endurance/maximum rate of climb airspeed).
(2) Maintain the enemy helicopter in sight until it is destroyed if able and appropriate.
(3) Vector other friendly helicopters onto the enemy.
(4) Deny or limit enemy shooting opportunities by exiting the enemy weapon system WEZ and then
climb above the enemy helicopter and force rotor blade masking.
(5) All organic weapons systems should be considered based on their individual characteristics and
effectiveness against mobile thin-skinned targets.
Note. Friendly locations must be considered prior to firing.
NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE CONSIDERATIONS: Threat elements will be harder to

detect. Crewmembers must maintain situational awareness.

1. Training may be conducted in the aircraft or a suitable simulator.
References: Appropriate common references, FM 3-90-1, ATP 1-02.1, TC 3-04.45, and classified EVM TTP.
011-237/280-2040 (UH60) 4-114

TASK 2042
Perform Actions on Contact
CONDITIONS: In a H-60 helicopter or simulator, in a simulated tactical environment given a simulated tactical
mission briefing and map with graphics, and enemy contact.
STANDARDS: Appropriate common standards and the following additions/modifications;

1. Use the actions on contact that are consistent with the mission briefing.
2. Transmit tactical report per signal operating instructions (SOI), unit SOP, and or mission briefing.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Actions on contact are a series of combat actions taken to develop the situation upon contact with the enemy
or situation that warrants or demands action. (FM 3-90-1) Due to the fluid nature of tactical situations, it is
impossible to give a “one size fits all” prescriptive solution for all types of contact. Therefore, it is imperative
that actions on contact be described in the OPORDER/FRAGO/mission briefing and or unit SOP and framed in
terms of the mission objective and commander’s intent, for example end state, task, expanded purpose. (ADP 5-
0) Actions on contact are important because they allow the mission to maintain its tempo of operation by
rapidly developing the situation and taking action before the threat can gain the initiative and force friendly
forces to react. The desired outcome of the mission will often dictate the type of actions to perform on contact.
For example, actions on contact when performing a movement to contact will vary significantly from actions on
contact during a hasty attack or an air assault.
2. Contact can be defined as confirmed awareness of enemy/threat presence through any detection method.
Contact can be detected and announced through any crewmember, another aircraft in the flight, or onboard
sights/sensors/systems. Generic postures are described below and should be considered during the mission
planning process and provide actions in lieu of specific guidance in the OPORDER/Mission Briefing.
3. All mission roles.
a. Aircrew coordination throughout the actions on contact sequence is of paramount importance. Crews
should brief and practice actions on contact to ensure efficiency and communication effectiveness. In any
case, the person observing the enemy must communicate to the P* in order for the P* to be able to
effectively maneuver. The aircrew must communicate the threat information to other aircraft in the flight,
and after the immediate danger is past, to the appropriate outside agencies for battlefield situational
awareness (SA).
b. The first crewmember to realize enemy contact will announce the nature and direction of the threat by the
most immediate means available using standard SAFIRE or air attack pro-words according to ATP 1-02.1.
c. The P* will announce the direction of threat to other aircraft and his or her intent. The P* will remain
focused outside the aircraft during the event and should be aware that crewmembers involved in conducting
suppressive fire may be unavailable for assisting in obstacle avoidance or noting other threat sources. The
P* is responsible for safe performance of evasive maneuvers and AIRCRAFT CONTROL.
d. The P will be alert for obstacles and new threat sources encountered during the event. The P will remain
oriented on threat location and assist clearing the aircraft and will announce warning to avoid obstacles and
when attention is focused inside the aircraft. The P should note location of the threat quickly and as
accurately as the situation allows.
011-237/280-2042 (UH60) 4-115

Note. It is imperative that all applicable crewmembers are able to quickly and accurately locate and
transmit threat data in order to maintain individual and collective situational awareness during
quickly changing situations. Not storing/reporting an enemy location may be more detrimental than
the risk of taking time to note the location when contact happens. The crew will transmit a report, (as
required) to other aircraft within the flight, higher HQ, and the owning ground unit/tactical
commander.
e. Other crewmembers will remain oriented on the threat location and employ appropriate countermeasures
or suppressive fire as appropriate. They will announce when their attention is focused inside the cockpit;
for example, when firing the weapons.
Note. Crewmembers will not use friendly-type graphic control measures/icons/symbols to mark
enemy locations and vice-versa to avoid fratricide and other unnecessary confusion.
4. Defensive Role. Defensive posture is independent of mission type. Even attack aircraft may be in a defensive
posture en-route to and from their objective. Proper pre-mission planning and intelligence data may aid in
developing flight profiles and route selection to avoid hostile fire. Contact undetected by the enemy usually
results in a standard spot report and continuance of the mission.
5. Undetected by threat:
a. Continue to avoid enemy detection within capabilities.
b. Locate threat.
c. Report. (SALT-W, SALUTE)
d. Recommend or execute a course of action.
6. Detected by threat: Detection by the threat is usually determined by threat actions ranging from hostile fire to
a change in threat disposition – such as, deploying to cover or orienting on the aircraft.
a. If fired upon, execute evasive maneuvers IAW Task 2040 suppressing as appropriate.
b. Prevent enemy’s capability to engage aircraft while deploying to cover or concealment, if available and
appropriate.
c. Locate threat.
d. Report. (SALT-W, SALUTE).
e. Recommend or execute a course of action.
7. Offensive Role: Offensive posture is also independent of mission type. An offensive posture may result from
a defensive posture once an element is engaged and cannot break contact, in which case immediate mission
focus is on breaking contact so the flight can continue the original mission. Actions on contact during an
offensive posture should be clearly stated in the mission brief. Sighting the enemy can be a trigger for anything
from a hasty attack to initiation of massed fires depending on the mission and phase of the operation. Different
phases of the mission may require different actions. For example, actions enroute to an objective may require
forces to bypass and report while actions at the objective may require destroying all enemy within the fire
distribution plan. Situations not covered in the mission brief should consider generic actions as outlined in FM
3-90-1:
a. Deploy to cover and report.
b. Maintain contact and develop the situation.
c. Recommend or execute a COA.
Note. The NRCM will Perform Actions on Contact in support of the following tasks:
* 2022, Transmit a Tactical Report
* 2042, Perform Actions on Contact
011-237/280-2042 (UH60) 4-116

NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE CONSIDERATIONS: Threat elements will be harder to
detect. Crewmembers must maintain situational awareness.
1. Training may be conducted in the aircraft or a suitable simulator.
REFERENCES: Appropriate common references, ADP 5-0, and FM 3-90-1.
011-237/280-2042 (UH60) 4-117

TASK 2048
Perform External (Sling) Load Operations
WARNING
When performing this task with cabin doors open, ensure that
personnel in the cabin area are wearing safety harnesses secured to
tie-down rings or are seated in seats with seat belts on.
CAUTION
A static electricity discharge wand will be used according to TM 4-48.09.
CONDITIONS: In an H-60 helicopter with an operational cargo hook, sling load, completed DA Form 7382 (Sling
Load Inspection Record) or training load according to TM 4-48.09.
Note. Prior to sling load operations, a qualified sling load inspector will inspect all sling loads.
Certification must be recorded on a DA Form 7382 and a copy provided to the aircrews.

1. RCM.
a. Before hookup.
(1) Verify copy of DA Form 7382 is complete and on file and that the aircraft will remain within gross
weight and CG limitations.
(2) Hook up and hover.
(3) Ensure that the aircraft remains clear of the load and any obstacles.
(4) Perform a vertical ascent with the load to a load height of 10 feet ±5 feet.
(5) Determine power sufficient to complete the maneuver without exceeding aircraft limitations.
b. Take off. Maintain aircraft in trim (above 100 feet AGL).
(1) Approach and load release.
(2) Maintain a constant approach angle to ensure the load safely clears obstacles and terminate over the
intended point of landing with a load height of 10 feet ±5 feet.
(3) Perform a vertical descent with the load to the desired touchdown point ±5 feet.
2. NRCM.
a. The NRCM will ensure that the aircraft is prepared for sling load operations. The
NRCM will also ensure that all slings have been inspected according to TM 4-48.09, and all sling
equipment is secured in the aircraft before takeoff.
b. Provide aircraft guidance for hookup and release.
c. Clear the aircraft and sling load during the operation.
d. Confirm load is hooked and secure.
e. Ensure load is free of entanglements.
f. Continue to monitor load for oscillation.
011-237/280-2048 (UH60) 4-118

DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The PC will conduct a thorough crew briefing and ensure all crewmembers are familiar with sling load
operations, emergency, and communication procedures. The PC will ensure that DA Form 7382 has been
completed. The PC will determine the direction of takeoff by analyzing the tactical situation, the wind, the
long axis of the takeoff area, and the lowest obstacles. The PC also will confirm that required power is
available by comparing the information from the PPC to the hover power check.
b. The P* will remain primarily focused outside the aircraft throughout the maneuver. The P* will monitor
altitude and avoid obstacles.
c. The P will monitor the cockpit instruments and assist the P* in clearing the aircraft. The P will set cargo
hook switches, as required, and should make all radio calls. When directed by the P* during the approach,
the P will place the cargo hook arming switch to the ARMED position. The P or NRCM will release the
load.
d. The P and NRCM will assist in clearing the aircraft and will provide adequate warning of obstacles.
e. The NRCM will remain primarily focused on the load. They will guide the P* during the load pickup,
advise of the load condition in flight, and direct the P* when setting down the load.
2. Procedures.
a. Hookup and hover. Set cargo hook control switches per the appropriate aircraft operator’s manual. Follow
hand and arm signals from the signalman and commands from the NRCM to hover over the load. Remain
vertically clear of and centered over the load. When the load is hooked up, remove slack from the sling and
ascend vertically to a load height of 10 feet AGL. Ensure aircraft limitations are not exceeded.
b. Takeoff. Establish a constant angle of climb that will permit safe obstacle clearance. When above 100
feet AGL or when clear of obstacles, adjust attitude and power as required to establish the desired rate of
climb and airspeed. Smoothly adjust flight controls to prevent load oscillation. After passing above 300 feet
AGL, place the cargo hook arming switch to the SAFE position.
Note. Ensure that the cargo hook-arming switch is in the ARMED position when operating at
altitudes below 300 feet AHO.
c. En route. Maintain the desired altitude, flight path, and airspeed. Make smooth control applications to
prevent load oscillation. If a lateral load oscillation occurs, reduce airspeed. If a fore-and-aft oscillation
occurs, begin a shallow turn while reducing airspeed.
d. Approach and load release. Establish and maintain an approach angle that will keep the load clear of
obstacles to the desired point of termination. Establish a rate of closure appropriate for the conditions and
the load. When passing below 300 feet AGL, place the cargo hook arming switch to the ARMED position.
Terminate the approach at a stationary hover with the load 10 feet above the intended release point.
Confirm with the NRCM that the release point is clear. Descend vertically until the load rests completely
on the ground. Continue descent to obtain slack in the sling, and then hover laterally to ensure the clevis is
clear of the load before releasing the load. Confirm that the load is released before moving away from the
release point.
Note. Loads will meet external air transportability (EAT) requirements according to TM 4-48.09.
Procedures for air transportation of hazardous material will be according to AR 95-27.
Note. Avoid flight over populated areas.
Note. Before the mission, the PC will ensure that all crewmembers are familiar with the
hand and arm signals shown in TC 3-21.60 and with forced landing procedures. In case of a forced
landing, the aviator will land the aircraft to the left of the load. The hookup man will move to his or
her left (which is to the right of the aircraft) and lie face down on the ground. The signalman will
remain in place and lie face down on the ground.
011-237/280-2048 (UH60) 4-119

Note. Control switches will not be moved without verbal announcement first. If the crewmember
pendant is used, the crewmember must be trained according to the unit SOP.
Note. Sling extenders or “reach pendants” will be used to ensure load clearance when transporting
the following: M119/105 (forward firing position), any “built up” high mobility multipurpose
wheeled vehicle (HMMWV) (Avenger, ambulance, shelter, and so forth), or any other equipment
that requires additional clearance.
Note. Self-hookup operations are authorized provided planning, briefing, and training has been done
according to the unit SOP. Self-hookup is used to support gun raids, forward arming and refueling
point (FARPs), and so forth when support personnel are not available. The type of load, as well as
the size and height, must be considered before attempting a self-hookup. Some loads are more prone
to entangle the sling straps than others. A “shepherd’s hook,” “Q-Tip,” or similar device may be used
by the NRCM to grab the clevis. Hands and arms will not be used to grab the clevis.
3. The following standard words and phrases are some examples of terminology used for sling load operations:
 “Hook is armed.”
 “Load is hooked.”
 “Load under the nose.”
 “Hookup crew clear.”
 “Load in sight.”
 “Slings coming tight.”
 “Forward.”
 “Load is centered.”
 “Back.”
 “Load is off the ground.”
 “Left.”
 “Load on ground.”
 “Right.”
 “Slack in the slings.”
 “Down.”
 “Release the load.”
 “Up.”
 “Load is released.”
 “Hold.”
 “Clear to reposition.”

For unaided night flight, the landing light and searchlight should be operational. If a NVG filter is installed, it
should be removed. When NVG are used, hovering with minimum drift is difficult and requires proper scanning
techniques and crewmember coordination. If possible, an area with adequate ground contrast and reference points
should be used. Visual obstacles such as shadows should be treated the same as physical obstacles. The rate of
descent and rate of closure should be slightly slower to avoid abrupt attitude changes at low altitudes. Sling loads
should be marked with chem-lights.

REFERENCES: Appropriate common references, AR 95-27, DA Form 7382, FM 55-450-2, TM 4-48.09, and TC
3-21.60.
011-237/280-2048 (UH60) 4-120

TASK 2052
Perform Water Bucket Operations
WARNING
Never dump water onto ground personnel as the water impact could
result in injury.
Minimize hovering or flying slowly over fires. The rotor wash fans the
flames which may cause more hazards to ground crews.
When performing this task with cabin doors open, ensure that any
personnel in the cabin area are wearing safety harnesses secured to
tie-down rings or are seated in seats with seat belts on.
Note. The water bucket, when loaded is a high-density load with favorable flight characteristics.
Reduced velocity to never exceed airspeed (VNE) and bank angle limits must be kept in mind. Much
of the mission profile is flown at high gross weight and low airspeed. Also, density altitude is greatly
increased in the vicinity of a major fire. Performance planning must receive special emphasis.
CONDITIONS: In an H-60 helicopter with an operational cargo hook and water bucket.

1. RCM.
a. Conduct pre-mission planning to determine fuel and bucket cinching requirements. Verify the aircraft
will remain within gross weight and CG limitations for the duration of the flight.
b. Conduct a thorough crew briefing.
c. In conjunction with the NRCMs, complete the required checks to ensure proper
system operation prior to mission departure.
d. Operate the water bucket system per manufacture specifications.
e. Recognize and respond to a water bucket system malfunction.
f. Use dipping procedures appropriate for the water bucket type.
g. Hook-up and hover:
(1) Maintain vertical ascent heading ±10 degrees.
(2) Maintain altitude of load 5 feet AGL, ±1 foot.
(3) Complete hover power and GO/NO GO checks.
h. En route: Maintain safe load obstacle clearance (minimum 50 feet AHO).
i. Approach and water release:
(1) Maintain a constant approach angle to ensure load safely clears obstacles.
(2) Maintain ground track alignment with selected approach path.
(3) Execute a smooth and controlled pass or termination over the intended point/area of water drop.
(4) Deploy water as directed in proper location, orientation, and length.
011-237/280-2052 (UH60) 4-121

2. NRCM.
a. In conjunction with the RCMs, complete required water bucket checks to ensure proper system operation
prior to mission departure and attach water bucket to the aircraft.
b. Ensure water bucket is configured for the condition and mode of flight.
c. Recognize and respond to a water bucket system malfunction.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The PC will conduct a thorough crew briefing and ensure all crewmembers are familiar with water bucket
operations, emergency, and communication procedures The PC will confirm that required power is available
by comparing the information from the PPC to the hover power check.
b. The P* will remain primarily focused primarily outside the aircraft throughout the maneuver. The P* will
monitor altitude and avoid obstacles.
c. The P will monitor the cockpit instruments and assist the P* in clearing the aircraft. The P will set cargo
hook switches, as required, and should make all radio calls. When directed by the P* during the approach, the
P will place the cargo hook arming switch to the ARMED position. The P will release the water on command
from the P* or according to the crew briefing.
d. The P and NRCM will assist in clearing the aircraft and will provide adequate warning of obstacles. They
will announce when their attention is focused inside and again when attention is reestablished outside.
e. The NRCM will remain primarily focused on the bucket. The NRCM will guide the P* during the bucket
pickup, advise of the bucket condition in flight, provide directions and assistance when to dump the water,
and direct the P* when setting down the bucket.
f. The NRCM will advise the P* of any water bucket faults or failures.
g. Sling load procedures according to Task 2048 will be used for normal sling load techniques and load call
outs. The NRCM will advise the P* when the water bucket is in the water, filling, full, water deploying, and
empty. The NRCM will instruct the P* (as necessary) to keep the electrical attachment assembly from
entering the water.
2. Procedures.
a. Preflight.
(1) The PC will analyze the mission using mission, enemy, terrain and weather, troops and support
available, time available, civil considerations (METT-TC) and determine the amount of water required
to conduct the mission and the initial profile to be used during the water emplacement.
(2) The NRCM(s) will ensure the water bucket is installed, all installation checks are
completed according to unit SOP and the water bucket operator’s
(3) The crew will conduct the ground checks according to manufacture procedures to confirm the proper
operation of the water bucket before takeoff.
(4) Hook up and hover. Once the water bucket is placed on the ground beside the aircraft and all
associated wiring is installed, place the cargo release switch in the ARM position. Follow verbal
signals from the NRCM to hover over the water bucket. Apply control movements as necessary
to remain vertically clear and centered over the water bucket. Once in this position, smoothly apply
collective input until all slack is removed from the suspension cable. Maintain heading with pedals.
Apply additional collective to raise the bucket to 5 feet AGL. Monitor aircraft instruments to ensure
aircraft limitations are not exceeded.
011-237/280-2052 (UH60) 4-122

(5) Water pick up. Arrive over water source with minimal forward speed and a bucket height of 10 feet
above water level. Slowly reduce collective until the bucket makes contact with the water. Once the
bucket has inverted and submerged in the water, follow verbal signals from the NRCM to
remain centered over the bucket as it fills—applying cyclic, collective, and pedals as necessary. The
pilot can vary the bucket’s capacity by varying the speed at which it is pulled from the water. A slow lift
gives minimum fill. A fast lift gives maximum fill. When the NRCM indicates the bucket is
ready or full, increase collective until all slack is removed from the suspension cable and the lip
of the bucket is clear of the water. Maintain heading with pedals. Apply additional collective to raise the
filled bucket clear of the water’s surface to a height of 5 feet. Ensure the bucket is holding the water
and monitor aircraft instruments to ensure aircraft limitations are not exceeded.
(6) Take off. Establish a constant angle of climb that will permit safe obstacle clearance. When above
100 feet AGL or when clear of obstacles, adjust attitude and power as required to establish the desired
rate of climb and airspeed. Smoothly adjust flight controls to prevent bucket oscillation.
Note. Ensure that the cargo hook arming switch is in the ARMED position when operating at
altitudes below 300 feet AHO and in the SAFE position above 300 feet AHO.
(7) En route. Maintain the desired altitude, flight path, and airspeed. Make smooth control applications
to prevent bucket oscillation. If a lateral bucket oscillation occurs, reduce airspeed. If a fore-and-aft
oscillation occurs, begin a shallow turn while reducing airspeed.
Note. Recommended en route airspeed with loaded or unloaded water bucket is 80 KIAS.
Note. When flying with the bucket empty, open the bucket to allow streamlining. This prevents the
bucket from twisting and pinching the cables.
(8) Approach and water release. Altitude and airspeed affect the dump pattern. It is most concentrated
at lower altitudes (AGL) and at a hover. The pattern will spread with altitude and speed. (The PC will
determine the most appropriate height and speed for the pattern desired or according to the mission
briefing.) When the approach angle is intercepted, decrease the collective to establish the descent.
When passing below 300 feet AGL, place cargo hook in ARM position. Maintain entry airspeed until
apparent ground speed and rate of closure appear to be increasing. Progressively decrease the rate of
descent and forward airspeed until a momentary hover is attained with the water bucket between 20 to
50 feet above intended release point. This method is effective for spot fires. For water release on a fire
line or large area, maintain water bucket at 20 to 50 feet above intended release point and airspeed
between slightly above ETL not to exceed 50 KIAS for more effective coverage. Confirm all water
releases with NRCM.
Note. The bucket manufacturer does not recommend dumping at airspeeds above 50 KIAS.
Note. There is a delay of appropriately 0.5 to 1.0 second between the activation of the dump switch
and the discharge of the water.
Note. If the bucket fails to open, attempt to establish a hover. Lightly “BOUNCE” the bottom of the
bucket on the ground and then repeat the water drop release procedure. If the bucket sill does not
open, establish a hover. Gently lower the bucket to the ground. With the bucket resting on the
ground, move the aircraft laterally to dump the water out of the bucket and repeat the fill-up
procedure.
Note. Avoid flight over populated areas.
Note. A go-around should also be initiated if visual contact with the water release area is lost or any
crewmember announces “climb, climb, climb.” This phrase will only be used when there is not
enough time to give detailed instructions to avoid the obstacle.
011-237/280-2052 (UH60) 4-123

2. Post mission.
a. Ensure water bucket is serviceable.
b. Derig aircraft and water bucket. Ensure all documentation is complete on water bucket usage and
inspection.
SAND/DUST/SMOKE CONSIDERATIONS: If during the approach, visual reference with the water release area
or obstacles is lost, initiate a go-around or ITO as required, immediately. Be prepared to transition to instruments.
Once VMC are regained, continue with the go-around. (If required, releasing the water reduces the gross weight
(GWT) by 5,000 to 6,000 pounds and minimizes power demand.)
MOUNTAINOUS AREA CONSIDERATIONS: If at any time during an approach, the aircraft does not have
sufficient power, and turbulent conditions or wind shift creates an unsafe condition, perform a go-around
immediately. (If required, releasing the water reduces the GWT by 5,000 to 6,000 pounds and minimizes power
demand.)
and, therefore, has the potential of causing visual illusions. Be alert to any unannounced changes in the flight profile
control. Operations become increasing more hazardous as references are reduced (open water versus a small lake),
water state increases (calm to chop to breaking condition with increasing wave height), and visibility decreases
(horizon becomes same color as water, water spray or rain on windshield, sunny midday versus twilight).
1. During water bucket operations, the P*’s attention will be divided between the aircraft instruments (altitude
and ground speed) and the outside. It is critical during NVG operations that the P’s and NCM’s focus be
primarily outside to provide warning to the P* of obstacles or hazards during the entire operation.
2. Spatial disorientation can be overwhelming during overwater operations at night. Proper scanning techniques
are necessary to avoid spatial disorientation. If there are visible lights on the horizon or if the shoreline can be
seen, the pilot may opt to approach and hover the aircraft so it is pointed toward these references—if the wind
permits. If no other references exist, deploy chemlights to assist in maintaining a stable hover during the water
pickup.
REFERENCES: Appropriate common references, AR 70-62, TM 4-48.09, ATP 3-34.20, and the Water
Bucket airworthiness release.
011-237/280-2052 (UH60) 4-124

TASK 2053
Perform Firehawk Operations
WARNING
Never dump water onto ground personnel as the water impact

could result in injury.
Minimize hovering or flying slowly over fires. The rotor wash fans
the flames which may cause more hazards to ground crews.
When performing this task with cabin doors open, ensure that any
personnel in the cabin area are wearing safety harnesses secured
to tie-down rings or are seated in seats with seat belts on.
Note. The Firehawk water tank, when filled, is a high-density load with favorable flight characteristics.
Reduced velocity to never exceed airspeed (VNE) and bank angle limits must be kept in mind. Much of
the mission profile is flown at high gross weight and low airspeed. Also, density altitude is greatly
increased in the vicinity of a major fire. Performance planning must receive special emphasis.
CONDITION: In a UH-60 helicopter designated for Firehawk installation and equipped with the Firehawk water/
foam delivery tank system.
1. RCM
a. Determine whether the aircrew and aircraft are capable of completing the assigned mission.
b. Conduct a preflight and operational check per Appendix F of TM 1-1520-268-13&P.
c. Recognize and respond properly to external water tank systems malfunctions.
d. Conduct proper water dropping techniques.
e. Maintain ground track alignment with the selected approach path.
f. Execute a smooth and controlled pass over the intended point/area of water drop.
g. Deploy water as directed in correct location and orientation.
2. NRCM
a. In conjunction with RCMs, complete required checks to ensure proper system operation prior
to mission departure.
b. Recognize and respond properly to external water tank system malfunction.
c. Conduct proper snorkeling operations.
011-237/280-2053 (UH60) 4-125

DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The PC will conduct a thorough crew briefing and ensure all crewmembers are familiar with external
water tank operations, emergency, and communication procedures.
b. The P* will remain primarily focused outside the aircraft throughout the maneuver.
c. The P will monitor the cockpit instruments and assist the P* in clearing the aircraft. The P will
make all switch adjustments to the Firehawk water tank system as required. The P or P* will release
the water as briefed.
d. The NRCM will advise the P* of any faults or failures.
2. Procedures.
a. Preflight.
(1) The PC will analyze the mission using mission, enemy, terrain and weather,
troops and support available, time available, civil considerations (METT-TC) and
the initial profile to be used during the water emplacement.
(2) The crew will preflight and conduct ground checks IAW Annex F of TM 1-1520-13&P and the
aircraft operator’s manual. The NCM will observe the tank door opening during operational
checks for proper operation.
b. Snorkeling.
(1) As briefed or on final approach to the “Dip Site” the P will call out “Below 40
knots, Extending.”
Note. Deploying the snorkel on final approach helps minimize the time spent in the “Dip Site”, however,
at no time will the snorkel be deployed above 40 KIAS.
(2) The CE will acknowledge the call and when the snorkel is full out will say
“Extended.”
(3) The CE will then make guidance calls directing the aircraft into snorkeling
position. IE “Continue down 5-4-3-2-1, pump is in the water, stop down.”
(4) CE “Clear to Pump”
(5) P “Pump is on”
(6) CE “Pumping”
(7) PI- Monitor the aircraft power and water level.
When desired level is reached will announce
“pump is off, retracting.”
(8) CE- Announce “pump is off, retracting.”
(9) CE- Announce “Pump is out of the water”
(10) CE- Announce “Pump is Seated”
c. Takeoff.
(1) P- Announce if sufficient power is available. If sufficient power is not available,
release enough water until there is sufficient power.
011-237/280-2053 (UH60) 4-126

(2) P*- “On the go”
(3) P- Monitor TQ and TGT on take-off to ensure limits are not exceeded.
d. Approach and Water Release.
(1) The optimum airspeed and height for water release is 70 KIAS and 70’ AGL.
(2) P- Select the proper water deployment and amount switch positions.
(3) P*- Identifies the target and verifies the water deployment plan.
(4) P- Announce airspeed and altitude.
(5) P* or P- When at the drop point, Announce “Dumping” and release water.
(6) CE- Announce “Water away” if water is released or “No Drop” if water is not
released.
(7) CE- Announce effect of water on drop site.
SAND/DUST/SMOKE CONSIDERATIONS: If during the approach, visual reference is lost, immediately

perform IIMC procedures and E-dump the water. If during the approach the target area is lost, initiate a GO
AROUND (If flight is safe, dumping water may not be necessary) continue the go-around and visually obtain the
target area again.
MOUNTAINOUS AREA CONSIDERATIONS: If at any time during an approach, insufficient power is

available, turbulent conditions, or wind shifts create an unsafe condition perform a GO-AROUND immediately
and release any water in the tank.
OVERWATER CONSIDERATIONS: Over water flight, at any altitude, is characterized by the lack of visual
cues and therefore has the potential of causing visual illusions. Be alert to any unannounced changes in the flight
profile and be prepared to take immediate corrective actions.
NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE CONSIDERATIONS: Night/NVG operations with the external water
tank are not preferred and will be considered a high risk mission.

REFERENCES: TM 1-1520-268-13&P and current AWRs.
011-237/280-2053 (UH60) 4-127

TASK 2054
Perform Fast-Rope Insertion and Extraction Operations
Note. Aviation units in support of other than Special Operations Forces (SOF), Long Range
Surveillance Detachments (LRSD), and DA schools with a USASOC approved program
of instruction (POI) should be aware that conventional ground forces require
approval through the Commander, United States Army Special Operations Command
(USASOC) prior to FRIES operations. For more information see USSOCOM Manual 350-6.
WARNING
Ensure that crewmembers in the cabin area are wearing safety
harnesses secured to tie-down rings anytime the cabin doors are
open. Also ensure that all ropers are on the ground before any ropes
are released.
CONDITIONS: In an H-60 helicopter with FRIES equipment installed.

1. RCM.
a. Conduct a crew and passenger briefing.
b. Maintain entry altitude as directed ±10 feet.
c. Maintain maximum entry airspeed of 80 KIAS ±5 (KGS).
d. Maintain track aligned with landing direction.
e. Perform a smooth, controlled termination to a hover over the insertion point.
f. Maintain appropriate hover height ±5 feet (not to exceed rope height).
g. Do not allow drift to exceed ±5 feet from the intended hover point.
2. NRCM.
a. Ensure that the aircraft is configured for FRIES operations per ATP 3-18.10, USSOCOM 350-6, andthe
appropriate airworthiness release (AWR).
b. When briefed, make timing calls informing passengers of status to insertion point.
c. Make rope calls, informing pilots of status of ropes and passengers.
d. Assist the P* to maintain proper clearance on the approach and during the maneuver.
e. Assist the P* to maintain the aircraft over the intended delivery point, and ensure all passengers are safely
on the objective and secured in the aircraft prior to rope release and/or aircraft departure.
f. Manage and control door straps and cargo doors.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The PC will conduct a crew and passenger briefing and ensure personnel are familiar with operating
limitations and restrictions, normal emergency procedures of the FRIES system. The NRCM will verify
rope lengths and inform the PC prior to takeoff. The NRCM will inspect the rigging to ensure that
011-237/280-2054 (UH60) 4-128

the aircraft is configured for FRIES operations. The PC will verify the aircraft is rigged for FRIES
operations.
b. The P* will remain focused primarily outside the aircraft throughout the maneuver and will announce
when he or she begins the maneuver. The P* will also announce the intended point of insertion and pass the
FRIES execution command to the NRCM will relay the FRIES execution command to the fast-rope master
(FRM).
c. The P and NRCM will assist in clearing the aircraft and will provide adequate warning of obstacles. They
will also assist the P* in maintaining a stable hover and monitor aircraft systems for normal indications.
d. When utilizing two NRCM’s each NRCM will make specific calls informing the pilots per briefed
procedures. One NRCM will clear the tail, while the other assists the P* on placement over the insertion
point. Both NCMs will perform airspace surveillance and obstacle avoidance at all times, constant scanning
is required. One NRCM will be responsible for passing the 10, 6, and 1-minute calls to the passengers. One
NRCM will be responsible for making the rope calls; this does not prevent the other NRCM from providing
additional guidance.
e. The NRCM(s) will use pre-established procedures and communications including hand and arm signals
between each other and the fast rope master. The NRCM will control when ropes are deployed, released, or
retrieved. NCMs must verify with the other NRCM via hand and arm signals or ICS before releasing fast
rope. Fast rope master controls personnel movement and exiting of ropers.
f. NRCM will inform PC once both ropes are clear of the aircraft, or once both ropes have been retrieved
back into the aircraft, or ropes are secure during elevator training.
2. Procedures. To perform a FRIES operation, execute a terrain flight approach to the insertion point. On final,
adjust airspeed and altitude during the approach to stop over the insertion point at a predetermined hover height
(not to exceed rope length). At a stabilized hover P* announces the fast rope execution command “ROPES,
ROPES, ROPES.” NRCM will announce “ROPES OUT,” upon the first rope leaving the aircraft. NRCM will
announce “ROPERS AWAY,” upon the first roper exiting the aircraft. NRCM will announce “ROPES
CLEAR,” only when all ropers are safely on the insertion point and the ropes are either released or retrieved
inside the aircraft. P* will remain over the insertion point at a stabilized hover until all ropers and ropes are
clear. NRCM will announce to the P* “CLEARED FOR FLIGHT” upon verifying all ropes and ropers are
clear. NRCM will announce “TAIL UP” if contact is likely. NRCM will ensure approximately 5 feet of fast
rope remains in contact with the insertion point during FRIES operations.
Note. An OGE hover—especially at night —may cause the loss of all normal visual hover cues.
Note: The Primary method to conduct the hovering phase of FRIES operations in an H-60M is to be coupled
to the flight director “HVR POS” to aid a stabilized hover. When conditions exist where radar altitude
fluctuations are made due to terrain, obstacles, or wind “RAD ALT” should be placed in the active standby
mode by pressing and holding the collective trim button to manually control altitude with collective.
NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE CONSIDERATIONS: When hovering above 25 feet, the P* may have
difficulty in maintaining altitude and position. Use the radar altimeter to assist in maintaining altitude. Use
references, such as lights, tops of trees, or manmade objects above and to the sides of the aircraft. By establishing
a reference angle to these objects, the P* can detect altitude changes when his or her perspective to these objects
changes. Ground objects—fences, trails, roads—provide excellent references for detecting lateral drift. Proper
scanning techniques must be used. The P* may become spatially disoriented when alternating his or her viewing
perspective between high and low references.
011-237/280-2054 (UH60) 4-129

The AN/AVS -7 ANVIS HUD hover symbology can aid in maintaining position and hover altitude for NVG
operations and assist in maintaining position over the insertion point during adverse environmental conditions
(blowing dust, sand, or snow) or low levels of illumination. Proper scanning techniques are necessary to detect
aircraft drift and to avoid spatial disorientation.
Proper scanning techniques are necessary to detect aircraft drift and to avoid spatial disorientation. If possible, an
area with adequate ground contrast and reference points should be used.
References: Appropriate common references, statement of Airworthiness Qualification, ATP 3-18.10, and USSOCOM 350-6.
011-237/280-2054 (UH60) 4-130

TASK 2056
Perform Rappelling Operations
WARNING
Ensure that the rappel master and crewmembers are wearing safety
harnesses secured to tie-down rings anytime the cabin doors are
open. Also ensure that all rappellers are on the ground before any
rappel ropes are released.
CONDITIONS: In an H-60 helicopter with rappelling equipment installed.
STANDARDS: Appropriate common standards and the following additions/modification:

1. RCM.
a. Conduct a crew and passenger safety briefing.
b. Maintain appropriate hover altitude ±5 feet allowing at least 20 feet of rope to remain on the ground.
c. Do not allow drift to exceed ±5 feet from the intended hover point.
d. Maintain ropes in continuous contact with the ground.
e. Use terminology IAW the unit SOP.
2. NRCM.
a. Ensure that the aircraft is configured for rappelling operations per TC 21-24 and USSOCOM 350-6.
b. When briefed, make timing calls informing passengers of status to insertion point.
c. Make rope calls, informing pilots of status of ropes and passengers.
d. Assist the P* to maintain proper clearance on the approach and during the maneuver.
e. Assist the P* to maintain the aircraft over the intended delivery point, and ensure all passengers are
safely on the objective or secured in the aircraft prior to rope release and/or aircraft departure.
f. Manage and control door straps and cargo doors.
g. Use terminology IAW the unit SOP.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The PC will conduct a crew and passenger briefing and ensure personnel understand their
responsibilities during rappelling operations, including aircraft safety and actions in the event of an
emergency. The PC will also emphasize procedural techniques for clearing, recovery, and jettison of ropes.
The NRCM will inspect the rigging to ensure that the aircraft is configured for rappelling operations. The
PC will verify the aircraft is rigged for rappelling operations. The NRCM will verify rope lengths and
inform the PC prior to takeoff.
b. The P* will remain focused primarily outside the aircraft and will announce when they begin the
maneuver. The P* will announce the intended point of insertion and pass the rappelling execution
command to the NRCM. The NRCM will relay the rappelling execution command to the rope master
(RM) and remain centered over the target with corrections from the NRCM or rappel master as required.
c. The P and NRCM will assist in clearing the aircraft and will provide adequate warning of obstacles.
They will also assist the P* in maintaining a stable hover by providing the P* with information regarding
drift of the aircraft. The P will also monitor cockpit indications.
011-237/280-2056 (UH60) 4-131

d. When utilizing two NCM’s one NRCM will make specific calls, and inform the pilots. One NRCM will
clear the tail, while the other assists the P* on placement over the insertion point. Both NCMs will perform
airspace surveillance and obstacle avoidance at all times, constant scanning is required. One NRCM will
be responsible for passing the 10, 6, and 1-minute calls to the passengers. One NRCM will be responsible
for making the rope calls; this does not prevent the other NRCM from providing additional guidance.
e. The NRCM will use pre-established procedures and communications including hand and arm signals
between each other and the rope master. The NRCM will control when ropes are deployed, released,
or retrieved. NCMs must verify with the other NRCM via hand and arm signals or ICS before releasing
rappelling rope(s). The rope master controls personnel movement and exiting of rappellers.
f. The NRCM will inform PC once rappeller(s) are clear of the aircraft, rope(s) have been retrieved back into
the aircraft, or rope(s) are secured by belay man.
2. Procedures. Make the approach into the wind (if possible) and plan to arrive over the insertion point at an
altitude that will clear the highest obstacle. Select an appropriate reference point to maintain heading and
position over the ground. P* announces the rappelling execution command “ROPES ROPES, ROPES.” The
NRCM will announce “ROPES OUT,” upon the first rope leaving the aircraft. The NRCM will announce
“ROPERS AWAY,” upon the first rappeller exiting the aircraft. The NRCM will announce “ROPES
CLEAR,” only when all rappellers are safely on the insertion point and the ropes are either released,
retrieved inside the aircraft or secured by the belay man. P* will remain over the insertion point at a stabilized
hover until all rappellers and ropes are clear. The NRCM will announce to the P* “CLEARED FOR FLIGHT”
upon verifying all ropes and ropers are clear. The NRCM will ensure approximately 20 feet of rappelling rope
remains in contact with the insertion point during rappelling operations. During the rappelling operation, use the
collective to maintain altitude and be prepared to correct for CG changes as the rappellers depart the aircraft.
Note. The following standard words and phrases are some examples of terminology used for fries
operations:
Note: The Primary method to conduct the hovering phase of Rappelling operations in an H-60M is to be
coupled to the flight director “HVR POS” to aid a stabilized hover. When conditions exist where radar altitude
ADVERSE WEATHER/TERRAIN CONDITIONS: Rappel operations will not be conducted under the following
conditions:
 Ambient temperature is 30-degrees Fahrenheit or less.
 Winds in excess of 30 knots.
 Lightning strikes within one nautical mile of rappelling operations.
 Wind chill factors caused by the helicopter’s rotor wash which could cause cold weather injuries.
 Water or ice on the rope inhibiting the ability of the rappellers to control their descent.
 The rope is exposed to the elements for a sufficient length of time to freeze or deteriorate, thereby
reducing tensile strength.
 Blowing particles produced by rotor wash causes the aircrew or the rappel master to lose visual contact
with the ground.
references such as lights, tops of trees, or man made objects above and to the sides of the aircraft. By establishing
a reference angle to these objects, the P* can detect altitude changes when his or her perspective to these objects
011-237/280-2056 (UH60) 4-132


REFERENCES: Appropriate common references, TC 21-24, and USSOCOM 350-6.
011-237/280-2056 (UH60) 4-133

TASK 2058
Perform Special Patrol Infiltration/Exfiltration Operations
Aviation units in support of other than SOF, Long Range Surveillance Detachments (LRSD), and
DA schools with a USASOC approved program of instruction (POI) should be aware that
conventional ground forces require approval through the Commander, United States Army
Special Operations Command (USASOC) prior to SPIES operations. For more information see
USSOCOM Manual 350-6.
WARNING
Ensure that the SPIES master and crew chief wear safety harnesses
secured to tie-down rings anytime cabin doors are open.
CAUTION
Ensure that SPIES rope remains secured to the cargo hook until the
aircraft has landed. If recovery of SPIES rope is impossible, execute a roll-
on landing to avoid entanglement in the rotor system.
CONDITIONS: In an H-60 helicopter with SPIES equipment installed.
1. RCM.
a. Conduct a crew and passenger safety briefing.
b. In-flight maintain a minimum of 100 ft. separation between extraction personnel and highest obstacles.
c. Maintain airspeed ±5 knots. (Maximum airspeed with team members attached is 70 KIAS in moderate
climates and 50 KIAS in cold climates.)
d. During hover, maintain hover altitude ±10 feet and do not allow drift to exceed 5 feet.
2. NRCM.
a. Ensure that the aircraft is prepared for SPIES operations per ATP 3-18.10 and USSOCOM 350-6 and the
unit SOP.
b. Manage and control door straps and cargo doors.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The PC will conduct a crew and passenger briefing and ensure personnel understand their responsibilities
during SPIES operations, including aircraft safety and actions in the event of an emergency. The PC will
also emphasize procedural techniques for personnel infiltration, extraction and jettison of ropes. The NRCM
will inspect the rigging to ensure that the aircraft is configured for SPIES operations. The PC will verify the
aircraft is rigged for SPIES operations.
b. The P* will remain focused primarily outside the aircraft throughout the maneuver for aircraft control and
obstacle avoidance. The P* will announce the intended point of extraction and remain centered over the
point with corrections from the other pilot, the NRCM and SPIES master as required.
011-237/280-2058 (UH60) 4-134

c. The P and NRCM will assist in clearing the aircraft and will provide adequate warning of obstacles.
They will assist the P* during the pickup phase of the operation. They will advise the P* when the slack is
out of the rope(s) and when the SPIES team members are off the ground and clear above the highest
obstacle. P announces the altitude above ground when personnel become airborne. During forward flight,
the NRCM must constantly monitor the SPIES team members and keep the P* informed of their stability
and height above obstacles.
2. Procedures. P* will make a smooth progressive deceleration to the extraction point at a rate that will ensure
the safety of the SPIES members and terminate at the proper altitude giving the execution command.
a. NRCM assist in deploying the extraction system as briefed and relay proper commands informing P* the
status of the extraction operation.
b. Once hook up is complete P* will ascend at a rate that will ensure the safety of the extraction personnel.
To avoid "jerking" the SPIES members off the ground, the slack in the rope must be removed cautiously.
Do not start forward flight until all obstacles are cleared.
c. Maximum en-route airspeed will be no faster than 70 KIAS in moderate climates and 50 KGS in cold
climates while team members are attached to the SPIES rope. Maximum aircraft bank angle will be no
greater than 30 degrees. It may be necessary to reduce airspeed if SPIES personnel begin to spin or if the
cone angle exceeds 30 degrees.
d. Upon arrival at the dismount area, a transition is made into hovering flight at an altitude of 250 feet
AGL. A vertical descent is started with the rate not to exceed 100 FPM at touchdown. Maintain a stable
hover until SPIES members clear the extraction system.
Note: The Primary method to conduct the hovering phase of SPIES operations in an H-60M is to be coupled to
the flight director “HVR POS” to aid a stabilized hover. When conditions exist where radar altitude fluctuations
are made due to terrain, obstacles, or wind “RAD ALT” should be placed in the active standby mode by pressing
and holding the collective trim button to manually control altitude with collective.
ADVERSE WEATHER/TERRAIN CONDITIONS: SPIES operations will not be conducted under the following
conditions:
 Wind chill factors caused by the rotor wash of the helicopter or extraction cruise air speeds that may cause
cold weather injuries.
 Ice on the SPIES.
 SPIES is exposed to the elements long enough to freeze, thereby reducing its tensile strength.
 Blowing particles produced by rotor downwash cause the aircrew or the SPIES master to lose visual
contact with the ground.
WATER EXTRACTION CONSIDERATIONS: The SPIES is suitable for extracting teams from the water. For
this procedure, three inflatable life vests or any type of floatation device is tied to the SPIES rope to provide
buoyancy for the rope while in the water. Takeoff, en-route, and landing are the same as over land. The dismounting
procedures differ when landing on a ship. Once onboard, the team members take their orders from LSE or personnel
in charge of the deck.
references such as lights, tops of trees, or man made objects above and to the sides of the aircraft. By establishing a
reference angle to these objects, the P* can detect altitude changes when his or her perspective to these objects
011-237/280-2058 (UH60) 4-135

Spatial disorientation can be overwhelming during overwater operations at night. If there are visible lights on the
horizon or if the shoreline can be seen, the pilot may opt to approach the survivor(s) so the aircraft is pointed toward
these references, if the wind permits. If no other references exist, deploy chemlight bundles to form a runway to
assist in maintaining a stable hover.

REFERENCES: Appropriate common references, FRIES AWR (as applicable),
011-237/280-2058 (UH60) 4-136

TASK 2060
Perform Rescue Hoist Operations
CONDITIONS: In an H-60 helicopter equipped with a rescue hoist system.
WARNING
Failure to identify and correct cable oscillation in a timely manner may result in severe injury
or death to personal ridding on the hoist. Hoist operators will immediately inform the crew of
any cable oscillation and conduct oscillation correction procedures IAW aircraft
operator’s manual and Army Aviation Rescue Hoist SOP/TSP.
1. All ACM’s
a. Complete Hoist pre-operational checks IAW the UH-60 -10/-10CL, and the Army Aviation Rescue Hoist
SOP.
b. Determine Hoisting location.
c. Determine appropriate Hoisting Method (Static or Dynamic).
d. Perform Hoist Operations IAW the Army Aviation Rescue Hoist SOP.
e. Utilize crew coordination terminology IAW the Army Aviation Rescue Hoist SOP and module 8 of this
ATM.
f. Respond to Rescue Hoist Emergencies (if necessary).
g. Complete Hoist post-operational checks IAW the UH-60 -10/-10CL, and the Army Aviation Rescue Hoist
SOP.
2. RCM ( Pilot on the Controls [P*])

a. Maintain appropriate hover within the following parameters:
i) Altitude (OGE) ±5 feet.
ii) Drift (OGE) ±5 feet.
3. RCM (Pilot not on the controls [P])

a. Confirm aircraft is at appropriate hover height location.
b. Monitor Hoist operations IAW the Army Aviation Rescue Hoist SOP.
4. Hoist Operator (HO)

a. Determine appropriate extraction equipment and prepare it for use.
b. Lower Hoist Rider to extraction site.
c. Maintain positive control of the hoist cable during operations.
d. Raise hoist rider and patient from extraction site.
e. Secure patient and equipment in cabin.
5. Hoist Rider (Flight Medic/Rescuer/Extractor)

a. Determine appropriate extraction equipment and prepare it for use.
b. Maintain control of self and gear while exiting cabin and when on cable.
c. Prepare patient for extraction.
d. Secure patient and equipment in cabin.
011-237/280-2060 (UH60) 4-137

DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The pilot in command (PC) will conduct a thorough crew briefing and ensure all crewmembers are familiar with
rescue hoist operations, emergency procedures, communication procedures, lowering the flight medic/rescuer/
extractor, and lifting the patient off the ground using the hoist or aircraft per the aircraft operator’s manual,
checklists listed in the reference section of this task, and the Army Aviation Rescue Hoist SOP/TSP. The PC will
also ensure that all crewmembers understand “CUT CABLE” procedures and oscillation procedures.
b. The pilot on the controls (P*) will remain focused primarily outside the aircraft throughout the maneuver for
aircraft control and obstacle avoidance. The P* will announce the intended point of hover and will conduct hoist
operations IAW the aircraft operator’s manual, checklists listed in the reference section of this task, and the
Army Aviation Rescue Hoist SOP/TSP.
Note. The P* should be in the right seat, which allows the P in the left seat to visually monitor the entire operation.
c. The pilot not on the controls (P) and NRCM will assist in clearing the aircraft and will provide adequate warning
of obstacles. They will also assist the P* in maintaining a stable hover by providing the P* with information
regarding the drift of the aircraft. The P will also monitor cockpit indications and monitor hoist operator. The P
will be able to operate the control panel for the rescue hoist (if necessary).
d. The NRCM will ensure that the hoist is configured and will also ensure that all lifting devices (such as jungle
penetrator, sked/stokes litter, and survivor’s slings) are secured in the aircraft before takeoff.
e. The NRCM will conduct the hoist operation IAW the appropriate aircraft operators manual/CL, and
Army Aviation Rescue Hoist SOP/TSP.
2. Procedures. Refer to the words and phrases listed in the Army Aviation Rescue Hoist SOP that must be used for
crew coordination during hoist operations.
a. General enroute and operational procedures. Crewmembers will be alerted 5 minutes before arriving at pickup
site. Crewmembers complete all required checks (such as rescue hoist control panel switches set, hoist circuit
breakers set, intercommunication system selector switches set, and crewmembers reposition for hoist operations).
Make the approach into the wind, if possible, and plan to terminate the approach at an altitude that will clear the
highest obstacle. Conduct a power available check and select appropriate reference points to maintain heading and
position over the ground. Once stabilized over pickup site, perform hoist operations according to the appropriate
aircraft operator’s manual/CL, and the Army Aviation Rescue Hoist SOP/TSP.
b. Inert patient recovery. General format is the same as over land, except the hoist rider is lowered on the hoist and
secures the patient to the recovery device. Prior to deploying, all crewmembers will be briefed on method of hoist
operations (static or dynamic), and a radio communications check should be made between the pilot and hoist
rider.
c. General recovery procedures overwater. General format is the same as over land, except a smoke device may be
used to determine wind direction and velocity. Terminate the approach at a 100-foot hover—20 feet before
reaching the patient. Deploy the recovery device and allow it to contact the water before reaching the patient. All
crewmembers will wear floatation devices. Operations become increasingly more hazardous as references are
reduced (open water versus a small lake or ship versus small boat), sea state increases (calm to chop to breaking
condition with increasing wave height), and visibility decreases (horizon becomes same color as water, water spray
or rain on windshield, sunny midday versus twilight).
Note. Should difficulty in maintaining a stable hover occur, the hoist operator will extend additional cable as “slack”
to preclude inadvertent jerking the cable.
011-237/280-2060 (UH60) 4-138

Note. The Primary method to conduct the hovering phase of rescue hoist operations in an H-60M is to be coupled to
the flight director “HVR POS” to aid a stabilized hover. When conditions exist where radar altitude fluctuations are
made due to terrain, obstacles, or wind “RAD ALT” should be placed in the active standby mode by pressing and
holding the collective trim button to manually control altitude with collective.
1. Use proper scanning techniques to avoid spatial disorientation.
2. For unaided night and NVG flight, the landing light and searchlight will be operational IAW AR 95-1, table 5-2.
ACMs will understand the proper functionality of the aircraft lighting before employing the searchlight.
3. Hovering with minimum drift is difficult and requires proper scanning techniques and crewmember coordination
when NVG are used. If possible, an area with adequate ground contrast and reference points should be used.
4. Visual obstacles (such as shadows) should be treated the same as physical obstacles.
5. If no other references exist, deploy chem lights to assist in maintaining a stable hover.
OVERWATER CONSIDERATIONS:
Spatial disorientation can be overwhelming during overwater operations or areas of low contrast at night. If there are
visible lights on the horizon or if the shoreline can be seen, the pilot may opt to approach the survivor(s) so the aircraft
is pointed toward these references, if the wind permits.

1. Training will be conducted in the aircraft IAW the Army Aviation Rescue Hoist SOP / TSP.

REFERENCES: Appropriate common references, Army Aviation Rescue Hoist SOP and H-60 Rescue Hoist TSP.
011-237/280-2060 (UH60) 4-139

TASK 2061
Operate Forward Looking Infrared System (HH-60)
CAUTION
During takeoff, do not rotate forward while on the main landing gear (to
preclude contacting the FLIR turret on the ground). During landings, do not
make a hard landing (compressing the struts) or heavy braking (to
preclude contacting the FLIR turret on the ground).
CONDITIONS: In an HH-60 helicopter.

1. Operate the installed forward looking infrared (FLIR) per the appropriate aircraft operator’s manual.
2. Use the MFD or installed display to view FLIR picture.
3. Select menu for operating FLIR.
4. Select and use the appropriate field of view (FOV) polarity gain and pointing control on the FLIR system.
5. Select the caution advisory screen or pop-up window for run-up or current mission profile.
6. Interpret data between the MFD/display and central display unit (CDU).
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. During run-up, the P* and P will ensure all procedures per the appropriate aircraft operator’s manual are
followed to ensure no damage occurs to the FLIR turret.
b. The P* will focus primarily outside the aircraft and respond to navigation cues given by the P. The P* flies
the mission profiles at the appropriate airspeeds, altitudes, and headings as directed by the P.
c. The P selects desired FLIR menu items to view outside the aircraft.
d. The P monitors all mission equipment and uses the FLIR and MFD.
e. The FLIR is stowed and shut down per the appropriate aircraft operator’s manual.
2. Procedures. Perform the turn on, test the procedures, and select operational modes per the appropriate
technical manual. Select the polarity, FOV and gain to best fit the current mission profile. Know and
understand factors and or emergencies adversely affecting the MFDs, which could result in degraded mission
performance or the mission being aborted. Know and understand takeoff and landing procedures that could
cause damage to the FLIR system turret. The proper shutdown procedures will be performed per the TM.
NIGHT OR NVG CONSIDERATIONS: Ensure MFD lighting adjustment is set at an acceptable level for
night or NVG operations.

REFERENCES: Appropriate common references and the appropriate manufacturer’s references.
011-237/280-2061 (UH60) 4-140

TASK 2064
Perform Paradrop Operations
WARNING
Ensure that any personnel in the cabin area not wearing parachutes
are wearing safety harnesses secured to tie-down rings or are seated
in seats with seat belts on.
If parachutes use automatic rip cord releases, ensure that the

automatic release is disconnected before descent is initiated. For an
in-flight emergency, if altitude cannot be maintained, notify the
jumpmaster immediately so automatic rip cord releases can be
disconnected.
Ensure that static lines remain secured to the anchor point until they
are recovered or the aircraft has landed. If recovery of static lines is
impossible, execute landing with forward speed to avoid entangling
deployment bags in the rotor system.
CAUTION
The HF radio will be set to silent mode during paradrop operations.
If static lines become entangled on the HF antenna, the NRCM
or jumpmaster will maintain tension on the lines until landing is
accomplished.
CONDITIONS: In an H-60 helicopter with a jumpmaster.

1. RCM.
a. Conduct a thorough crew and passenger safety briefing.
b. Maintain briefed airspeed not to exceed a maximum airspeed of 90 KIAS during jumper deployment
or as briefed by the jumpmaster.
c. Maintain appropriate ground track over the drop zone.
2. NRCM. Ensure that the aircraft is prepared for paradrop operations IAW the appropriate aircraft
operator’s manual, ATTP 3-18.11, TC 3-21.220, and the unit SOP.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The PC conducts or directs a crewmember to conduct a crew and jumpmaster briefing and ensures all
crewmembers are familiar with paradrop safety actions, emergency procedures, and communication
procedures.
b. The PC will verify the aircraft is rigged properly. The P* will remain focused primarily outside the
aircraft throughout the maneuver.
c. The P and NRCM will assist in clearing the aircraft and will provide adequate warning of obstacles
and traffic.
011-237/280-2064 (UH60) 4-141

d. The P will ensure that the jumpmaster or NRCM retrieves the static lines as soon as the last parachutist has
cleared the aircraft.
e. The NRCM or the jumpmaster will acknowledge all communications from the P* and P. The NRCM will
inform the P* or P when all parachutists have exited the aircraft, report status of parachutes and when the
deployment bags have been recovered.
2. Procedures. Maintain altitude, airspeed, and ground track as determined during premission planning and
jumpmaster's instructions. Perform in-flight procedures IAW ATTP 3-18.11 and TC 3-21.220.
a. The crew will conduct the paradrop per the procedures covered in the briefing and the references listed
below. The PC will check that the jumpmaster or NRCM retrieves the static lines as soon as the last
parachutist has cleared the aircraft.
b. The NRCM will announce “JUMPERS AWAY,” upon the first jumper leaving the aircraft. The NRCM will
announce “JUMPERS CLEAR,” once all jumpers have exited the aircraft. If static line parachutes are
being used the NRCM will immediately retrieve and secure the static lines (deployment bags if required). The
NRCM will announce total number of operational parachutes. NRCM will attempt to monitor the status of the
parachutists.
Note. If the jumpmaster cannot communicate directly with the P*/P, the jumpmaster will
communicate with the NRCM via hand-and-arm signals. The NRCM will relay necessary information to
the P*/P via the intercom.
Note. This task applies to static-line and free-fall paradrop operations.

REFERENCES: Appropriate common references, AR 95-1, 14 CFR Federal Aviation Regulation (FAR), Part
105, TC 3-21.220, ATTP 3-18.11, and USASOC Reg 350-2.
011-237/280-2064 (UH60) 4-142

TASK 2068
Perform Shipboard Operations
WARNING
Do not move the cyclic with the pitch and roll of the ship. Do not
allow the rotor to dip down to a low position, as it could be fatal to
deck crews and those entering or exiting the aircraft.

1. RCM.
a. Comply with arrival and departure and landing signal enlisted (LSE)/controller instructions.
b. Set the parking brakes before landing.
c. Ensure a green deck before landing.
d. Perform a VMC approach.
e. Perform a VMC takeoff.
2. NRCM.
a. Ensure aircraft remains clear of the ship during approach and takeoff.
b. Ensure tail wheel is cleared on deck.
c. Ensure aircraft is chained or moored before exiting, when required.
d. Use terminology IAW SOP.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The P* will focus primarily outside the aircraft to provide obstacle clearance throughout the maneuver.
The P* will announce when beginning the approach and whether the approach will terminate to a hover or
to the surface. The P* also will announce the intended point of landing and any deviation to the approach, to
include go-around. The P* will announce his or her intentions to takeoff.
b. The P will call out altitude and airspeed and will complete the before-landing check. The NRCM calls out
“CROSSING THE WAKE” and the P will ensure that the parking brakes are set and the tail wheel is
locked. The P will verbally relay the signalman's signals if the P* loses visual contact with the LSE.
c. The P and NRCM will assist in clearing the aircraft and will provide adequate warning of obstacles,
unannounced drift, and changes in altitude. They will announce when their attention is focused inside and
again when attention is reestablished outside and will acknowledge all P* directions. They will assist the P*
in ensuring that the main wheels are within the landing deck circle or as directed by the LSE before
touchdown.
2. Procedures.
a. Before the approach. When cleared to land, adjust airspeed as necessary, descend to 200 feet above the
water line (AWL), and enter the landing pattern. The LSE will expect the pilot in the seat nearest the bow of
the ship upon landing to be at the flight controls for the first landing. Make a standard rate turn or less in the
appropriate direction and cross perpendicular to the ships wake, and then begin the turn to final. When the
ship is underway, it will be necessary to make lateral corrections to maintain alignment with the landing
deck lineup lines. An alternate technique is to lead the ship by initiating the approach to a point forward of
the flight deck.
011-237/280-2068 (UH60) 4-143

b. During the approach. Cross the deck edge no faster than a brisk walk at an altitude of 5 to 10 feet above
the landing surface. (Higher altitudes make it difficult to maintain good visual references.) NRCM will
call “MAINS OVER,” “TAIL OVER,” and “CLEAR DOWN,” during this phase and keep the LSE in
sight. Stop all aircraft movement over the center of the deck and ensure the main landing gear is within
the landing circle or as directed by the LSE for landing.
Note. The deck landing area may have a perimeter safety net, perimeter markings, and red lights
outlining the landing area. Two white lineup lines form an "X" through the landing area. These lines
contain white lights, which are only visible when the aircraft is aligned on the approach path. Around
the center of the "X" is a white circle with centered amber light. The landing gear will normally be in
the forward portion of this circle, but landing will be as directed by the LSE/controller. Most ships
have floodlights to illuminate the landing area for unaided operations but the lights can be turned
down or off for NVG operations. LHA’s have different markings. Refer to NAVAIR 00-80T-106
LHA/LHD NATOPS manual.
Note. The LSE will assist during the last part of the approach with hand and arm signals.
c. Hovering. Maintain a hover until the LSE gives the signal to set the aircraft down. Follow the LSE’s
signal to move left, right, aft, or forward. Control drift using the ship's superstructure and the horizon, if
visible, for attitude reference while hovering.
d. Landing. In rough seas, attempt to land when the ship is at the apex of a pitch up. Watch the LSE and
listen to guidance from the ship's tower. Lower the collective and perform a controlled touchdown with the
main wheels inside the landing deck circle. When the landing gear is on the deck, smoothly lower the
collective to the full down position. Maintain the cyclic centered and ignore aircraft motion. Wait until the
wheels are chained or moored before exiting the aircraft.
Note. The requirements for chocks and chains and use of a LSE will be determined at the presail
meeting and is dependent on the ship captain’s requirements. The NATOPS manual sets a common
standard for fleet operations but we must comply with each ship’s standard as set by the captain.
e. Takeoff. The P will show his or her hands during the day or will flash a light at night to indicate to the
LSE which aviator is at the controls. When cleared for takeoff, increase power and smoothly ascend to a
hover height of 10 feet, keeping the LSE in sight. Slide left or right as directed to clear any obstruction and
depart the ship at a 45-degree angle from the bow. NRCM will call “CLEAR OF THE DECK.” The ship
can be used for an attitude reference during acceleration. During conditions of reduced visibility, it may be
necessary to transition to instruments for most of the takeoff. The ship can be used for an attitude reference
during acceleration. During conditions of reduced visibility, it may be necessary to transition to instruments
for most of the takeoff.
NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE CONSIDERATIONS: At night and during periods of reduced visibility,
fly instruments or cross-check the flight instruments while in the holding pattern. The P will advise when they have
the lineup line in sight. The P* will transition outside and make flight control adjustments as necessary to lineup on
final and to remain aligned with the lineup line. The P will continue to assist by monitoring the flight instruments,
calling out airspeed, and calling out altitude as necessary. To assist during low levels of illumination the AN/AVS-7
ANVIS HUD hover symbology can aid in maintaining position and hover altitude for NVG operations. Proper
scanning techniques are necessary to detect aircraft drift and to avoid spatial disorientation.
OVERWATER CONSIDERATIONS: Overwater flight, at any altitude, is characterized by a lack of visual cues
and, therefore, has the potential of causing visual illusions. Be alert to any unannounced changes in the flight profile
and be prepared to take immediate corrective actions. The radar altimeter select low bug should be set to assist in
altitude control. Hazards to terrain flight such as harbor lights, buoys, wires, and birds must also be considered
during overwater flight.
011-237/280-2068 (UH60) 4-144

REFERENCES: Appropriate common references, JP 3-04, NAVAIR 00-80T-106, NAVAIR 00-80T-122, NAEC-
ENG-7576, and FM 1-564.
011-237/280-2068 (UH60) 4-145

TASK 2070
Perform M-139 Volcano Operations
CONDITIONS: In an H-60 helicopter with M-139 Volcano System installed.

1. RCM.
a. Conduct permission planning to include required load configuration for size of minefield to be emplaced.
Verify the aircraft will remain within CG limitations for the duration of the flight.
b. In conjunction with the NRCMs, complete the required M-139 checks to
ensure proper system operation prior to mission departure.
c. Operate the M-139 Volcano System per the appropriate aircraft operator’s manual/CL and airworthiness
release.
d. Recognize and respond to a Volcano System malfunction.
e. Perform or describe appropriate emergency procedures per the appropriate aircraft operator’s
manual/CL.
f. Deploy a minefield in the designated location, orientation, and length maintaining ground speed ±5
kilometers per hour (KPH).
g. Submit scatterable minefield warning (SCATMINWARN) report. (See table 4-4.)
2. NRCM.
a. In conjunction with the RCMs, complete required M-139 checks to ensure proper system operation prior
to mission departure.
b. Load and inventory M87/M87A1/M88 mine canisters.
c. Set dispenser control unit (DCU) to mission parameters.
d. Operate the M-139 Volcano System per the appropriate operator’s manual/CL.
e. Recognize and respond to a Volcano System malfunction.
f. Perform or describe appropriate emergency procedures per the appropriate operator’s manual/CL.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The P* will focus primarily outside the aircraft to provide obstacle clearance throughout the maneuver
and maintain ground speed ±5 KPH and altitude ±10 feet during the mine- dispensing pass.
b. The P will provide adequate warning to avoid obstacles detected in the flight path and will announce
when his or her attention is focused inside the cockpit and again when attention is reestablished outside. P
will back up the P* with altitude and ground speed calls using the AN/ASN-128 Doppler or AN/ASN 128B
Doppler/GPS ground speed display to match the DCU ground speed setting and the AN/APN-209 radar
altimeter for height above the ground. The P will complete and send the SCATMINWARN message.
c. The NRCM will operate the DCU and advise the P* and P of DCU settings prior to mine dispensing. In
addition, the NRCM will advise the P* of any DCU faults or failures.
2. Procedures.
a. Preflight.
(1) The PC will analyze the mission using mission, enemy, terrain and weather, troops and support
available, time available, civil considerations (METT-TC) and determine the number of canisters
required to conduct the mission and the initial profile to be used during the mine emplacement. The
PC will select or have designated one or more of the following control measures during mine
emplacement:
011-237/280-2070 (UH60) 4-146

 Visual identification—start/stop markers on the ground.
 Time-lapse tables to determine the minefield length.
 Canister countdown.
 Doppler/GPS navigation system—start/stop coordinates.
(2) The NCMs will ensure the Volcano System is installed, all installation checks are completed, and
the mine canister pallets are loaded per direction of the PC or SOP.
(3) The crew will conduct the ground checks according to the appropriate operator’s manual/CL to
confirm the proper operation of the Volcano prior to takeoff.
b. Prior to arrival at target area.
(1) T–5 minutes: Turn the DCU power switch “ON” and verify no malfunctions indicated during initial
built-in test (BIT).
(2) T–2 minutes: Place the DCU fire circuit switch to ENABLE.
(3) T–1 minute: Place the interface control panel (ICP) arm switch to ARM. Verify the ARMED
advisory light is illuminated and no fault codes are displayed on the DCU.
(4) T–30 seconds: Verify no DCU fault codes.
c. At target area.
(1) Initiate the mine-dispensing sequence prior to the start point based on ground speed and altitude to
ensure mines impact at the start point and not 10 meters after. P* maintains ground speed ±5 KPH and
altitude ±10 feet during the mine-dispensing pass.
(2) Terminate mine dispensing prior to the end point based on ground speed and altitude to ensure
mines stop at the designated end point (±10 meters).
d. Post-mission.
(1) Place the ICP arm switch to SAFE and verify ARMED advisory light extinguished.
(2) Place DCU fire circuit switch “OFF.”
(3) Set DCU power switch (as required).
(4) Prepare and submit SCATMINWARN message (Table 4-4).
Table 4-4. Scatterable minefield warning format

Alpha Emplacement system.
Bravo Antitank (yes/no).
Charlie Antipersonnel (yes/no).
Delta Number of aim/corner points.
Echo Grid coordinates of aim/corner points and size of safety zone.
Foxtrot Date-time group of life cycle.

During the mine deployment phase, the P*’s attention will be divided between the aircraft instruments (altitude and ground
speed) and the outside.
It is critical during NVG operations that the P’s and NCM’s focus be primarily outside to provide warning to the P* of
obstacles or hazards during the mine delivery phase.

REFERENCES: Appropriate common references, ATP 3-34.20, and Volcano airworthiness release.
011-237/280-2070 (UH60) 4-147

TASK 2075
Perform Fat Hawk Operations
CONDITIONS: In an H-60 helicopter with extended range fuel system installed.

1. RCM.
a. Conduct permission planning to include required load configuration as briefed. Verify the aircraft will
remain within gross weight and CG limitations for the duration of the flight.
b. Conduct a thorough crew and support personnel safety briefing.
c. Ensure the aircraft is configured and fueled for the mission.
d. Ensure that the passengers and cargo are restrained.
e. Set up the micro forward area refueling equipment (FARE) system.
2. NRCM.
a. Load the aircraft per the load plan, if applicable.
b. Ensure that floor loading limits are not exceeded.
c. Secure passengers and cargo.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The PC will conduct a thorough crew briefing and ensure all crewmembers and support personnel are
familiar with fat hawk operations, emergency procedures, and communication procedures. The PC will
confirm that required power is available by comparing the information from the PPC to the hover power
check.
b. The P NRCM will assist refuel/rearm teams in loading and unloading
the aircraft. They act as fire safety guards during refuel operations as directed or briefed.
2. Procedures.
a. Preflight. After receiving a mission briefing, ensure that required fuel and ammunition is on hand. Ensure
that it is installed, secured, inventoried, and operational before flight according to the unit SOP. Conduct a
thorough crew and support team briefing covering as a minimum the following: landing direction,
frequencies and call signs, emergency procedures, execution (security, setup, refuel, rearm, and recovery),
dispersal plan alternate setup location, site layout, and loads.
b. Arrival. The designated primary rearming/refueling aircraft will set up first. The secondary
rearming/refueling aircraft will carry a duplicate two-point FARE for backup. The secondary aircraft will
loiter outside the weapon’s surface danger area and no closer than 150 feet from the rearm/refuel site. The
security team will immediately establish perimeter defense as briefed. The site layout and FARE system
setup will be according to, ATP 3-04.1, and unit SOP.
Note. Task 1016 contains procedures that may be used in performing this task.
011-237/280-2075 (UH60) 4-148

NIGHT OR NVG CONSIDERATIONS: Certain lighting configurations can look like an “inverted Y.” Lighting
configuration of the H-60s should be briefed to all aircrews prior to conducting operations.

011-237/280-2075 (UH60) 4-149

TASK 2076
Perform Caving Ladder Operations
NOTE: Caving Ladder operations are primarily used in support of maritime operations. Procedures
for preparing the aircraft and prerequisites for training are outlined in USSOCOM Manual 350-6.
WARNING
Ensure aircraft is clear of water throughout the maneuver to ensure

clearance and stabilator does not contact water.
CONDITIONS: In an H-60 helicopter with caving ladder equipment installed.

1. RCM.
a. Conduct a thorough crew briefing.
b. During extraction, maintain altitude of 10 feet (+0,-5 ft)
c. During extraction, maintain ground speed of 10 KGS (+0,-5 KGS).
d. Ensure maximum airspeed with caving ladder deployed is 80 KIAS with personnel attached to the
ladder and no faster than a brisk walk with no personnel attached.
e. Maintain appropriate hover altitude ±5 feet.
f. Do not allow drift to exceed ±5 feet from the intended hover point.
2. NRCM.
a. Ensure that the aircraft is configured for caving ladder operations.
b. Advise the P* when the survivors are in sight.
c. Inform the pilots when the ladder is being deployed/recovered.
d. Direct the P* to a stabilized hover over the survivors.
e. Manage and control door straps and cargo doors.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The PC will conduct or direct a crewmember to conduct a thorough crew briefing and ensure all
crewmembers are familiar with caving ladder operations, emergency procedures, and communication
procedures. The PC will ensure the aircraft is rigged per the SOP.
b. The P* will remain focused primarily outside the aircraft throughout the maneuver for aircraft control
and obstacle avoidance. The P* will announce the intended point of extraction and remain centered over
the target with corrections from the P and NRCM as required.
c. The P monitors’ altitude, turns on the windshield wipers and if required monitors insertion altitude and
airspeed of 10 KGS and 10 feet above water line (AWL). The NRCM will assist in clearing the aircraft l
provide adequate warning of obstacles and announce the water spray.
“SPRAY AT THE TAIL,” “SPRAY AT THE DOORS,” “SPRAY AT THE MAINS.” The NRCM will
advise the P* when the ladder is on the ground or in the water. The NRCM monitors drift and advise P*
on the progress of the extraction personnel during hook up to the ladders. NRCM will inform PC when
personnel and ladder(s) are secure. The P and NRCM will announce when their attention is focused
inside and again when reestablished outside. If forward flight is required, the NRCM must constantly
monitor the survivors and keep the P* informed of their stability and height above obstacles.
011-237/280-2076 (UH60) 4-150

2. Procedures.
a. The PC will ensure the ladder is inspected, serviceable, and secured to the aircraft. The NRCM will inspect
and secure a serviceable ladder to the aircraft cabin floor. Proper flotation will be attached to the ladder as
necessary.
b. The PC will inform the NRCM when to deploy the ladder and establish what maximum radar altimeter
reading may be achieved with the ladder safely on the ground or in the water.
c. Once personnel in the water are located, plan the approach into the wind as much as possible. The
approach should terminate to a hover approximately 20 feet above the personnel. The crewmember in the
cabin area will lower the caving ladder when directed to do so by the PC. The crewmember will advise
when the caving ladder has been deployed and that it is in the water. The ladder must touch the water
BEFORE personnel in the water touch it to avoid electrical static discharge shock. Owing to lack of visual
references, it will be difficult to detect drift over the water. Crewmembers must provide assistance to the P*
in order to maintain a constant position over the personnel in the water.
d. Personnel to be extracted will grasp the ladder after it has entered the water and comes within reach.
Personnel will then climb the ladder into the aircraft. Crewmembers will assist with the entry into the
aircraft as much as possible. In the event personnel are injured or cannot climb into the aircraft, they will
attach themselves to the ladder with a snap link attached to the front of the survival vest (attach snap link
directly to cable rung and not directly rung. These personnel will be flown to the nearest landing area,
lowered to the ground, and then moved into the aircraft.
Note: The Primary method to conduct the hovering phase of caving ladder operations in an H-60M is to be
coupled to the flight director “HVR POS” to aid a stabilized hover. When conditions exist where radar altitude
and therefore has the potential of causing visual illusions. Be alert to any unannounced changes in the flight profile
control. Hazards to terrain flight (such as harbor lights, buoys, wires, and birds) must also be considered during
overwater flight.
NIGHT OR NVG CONSIDERATIONS: For night operations, ladder will be marked with chemlights/light sources
at the point where the ladder enters the water, the bottom of the ladder, and 3-5 feet from the bottom of the rung.
This will aid the crewmembers in identifying when the ladder enters the water. Spatial disorientation can
be overwhelming during overwater operations at night. Proper scanning techniques are necessary to avoid
spatial disorientation. If there are visible lights on the horizon or if the shoreline can be seen, the pilot
may opt to approach the survivor(s) so the aircraft is pointed toward these references, if the wind permits.
If no other references exist, deploy chemlights to assist in maintaining a stable hover.
REFERENCES: Appropriate common references, ATP 3-18.12, and USSOCOM 350-6.
011-237/280-2076 (UH60) 4-151

TASK 2078
Perform Helocast Operations
WARNING
Ensure that crewmembers and the cast master in the cabin area
are wearing safety harnesses secured to tie-down rings anytime the
cabin doors are open.
WARNING
Ensure aircraft is clear of water throughout the maneuver to ensure

clearance and stabilator does not contact water and does not become
a hazard to the helocasters.
CONDITIONS: In an H-60 helicopter with helocast equipment installed, a helocast team, and a cast master.

1. RCM.
a. Conduct a thorough crew and passenger briefing.
b. During insertion, maintain insertion altitude of 10 feet (+0,-5 ft).
c. During insertion, maintain 10 KGS (+0,-3 KGS).
d. Maintain heading ±10 degrees.
2. NRCM.
a. Ensure aircraft is configured for helocast operations.
b. Perform crew coordination actions.
c. Manage and control door straps and cargo doors.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The PC will conduct or direct a crewmember to conduct a crew and passenger briefing and ensure
personnel are familiar with emergency procedures. The PC will also ensure all participants in the
helocast are briefed according to the unit SOP.
b. The P* remains focused primarily outside the aircraft throughout the maneuver and should make the
approach into the wind, if possible. The P* will slow to the desired airspeed and altitude. The maximum
airspeed and altitude is 10 knots at 10 feet.
Note. The aircraft maybe flown slightly lower or slower but the potential exist to drag the tail wheel
in the water or catch a wave. Going faster or higher could result in injury to personnel. The pilot
cannot rely on the airspeed indicator below 40 KIAS; the airspeed should not exceed that of a
brisk walk. Ground speed from on board systems such as; Doppler/GPS navigation set for H60
A/L and PFD for H-60M should be referenced.
c. The P will provide the P* with information regarding airspeed and altitude. The P will also monitor
the cockpit indications and announce when attention is focused inside the aircraft
011-237/280-2078 (UH60) 4-152

and again when their attention is reestablished outside. The P announces the altitude above the water and
ground speed at the insertion point and will turn on the windshield wipers when requested by the P*.
d. NRCM will announce the water spray (“SPRAY AT THE TAIL,” “SPRAY AT THE DOORS,” “SPRAY
AT THE MAINS”). NRCM must constantly monitor the personnel and keep P* informed of their progress.
The NRCM will announce when their attention is focused inside and again when reestablished outside. The
NRCM will assist the helocast master as necessary.
2. Procedures.
a. Hover checks will be made prior to beginning helocast operations to verify power available, aircraft
controllability, and accuracy of the radar altimeters. The PC will give the helocast master “10 minutes out,”
“6 minutes out,” and “1 minute out” alert calls. P* will make a smooth progressive deceleration and descent
to arrive at the insertion point at the appropriate altitude and airspeed for insertion. PIC will give the
execution command “SWIMMERS, SWIMMERS, SWIMMERS”
b. The approach should be made into the wind. Approach speed is 80 KIAS maximum from the release
point to the area of cast operations. The approach is situational dependent and may be either a VMC or a
terrain flight approach. After arrival at the insertion location, slow to the desired airspeed and altitude 10 ft.
above the water line AWL and 10 knots ground speed (KGS).
c. When utilizing two NRCM’s one NRCM will make specific calls, and inform the pilots. One NRCM will
clear the tail, while the other assists the P* on monitoring the insertion point and aircraft altitude. Both
NCMs will perform airspace surveillance and obstacle avoidance at all times. One NRCM will be
responsible for passing the 10, 6, and 1-minute calls to the passengers. One NRCM will be responsible
for making the swimmers call; “SWIMMERS AWAY” when the first swimmer exits the aircraft. NRCM
will announce “SWIMMERS CLEAR” when the last swimmer has exited the aircraft. NRCM will attempt
to account for swimmers in the water and notify the P*.this does not prevent the other NRCM from
providing additional guidance. NRCM will use pre-established procedures and communications including
hand and arm signals between each other and the cast master. NRCM will control when swimmers are
deployed. NCMs must verify with the other NRCM via hand and arm signals or ICS before departing
insertion point. The cast master controls personnel movement and exiting of swimmers. NRCM will inform
PC once the swimmer(s) are clear of the aircraft.
and therefore has the potential of causing visual illusions. Be alert to any unannounced changes in the flight profile
control. Hazards to terrain flight (such as harbor lights, buoys, wires, and birds) must also be considered during
overwater flight.
NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE CONSIDERATIONS: Spatial Disorientation can be overwhelming during
overwater operations at night. If there are visible lights on the horizon or if the shoreline can be seen, the pilot may
opt to approach the cast area so the aircraft is pointed toward these references, if the wind permits. Proper scanning
techniques are necessary.

REFERENCES: Appropriate common references, ATP 3-18.11, USSOCOM 350-6, and ATP 3- 18.10.
011-237/280-2078 (UH60) 4-153

TASK 2098
Perform Aerial Radio Relay
CONDITIONS: In an H-60 helicopter equipped with a retransmission capability.

1. Identify and tune the appropriate frequency.
2. Establish contact with the message sender.
3. Authenticate, if required.
4. Establish contact with the message receiver.
5. Configure the aircraft radios for radio relay.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The P* will remain focused primarily outside the aircraft to provide obstacle clearance.
b. The P will configure the required radios and establish contact with the desired stations for retransmission.
c. The P and NRCM will monitor aircraft instruments, assist in clearing the aircraft,
and provide adequate warning to avoid traffic and obstacles.
2. Procedures. Set aircraft radio for retransmit (mode selector-RETRANS) or set appropriate receiver-
transmitter to the desired retransmit frequency. Set the radio retransmission selector switch to radios used.
Establish communication between each relay radio station by using appropriate ICS transmit
(TRANS) selector. If audio monitoring is desired, adjust audio control for a suitable output. Follow the
radio operation procedures outlined in the appropriate aircraft operator’s manual to configure each radio for
retransmission. (For additional information, see Task 2014.)

REFERENCES: Appropriate common references, and signal operating instructions (SOI).
011-237/280-2098 (UH60) 4-154

TASK 2112
Operate Armament Subsystem
WARNING
This task may only be performed by personnel qualified to operate

the weapon system IAW TC 3-04.45 and is not to be used a method of
qualification.
Observe all safety precautions for uploading ammunition according

to TM 9-1095-206-12&P.
To prevent accidental firing, do not retract bolt and allow it to go

forward if belted ammunition is in feed tray or if a live round is in the
chamber. Move cocking handling forward by hand.
CONDITIONS: In an H-60 helicopter with one or two machine guns installed with a M240 qualified crewmember.

1. Install and preflight the appropriate weapon according to the appropriate aircraft operator’s manual and the
appropriate weapon technical manual.
2. Load and safe the weapon.
3. Acquire and identify target.
4. Estimate range to target.
5. Engage target(s) according to weapon control measures, mission briefing, and rules of engagement (ROE).
6. Apply appropriate firing techniques.
7. Suppress, neutralize, or destroy as applicable.
8. Describe or perform emergency procedures for misfire, hangfire, cook off, runaway gun, ruptured cartridge,
and double feeding.
9. Clear and safe the weapon.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions. The NRCM will coordinate with and brief any additional ground support personnel before
installing and loading the weapon system. Perform installation and preflight inspection of the weapon. The
NRCM will brief all concerned personnel on procedures to be followed in the event of an emergency. The
NRCM will direct assistance from any additional ground support personnel to aid in installing and loading the
weapon. The NRCM will ensure that the proper amount of ammunition is loaded onboard the aircraft according
to the mission briefing.
2. Procedures. Brief additional ground support personnel as necessary. Perform installation and preflight
inspection of the weapon, ensuring that the gun is safetied to the pintle. Ensure that the ejector control bag and
ammunition can is installed. During loading of ammunition, observe all safety precautions. After loading the
ammunition, ensure the safety button is in (S) position. To initiate the firing sequence, push the safety button to
the (F) position, press the trigger fully and hold. Low cycle rate of fire of the machine gun allows firing of
single rounds or short bursts. The trigger must be completely released for each shot. Conduct weapons
engagement according to the mission briefing, ROE, and crew briefing. After acquiring and identifying the
target, estimate range and ensure that the target is within the weapons field of range and the kill zone is within
the weapons effective range. Use correct firing techniques and ballistic corrections to successfully suppress,
neutralize, or destroy as applicable the threat. Consideration must be given to the intervisibility of friendly and
enemy positions and trying to preclude any undesirable collateral damage or fratricide incidents. Perform any
011-237/280-2112 (UH60) 4-155

firing malfunctions emergency procedures as required for misfire, hangfire, cook off, runaway gun, ruptured
cartridge or double feeding of cartridges. Firing malfunctions and corrective actions must be committed to
memory. After target engagement, clear and safe the weapon. Ensure the safety button is in the (S) position.
After completing the mission, record any information as required on DA Form 2408-12, DA Form 2408-13 and
DA Form 2408-13-1. Refer to TC 3-04.45 for details on helicopter gunnery qualification.
MULTIHELICOPTER DOOR GUNNER EMPLOYMENT: Aircrews and door gunners in the formation must use
effective crew coordination procedures to visually acquire, identify, and engage targets. Both aircraft and passengers
are vulnerable to attack during air movement operations and throughout all phases of air assault operations.
Therefore, it is imperative that door gunners respond by delivering direct and indirect fires on these targets. The unit
must develop SOPs covering the employment of door gunners during formation flights.
NIGHT OR NVG CONSIDERATIONS: During night or NVG operations, range estimations will be more difficult,
which will require using proper scanning techniques. Correct firing techniques and ballistic corrections will be more
critical for target suppression or destruction. During firing, while wearing NVG, target loss may occur momentarily,
due to muzzle blast and the brightness of the tracers. Utilizing a laser will increase target acquisition and ballistic
corrections.

REFERENCES: Appropriate common references, DA Form 2408-13-1, TC 3-04.45, ATP 3-06, and TM 9-1095-
206-12&P.
011-237/280-2112 (UH60) 4-156

TASK 2120
Provide Patient Evacuation and Treatment
CONDITIONS: In a medical evacuation (MEDEVAC) configured helicopter, given a medical equipment set (air
ambulance), with an actual or simulated patient(s), additional equipment, and patient treatment according to the
following: Standard Medical Operating Guidelines (SMOG), local SOPs, and other medical references listed below.
STANDARDS: Appropriate common standards and the following additions/modifications
1. Critical Care Flight Paramedic/Flight Surgeon/Aeromedical Physicians Assistant/ En route Critical Care Nurse
(ECCN).
a. Perform casualty triage and treatment IAW the SMOG and other
appropriate common references listed below under References.
b. Brief litter teams and passengers on procedures for approaching, loading and leaving the aircraft.
c. Load and secure litter and ambulatory patients, equipment and baggage IAW aircraft operator’s manual,
local SOPs/unload at destination.
d. Relay essential patient information and estimated time of arrival (ETA) to the medical treatment facility (if
possible or if time permits).
2. NRCM.
a. Configure the aircraft for loading patients per aircraft operator’s manual, and local SOPs.
b. Load and secure litter and ambulatory patients, equipment and baggage per aircraft operator’s manual, and
local SOPs/unload at destination.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Patient contact.
a. Perform triage as necessary and treat injuries and illnesses per the SMOG, Tactical Combat Casualty
Care Guidelines (TCCC), Joint Trauma Systems (JTS) Clinical Practice Guidelines (CPG), and the Critical Care
Flight Paramedic Training Support Package (CCFP TSP).
b. Use all medical equipment required for appropriate patient treatment and monitoring IAW the
manufacturer’s instructions.
c. Coordinate loading procedures.
2. Movement to aircraft.
a. Direct/escort ambulatory patients to seats and ensure they have been briefed. Load and secure litter patients,
medical equipment and baggage as required per aircraft operator’s manual and local SOP. Advise the PC when
prepared for departure.
Note. If aircraft is equipped with extended range fuel system (ERFS) tanks, loading and unloading of
patients should be performed from both sides of the aircraft to better facilitate ease of loading and
unloading patients within various patient handling systems.
b. Additional patient restraint: Always try to identify the need to restrain a patient before loading. If required
for the safety of the patient and crew, “chemically restrain” the patient prior to flight. Restraining a patient in
flight is difficult and dangerous. Tell the patient gently and repeatedly why the devices are being used— that they
are for the patient’s safety and to prevent further injury—whether the patient seems able to respond or not.
Reassure the patient that someone will always be near to help and care for them. The normal reaction of a
confused patient is to resist restriction of movement. Restrain the patient according to the SMOG and local patient
treatment protocols.
Note. Physical restraints pose potential risk for injury to the patient in the form of musculoskeletal,
vascular and nerve injury by both overzealous application and the patient’s resistance to the
restraints.
011-237/280-2120 (UH60) 4-157

c. Additional Enemy Prisoner of War (EPW) restraint: Be aware of local protocols and requirements (rules
of engagement, detainee operations) when using restraints from confinement units or when EPW’s are received
from units that have field expedient restraints placed on them. Ensure they do not interfere with medical
treatment.
3. Inflight care.
a. Continue treatment and monitoring of all patients.
b. Relay patient information and ETA using correct radio procedures (if possible or if time permits).
c. Comply with instructions from medical control and advise them of any pertinent changes in patient(s).
4. Unloading aircraft.
a. Upon landing, direct/escort ambulatory patients away from the aircraft.
b. Unload litter patients as required.
c. Give appropriate documentation and patient information to the receiving medical authorities.
2. Evaluation of medical requirements must be completed by a 68W FI/SI or other qualified medical personnel
and may be conducted in the aircraft. Initial qualification of medical requirements for newly awarded (F2)
Critical Care Flight Paramedics must be done in flight.
Note. Other qualified medical personnel are defined as: Flight Surgeon, Aeromedical Physician’s Assistant, and
Medical Training NCO. Medical Training NCOs must be RL1, on additional duty orders signed by the ATP
Commander, and verified by the Medical Director or 68W SI. The additional duty orders have to state that the
Medical Training NCO can evaluate the medical treatment tasks of task 2120. Medical Training NCOs cannot
evaluate 68W FI/SIs. 68W FI/SIs and Flight Surgeon/APAs are the primary Trainer/Evaluators of Task 2120.
Note. Initial qualification of medical requirements for newly awarded (F2) Critical Care Flight Paramedics
must be done in flight, also applies to non F2 ASI holding Flight medics.
Note. Utilization of non-F2 ASI qualified Flight Medics will be conducted IAW HQDA EXORD 149-17
Note. Critical Care Flight Paramedics will either go to the Paramedic Recertification Course, use the Critical
Care Flight Paramedic Training Support Package (CCFP TSP) when published, or other approved methods to
meet TC 8-800 recertification and MOS requirements IAW Army EMS guidelines.
REFERENCES: Appropriate common references, medical equipment manufacturer’s instructions, Medical

equipment CL, ATP 4-02.2, JP 4-02, AR 40-3, TCCC, CCFP TSP, SMOG at: https://www.ako1.us.army.mil/
suite/files/42540174 , JTS Clinical Practice Guidelines (CPG) (http://jts.amedd.army.mil/index.cfm/PI_CPGs/
cpgs ), HQDA EXORD 149-17 https://www.ako1.us.army.mil/suite/doc/48283718, and STP 8-68W12-SM-
TG.
011-237/280-2120 (UH60) 4-158

TASK 2122
Operate Mission Medical Interior Cabin Systems
WARNING
Serious personal or patient injury can occur if improperly operating

or positioning the litter lift.
STANDARDS: Appropriate common standards and the following additions/modifications: Operate onboard medical systems
IAW the appropriate operator’s manual.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The medical officer (MO) determines the condition of the patient-ambulatory or litter. The MO or crew
chief (CE) (during and after loading) operates the litter lift system to facilitate the loading and unloading of
patients. The CE installs required seating for ambulatory patients.
b. The MO or CE will operate the medical control panels to raise or lower the litter pans to the height
necessary for loading. Crewmembers will know positions of all emergency stops in the aircraft.
c. The MO or CE will initiate oxygen generation by turning the oxygen generating system on. Determine
whether system has a charge. Acknowledge built-in-test (BIT) fault light (if required) and perform
appropriate emergency procedure.
d. MO determines the appropriate amount of oxygen (O2) to be delivered. MO opens desired station sets
and verifies flow rate. Place mask on patient and administer O2.
e. MO installs “T” fitting to keep material out of suction pump if pump becomes contaminated. (See the
appropriate aircraft operator’s manual.)
f. The CE or MO will select the appropriate mode of operation for the environmental control system (ECS).
2. Complete the loading of litter and ambulatory patients. Adjust litter lifts as required to facilitate loading
patients. Ensure proper en-route care is provided. Select appropriate mode (heat, air conditioning or vent) on the
ECS to maintain a comfortable cabin temperature.

REFERENCES: Appropriate common references and the medical equipment manufacturer’s instructions.
011-237/280-2122 (UH60) 4-159

TASK 2127
Perform Combat Maneuvering Flight
CONDITIONS: In an H60 helicopter in a simulated or actual tactical environment.
STANDARDS:
1. Establish entry altitude ± 100 feet.
2. Establish entry airspeed ± 10 KIAS.
3. Maintain aircraft within operating limits and flight envelope.
4. Perform crew coordination actions.
WARNING
Initial training should be conducted at sufficient altitudes to allow for

longer recovery times due to uncoordinated flight control inputs and
pilot experience. Helicopter flight performance based on the
environmental and aircraft conditions must be the determining factor
in selecting altitudes that ensure adequate room to recover after
maneuvering.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The PC will brief the crew on the combat flight maneuvers to be performed. The PC must ensure the
crew is aware of the effects of the environmental conditions on flight performance and consider the effects
of an engine failure during combat maneuvering flight.
Note. If an engine failure occurs above or below single engine airspeeds at low altitudes, power
available may not be enough to recover.
b. The P* will announce the type of maneuver to be performed and any deviation from the maneuver. The
P* will remain primarily focused outside the aircraft when performing the maneuver. The primary
reference during these maneuvers will be the visible horizon. The P* will make smooth and controlled
flight control inputs. Pitch and roll angles should be determined by referencing aircraft attitude with the
outside horizon and HUD symbology. The P* will only momentarily scan the instruments to ensure
torque, trim, airspeed, and RPM R are maintained. The P* will also announce recovery from the
maneuver.
c. The P will maintain airspace surveillance and monitor instruments to ensure torque, trim, airspeed,
RPM R, maneuver parameters, and aircraft limitations are not exceeded. The P will announce when his or
her attention is focused inside the cockpit. The P will provide adequate warning to avoid enemy,
obstacles, or traffic detected in the flight path and if any deviation is necessary to complete the maneuver.
d. The NRCM will maintain airspace surveillance, offer threat advisories, and engage threat targets as
necessary.
2. Procedures.
a. Combat flight maneuvers. Combat flight maneuvers should be employed in concert with Task 2042 in
order to mask the helicopter or evade enemy threat systems. The maneuvers described are typically
initiated at cruise airspeeds greater than 100 KIAS. During training, the maneuvers should be initiated
between the minimum and maximum single engine airspeed. Aircrews must be familiar with aerodynamic
factors such as mushing, transient torque, and blade stall before performing
011-237/280-2127 (UH60) 4-160

these maneuvers. Consider using maximum rate of climb airspeed as much as possible during these
maneuvers due to the amount of excess power available and the performance characteristics while
maneuvering. The P* will focus his or her attention outside using the horizon as the primary reference for
these maneuvers.
b. Decelerating turn. The decelerating turn is used to rapidly change the direction of the aircraft at low level
altitudes while trading airspeed energy to maintain safe operational altitude. The angle of bank, forward
airspeed, gross weight, and environmental conditions at the initiation of the maneuver will determine the
type/amount of deceleration necessary to slow the aircraft to maintain altitude.
(1) At cruise altitudes, apply aft and directional cyclic to initiate the turn.
(2) At terrain flight altitudes, consider the desired direction and magnitude of the turn before initiating
the maneuver. Angles of bank should be lower than those used during cruise flight since sufficient
recovery altitude may not be available.
(3) Adjust the flight controls as necessary to maintain the pitch attitude and altitude and to maintain the
aircraft in trim.
Note. Recovery is affected by applying opposite cyclic (roll) and forward cyclic when reaching the
desired heading and adjusting the collective to obtain the desired airspeed and altitude.
c. Break turn. The break turn is used at terrain and cruise flight altitudes to rapidly change the direction of
the helicopter while maintaining or gaining airspeed. As altitude allows, this turn also enables a
simultaneous three-axis change of position and direction. This maneuver is effective when performing
evasive maneuvers to quickly mask the helicopter against enemy threats.
(1) At cruise altitudes, apply directional cyclic to initiate the turn. As the roll rate and bank angle
increase, allow the nose to drop while maintaining the aircraft in trim to take advantage of the descent
rate while deploying to cover.
(2) At terrain flight altitudes, consider the desired direction of turn before initiating the maneuver.
Angles of bank should be lower than those used during cruise flight because sufficient recovery
altitude may not be available.
(3) Adjust cyclic as necessary to maintain the pitch attitude to prevent excessive nose-low attitude and
to maintain aircraft in trim.
Note. Recovery is affected by applying opposite cyclic (roll) when reaching the desired heading and
adjusting the collective to obtain the desired airspeed and altitude.
d. Cyclic climb to a pushover break. This maneuver is used to rapidly climb over an obstacle and increase
altitude to evade an enemy threat followed by a descent to mask the aircraft.
(1) Initiate the maneuver by smoothly applying aft cyclic and collective as necessary to begin an
ascent. As airspeed decreases (trading airspeed for altitude), maintain attitude within limits and aircraft
in trim. As aircraft reaches the appropriate altitude, apply collective as necessary to maintain RPM R
and torque within limits.
(2) Initiate the descent by applying forward cyclic while maintaining torque as necessary, and maintain
aircraft in trim.
011-237/280-2127 (UH60) 4-161

WARNING
Excessive bank angles may not be sustainable with only the

application of power. Airspeed (kinetic energy) or altitude (potential
energy) may also not be available to trade for lift. These factors must
be evaluated before and during the maneuver. Do not allow high sink
rates to develop, as recovery altitude or power may not be available
to recover. These conditions are aggravated as helicopter gross
weight and density altitude increase.
e. Dive/dive recovery. This maneuver is used at altitudes above terrain flight to rapidly mask from a threat
by placing the aircraft in a dive. This maneuver can be employed when necessary to break contact with
enemy fire while using suppressive fire. A straight ahead dive is rarely tactically feasible and the maneuver
usually incorporates a turn. The pilots must be aware of the tendency for RPM R to build in turns with high
rates of descent.
(1) To dive the aircraft as a result of potential enemy contact, apply forward cyclic to obtain the
desired dive angle. Adjust the collective as necessary to facilitate a rapid descent and maintain the
aircraft in trim.
(2) If the aircraft has been observed by enemy threat, it may be necessary to turn an angle of
approximately 30 to 45 degrees to evade while minimizing the profile of the aircraft and orienting crew
served weapons for suppressive fire.
(3) Recover at an altitude that will allow sufficient time to arrest the sink rate after collective and
cyclic have been applied to recover from the dive.
Note. During this maneuver, airspeed will increase rapidly. Ensure airspeed does not exceed velocity
never exceed (VNE) by initiating a recovery prior to the limit.
Note. If mushing occurs, apply forward cyclic to increase lift on the rotor system.

Rapid evasive maneuvers will be more hazardous due to division of attention, limited visibility, and aircraft
limitations. Be particularly aware of aircraft altitude and three-dimensional position in relation to threat, obstacles,
and terrain. Proper sequence and timing is critical in that the P* must announce intentions prior to initiating
maneuvers that might cause spatial disorientation. Select a reference point to maintain orientation on threat or
friendly troops to aid in maintaining situational awareness (SA). Reference points may be acquired by selecting a
GPS reference point or prominent terrain feature.
As airspeed increases, altitude above the obstacles should also increase. Bank angles should be commensurate with
ambient light and altitude above the terrain. High bank angles will result in an inaccurate readout from the radar
altimeter and therefore will be unreliable. Using NVG without HUD symbology display will require greater crew
workload to monitor torque, airspeed, trim, RPM R, and rates of descent.
Note. While performing combat maneuvering flight, visual contact with other aircraft in the
formation may be lost because of maneuvering or reduced visibility. If this occurs, the crewmember
should announce loss of visual contact and comply with SOP requirements.
011-237/280-2127 (UH60) 4-162

1. Training may be conducted in the simulator or aircraft.
2. Evaluations will be conducted in the aircraft.
REFERENCES: Appropriate common references, the Army Aviator’s Handbook for Maneuvering Flight and
Power Management, and the unit SOP.
011-237/280-2127 (UH60) 4-163

TASK 2169
Perform Aerial Observation

1. Use visual search techniques.
2. Identify the target.
3. Locate the position of the target.
4. Transmit tactical report.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions. The PC will complete a thorough crew and mission briefing. The P* will focus attention
primarily outside the aircraft and respond to navigation instructions or cues given by the other crewmembers.
Crewmembers will assist in clearing the aircraft and provide adequate warning of traffic or obstacles. They
also will announce when their attention is focused inside the aircraft.
2. Procedures.
a. Visual search is the systematic visual coverage of a given area so that all parts of the area are observed.
The purpose of visual search is to detect objects or activities on the ground.
b. During missions involving direct observation, the aircrew is concerned with detection, identification,
location, and reporting.
c. Detection. Detection requires determining that an object or an activity exists.
d. Identification. Major factors in identifying a target are size, shape, and type of armament. Targets are
classified as friendly or enemy.
e. Location. The exact location of targets is the objective of the mission. Depending on the nature of the
targets, the observer may be required to locate the center of mass.
f. Reporting. Spot reports provide commanders with critical information while conducting missions. The
method of spot reporting is specified by the requesting agency. Reports of no enemy sightings are frequently
just as important as actual enemy sightings.
g. The ability of an observer to search a given area effectively depends on several factors. In addition to the
limitations of the human eye itself, the most important of these factors are altitude, airspeed, terrain and
meteorological conditions, and visual cues.
h. Altitude. Higher altitudes offer greater visibility with less detail. Lower altitudes are usually used because
they increase survivability.
i. Airspeed. Selection of the airspeed is determined by the altitude, terrain, enemy situation, and
meteorological conditions.
j. Terrain and meteorological conditions. The type of terrain can vary from dense jungle to barren wasteland
and will affect the size and details of the area that can be effectively covered. The prevailing terrain and
meteorological conditions often mask objects and allow only a brief exposure period, especially at NOE
altitudes.
k. Visual cues. In areas where natural cover and concealment make detection difficult, visual cues may
indicate enemy activity. Some of these cues are as follows:
l. Color. Foliage used to camouflage will differ from the color of natural foliage.
m. Texture. Smooth surfaces, such as glass windows or canopies, will shine and reflect light. Rough
surfaces do not reflect light.
n. Shapes and shadows. Manmade objects cast distinctive shadows that are characterized by regular shapes
and contours as opposed to random patterns that occur naturally.
011-237/280-2169 (UH60) 4-164

o. Trails. Trails leading into an area should be observed for cues as to type, quantity, and recentness of traffic.
p. Smoke and dust. Smoke should be observed for color, smell, and volume. Dust from moving vehicles can
be observed at great distances.
q. Movement and light. Movements during daylight and light at night are the most easily detectable signs of
enemy activity. Movement may include disturbance of foliage, snow, soil, or birds.
r. Obvious sightings. The enemy is skillful in the art of camouflage. The aircrew must be aware that obvious
sightings may be intentional because of high concentrations of antiaircraft weapons.
s. Systematic methods for conducting visual aerial observation include the motive and stationary techniques.
The technique used depends on the altitude flown and the terrain encountered.
t. Motive technique. This technique is used when the aircraft is operating at terrain flight altitudes and
generally at airspeeds of 10 KIAS or faster. In using the motive technique, the observer looks forward of the
aircraft and through the center of the acquisition sector for obvious sightings. The observer then scans
through the acquisition sector, gradually working back toward the aircraft. The entire area on either side of
the aircraft is divided into two major sectors: the nonobservation sector and the observation work sector.
u. The nonobservation sector is the area where the aircrew's field of vision is restricted by the physical
configuration of the aircraft.
v. The observation work sector is that portion of the field of vision to which search activity is confined. The
observation work sector is subdivided into two smaller sectors: the acquisition sector and the recognition
sector.
• The acquisition sector is the forward 90-degree area of the observation work sector. This is the
primary search area and is at the approximate 10 to 2 clock position and has no overlap in the
center of the aircraft.
• The recognition sector is the remainder of the observation work sector.
w. Stationary technique. This technique is used at NOE altitudes with the aircraft hovering in a concealed
position. When using the stationary technique, the crew makes a quick overall search for sightings, unnatural
colors, outlines, or movements. The P* starts scanning from the 12 o'clock position through 90 degrees on his
or her side of the aircraft, searching an area approximately 50 meters in depth. This scan continues outward
from the aircraft, increasing the depth of the search area by overlapping 50-meter intervals until the entire
search area has been covered. The P will duplicate the same technique on his or her side of the aircraft. The
crew chief CE and other crewmembers, if assigned, will perform as directed by the PC.

2. Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft, simulator, or academically.
REFERENCES: Appropriate common references and ATP 3-20.96.
011-237/280-2169 (UH60) 4-165

UNCLASSIFIED//FOUO
TASK 2900
Perform Counter Threat Maneuvers (Single-Aircraft)
CONDITIONS: Given a threat contact in a tactical environment with applicable ASE installed and
a mission briefing complete.

1. Identify the threat.
2. Execute the appropriate counter threat maneuver (RCM [P*]).
3. Provide suppressive fire IAW threat and briefed weapon control measures.
4. Assess damage to the aircraft (when tactically suitable).
5. Transmit tactical report (when tactically suitable).
WARNING
During combat maneuvering flight, the greatest threats to the aircraft are controlled flight into the
terrain (CFIT), other aircraft, and/or hazards to terrain flight. Crew coordination is as important to
survival as the correct counter-tactic maneuver.
DESCRIPTION:
1. The 2900 series tasks are designed to provide approved standardized Army aviation classified TTP’s.
Approved TTP’s IAW ATP 3-04.2 are located at the USAACE SIPR site listed in the reference section
of this task.
2. Crew Actions. When engaged or detected by an enemy threat, the crew member identifying the threat
(e.g. visual observation, radar detection, or hostile fire) will announce the nature and the direction of the
threat.
a. The P* will remain focused outside during the maneuver. Announce actions and the direction of
flight to evade detection or potential engagement.
b. The P will monitor the cockpit indicators and provide the P* with aircraft altitude, airspeed, and
ASE indications. The P will also provide adequate warnings to avoid obstacles and will transmit a
tactical report when practical.
c. The NRCM will remain focused outside the aircraft to provide obstacle avoidance and other
threat warnings. The NRCM will also provide suppressive fire as required IAW METT-TC, ROE
and briefed weapons control measures and maintain visual contact with the threat if able.
PROCEDURES: Successfully maneuver the aircraft out of the weapons engagement zone (WEZ), using
the techniques described in the classified tasks. The crew must determine a course of action that supports
the mission intent and the unit commander’s directives. It is critical to establish priorities and actions
expected during contact in order to avoid CFIT and mid-air collisions. These priorities must be established
prior to mission execution and will be included in the pre-mission briefings.
011-ACC-2900 (UH60) 4-166

UNCLASSIFIED//FOUO
UNCLASSIFIED//FOUO
Note. The 2900 series tasks for countering threats are continually under review and revision. It is essential
for pilots to continuously check the USAACE SIPR site for updates and information.
Note. If a conflict exists within this publication and the tasks located on the USAACE SIPR sites, the
SIPR sites take precedence as the threat and testing is consistently under review.

1. Training will be conducted academically, in the simulator or the aircraft.
2. Evaluations will be conducted academically and in the aircraft or simulator.
REFERENCES: Appropriate common references, ATP 3-04.2 Aviation Combat Tactics and
Survivability (DRAFT), USAACE SIPR: https://intelshare.intelink.sgov.gov/sites/army-ams/, and
USAACE NIPR: https://intelshare.intelink.gove/sites/army-ams/
011-ACC-2900 (AH64) 4-167

UNCLASSIFIED//FOUO
TASK 3010
Perform Multi-Aircraft Operations
CONDITIONS: In a H-60 Helicopter.

1. RCM.
a. Participate in a formation flight briefing in accordance with unit SOP.
b. Maneuver into the flight formation.
c. Change position in the flight formation when required.
d. Maintain proper horizontal and vertical separation for the type of formation flight being conducted.
e. Announce if visual contact is lost with other aircraft.
f. Perform techniques of movement, if required.
2. NRCM.
a. Assume a position in the helicopter, as briefed, to observe other aircraft in the formation.
b. Announce if visual contact is lost with other aircraft.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The P* will focus primarily outside the aircraft. they will maintain the briefed position in the
formation and announce any maneuver or formation change before execution. If visual contact is lost
with other aircraft, the crew will immediately make a radio call to the flight and begin reorientation
procedures.
Note. The most important consideration when a crewmember has lost visual contact with the
formation is to announce loss of visual contact to the other members of the crew and the rest of the
flight and reorient. Except for enemy contact, all mission requirements are subordinate to this action.
b. The P and NRCM will provide adequate warning of traffic or obstacles detected in the flight path or
identified on the map. They will inform the P* if visual contact is lost with other aircraft or if an enemy is
sighted. The NCMs will position themselves in the aircraft to observe other aircraft in the formation and
assist in maintaining aircraft separation and obstacle clearance.
2. Procedures.
a. Perform formation flight in accordance with the unit SOPs and the common references in this ATM.
b. If the tactical situation requires, perform techniques of movement per TC 3-04.4. Maneuver into the
briefed flight formation. Maintain horizontal and vertical separation for the type of formation being flown.
c. The following procedures will be performed if visual contact is lost unless otherwise established in unit
SOPs:
(1) Takeoff: Immediately make a radio call to the formation. The P* will adjust to an altitude that will
afford visual acquisition, above or below the briefed cruise altitude, and attempt reorientation with the
formation.
(2) Cruise: Immediately make a radio call to the formation. Lead will announce heading, altitude and
airspeed. The formation should avoid any abrupt or drastic changes in the flight path until all aircraft
have rejoined the flight. The aircraft that has lost visual contact with the flight will immediately
assume the flight’s heading and airspeed and maintain horizontal separation as briefed. If enemy and
terrain allow, the aircraft that has lost visual contact will also maintain vertical separation by adjusting
to an altitude other than the briefed en route altitude which will afford visual acquisition of the flight.
Unit SOPs must state the procedures for reestablishing contact with the flight. Considerations should
011-237/280-3010 (UH60) 4-168

include but are not limited to rallying to a known point, use of covert/overt lighting, and ground rally.
Mission, enemy, terrain and weather, troops and support available, time available, civil considerations
(METT-TC), power available, and ambient light will influence how contact is reestablished. Situations
may occur when an aircraft rejoins the flight in a position other than briefed. Only after the entire flight
is formed can the mission commander proceed with the mission unless a contingency has been briefed.
(3) Approach: Immediately make a radio call to the formation and execute a go around unless an
alternate course of action has been briefed.
d. All multi-aircraft operations will be briefed using a unit approved multi-aircraft/mission briefing
CL. Mandatory briefing items that must be included in all multi-aircraft briefings are—
Formation types.
Altitude(s).
Airspeed(s).
Aircraft lighting.
Lead change procedures.
Lost communication procedures.
Loss of visual contact procedures.
Actions on contact.
IIMC procedures.
Downed aircraft/personnel recovery procedures.
NIGHT OR NVG CONSIDERATIONS:

1. Closure rates are more difficult to determine. Consideration should be given to keeping formation changes to
a minimum. All crewmembers must avoid fixation by using proper scanning techniques. Consider the use of
aircraft external lighting to aid in the visual acquisition of other aircraft during loss of visual contact.
2. Night. During unaided night flight, the crew should use formation and position lights to aid in maintaining
the aircraft's position in the formation.
3. NVG. When conducting NVG formation flight, the crew should use the infrared (IR) formation lights to
maintain the aircraft's position in the formation.
Note. Additional crewmember requirements are in TC 3-04.11, chapter 6.

011-237/280-3010 (UH60) 4-169

MODULE 5
UH-60 Maintenance Pilot Tasks

UH-60 Maintenance Pilot Tasks
If a conflict exists between this section and the TC 3-04.11, the TC 3-04.11 takes precedence.
Tasks described here are to be performed by qualified H-60 maintenance test pilots in accordance with
AR 95-1. This section also contains tasks and procedures to be used by contractor maintenance test pilots
in accordance with AR 95-20. If discrepancies are found between this chapter and appropriate TMs and
MTF, the appropriate TMs and MTF takes precedence. In addition to required minimum annual tasks and
iterations, MPs and MEs will perform a minimum of four iterations of maintenance test flight (MTF)
tasks listed in the MTL annually. MEs will perform a minimum of two of the four iterations mentioned
above from each flight crew station with access to the flight controls.
Note. Task 4001 requires only one iteration annually.

TASK CONTENTS.
a. Task title. This identifies a clearly defined and measurable activity. Task titles may be the same in many
ATMs, but task content will vary with the airframe.
b. Conditions. The conditions specify the common wartime or training/evaluation conditions under which the
maintenance test pilot (MP) tasks will be performed.
c. Standards. The standards describe the minimum degree of proficiency or standard of performance to
which the task must be accomplished. Standards are based on ideal conditions to which the task must be
accomplished. The common standards apply to all tasks listed in this section unless specifically stated
otherwise. The following common standards apply to all MP tasks.
(1) Perform procedures and checks per applicable MTF manual.
(2) Brief the RCM/NRCM on the procedures, applicable warnings, and cautions for the task to be
performed.
(3) Perform crew coordination actions.
(4) Assess and address any malfunctions or discrepancies as they occur and apply appropriate
corrective actions or troubleshooting procedures.
(5) Use the oral call out and confirmation method and announce the initiation and completion of each
check.
(6) The MP must occupy the left seat for the following tasks: 4200, 4202, 4220, 4228, and 4236. The
MP may perform other maintenance tasks from either seat. This restriction does not apply to initial ME
training/evaluations.
(7) The MP/ME will guard the collective anytime the engine power control levers are manipulated.
(8) Tasks 4200, 4202, 4220, 4228, 4236, and 4254 require additional information for the crew. The
MP will ensure the crew is familiar with the following:
 Maneuver (RCM/NRCM responsibilities).
 Abort criteria.
 Limitations.
 Emergency procedures.
011-237 (UH60) 5-1

d. Description. The description explains how the elements of the task should be done to meet the standards.
When specific crew actions are required, the task will be broken down into crew actions and procedures as
follows:
(1) Crew actions. Define portions of a task to be performed by each crewmember to ensure safe,
efficient, and effective task execution. When required, MP responsibilities are specified. All tasks in this
chapter are only to be performed by qualified MPs/MEs, or student maintenance test pilots undergoing
qualification training as outlined in AR 95-1. The MP is the PC in all situations, except when being trained or
evaluated by an ME. For all tasks, MP actions and responsibilities are applicable to MEs. When two MEs are
conducting training/evaluation together, or two MPs are jointly performing test flight tasks, the mission brief
will designate the aviator assuming PC responsibilities. MEs may perform MP/ME evaluations from the cabin
provided an aviator with access to the flight controls is briefed as the PC.
(2) Procedures. This section describes the actions that the MP/ME performs or directs the
RCM/NRCM to perform in order to execute the task to standard.
e. Considerations. This section defines training, evaluation, and other considerations for task
accomplishment under various conditions.
(1) NVG Considerations – General.
● Crew selection and aircrew coordination are essential to successful and safe NVG MTFs.
● Tasks may require extra time, altitude, and analysis at night.
● Use of supplemental lighting will aid in identifying switches/position, control positions, and
engine power control levers.
● Use additional crew member to record data as required.
● Use proper scanning techniques to minimize the probability of spatial disorientation.
(2) NVG Considerations – Hover Checks.
● Select an area with good visual references and room to maneuver during checks.
● Use landing and search lights as required.
(3) NVG Considerations – In-Flight Checks.
● Due to the airspeeds involved while performing several of these checks, select an altitude
appropriate for the task.
● Utilize airfields and improved landing environments when available.
f. Training and evaluation requirements. Some of the tasks incorporate more than one check from the
applicable aircraft MTF manual. For initial MP and RL progressions, all 4000-series tasks listed in the
master task list (MTL) will be evaluated. For annual proficiency and readiness test (APART), the minimum
evaluated tasks will be 4001, 4200, 4202, 4220, 4228, 4236, and 4254. Other tasks/checks may be evaluated
at the discretion of the ME. Tasks that involve dual systems (such as stability augmentation system [SAS] or
engines) require that only one system be evaluated. Training and evaluation requirements define whether
the task will be trained or evaluated in the aircraft, simulator, or academic environment. If one or more tasks/
checks are not performed to standard, the evaluation will be graded unsatisfactory. However, when
reevaluated, only those unsatisfactory checks will be reevaluated. Evaluations may be conducted in aircraft that
are MTF status at the discretion of the ME.
g. References. The references are sources of information relating to that particular task. In addition to the
common references, the following references apply to all MP tasks:
(1) TM 1-1520-237-MTF.
(2) TM 1-1520-253-MTF.
(3) TM 1-1520-280-MTF.
(4) Aircraft historical records.
(5) TM 1-1500-328-23.
(6) DA PAM 738-751.
(7) Applicable –23 series manuals.
(8) TM 1-6625-724-13&P.
(9) Applicable airworthiness directives or messages.
011-237 (UH60) 5-2

TASK 4000
Perform Prior-to-Maintenance Test Flight Checks

1. Perform the preflight inspection according to the appropriate aircraft MTF manual/CL.
2. Determine the suitability of the aircraft for flight and the mission to be performed.
3. Determine the maneuvers, checks, and tasks required during the test flight.
4. Ensure logbook entries are made according to DA PAM 738-751.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The maintenance test pilot (MP) should direct assistance from the RCM and NRCM as necessary.
b. The RCM/NRCM should assist the MP as directed.
2. Procedures.
a. Review the aircraft forms and records to determine the necessary checks and tasks to be performed. Use
additional publications and references as necessary.
b. Ensure a thorough preflight inspection is conducted with special emphasis on areas or systems where
maintenance was performed.
c. Verify all test equipment is installed and secured as required.
d. The MP will conduct the final walk-around
e. Conduct a thorough crew briefing.

REFERENCES: Appropriate common references, AR 95-1, TM 1-1520-237-MTF, TM 1-1520-253-MTF,

TM 1-1520-280-MTF, DA PAM 738-751 and unit SOP.
011-237/280-4000 (UH60) 5-3

TASK 4001
Respond to Critical Situations During Test Flight Maneuvers
CONDITIONS: In an H-60 helicopter, given a specific emergency condition or the indications of a specific
malfunction, and given a suitable landing area.
WARNING
If the simulated situation requires manipulation of the power control
levers, the first step will always be to get out of the maneuver by
placing the power control levers to fly.
Note. This task may only be performed during the conduct of ATM Tasks 4200, 4202, 4220, 4228,
4236, and 4254.
Note. The intent of this task is to allow the ME to assess the MTP's response to an emergency/critical
situation during the conduct of test flight maneuvers. It should be used as a tool in grading the MTP's
reaction to an emergency/critical situation which has been properly briefed IAW Module 5 of this
ATM. At no time will this task be confused with Task 1070 - Response to Emergencies.
STANDARDS: Appropriate common standards and the following additions and/or modifications:
1. Prior to conducting the specified maneuver, ensure that emergency actions are briefed utilizing the M.A.L.E.
format outlined in of this ATM.
2. Identify and announce the critical situation/malfunction.
3. Respond to emergency/malfunction as briefed ensuring compliance with M.A.L.E. format brief and the
appropriate immediate action procedures outlined in the aircraft operator’s manual/CL.
DESCRIPTION:
1. When conducted in a flight simulator.
a. The ME will induce an emergency/critical situation in order to evaluate the MTP’s response.
b. The MTP will respond to the emergency/malfunction as briefed.
2. When conducted in the Aircraft.
a. The ME will verbally induce a emergency/ critical situation in order to evaluate the MTP’s response.
b. When conducting the maneuver in the aircraft, the ME will verbally induce an emergency/critical
situation, associated with the check or the flight profile, in order to evaluate the MTP’s response.
c. In either situation, the MTP will respond to emergency/malfunction as briefed.
011-237/280-4001 (UH60) 5-4

1. Training may be conducted academically, in the aircraft, or in a flight simulator.
2. Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft or in a flight simulator.
REFERENCES: Appropriate common references, AR 95-1, TM 1-1520-237-MTF, TM 1-1520-280-MTF, DA
PAM 738-751,TM 1-1520-253-MTF and unit SOP.
011-237/280-4001 (UH60) 5-5

TASK 4081
Perform Before-Starting-Engine Checks
STANDARDS: Appropriate common standards.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
b. The RCM/NRCM should assist the MP as directed.
2. Procedures. Perform the checks according to the applicable maintenance test flight (MTF) manual, with the
following additional information.
a. Central display unit/pilot display unit (CDU/PDU) check.
Note. For H-60A/L check that range markings on the CDU and PDUs match aircraft type.
b. Cyclic forward stop check.
Note. To determine collective “mid position,” center the pedals and hold slight forward pressure
against the cyclic (full forward and centered laterally). Adjust the collective until the cyclic position
moves closest to the instrument panel. If during the attempt to determine the mid position point of the
collective, the cyclic appears to remain relatively stationary, troubleshoot for improper aircraft
rigging.
c. Stability augmentation system (SAS) engagement/disengagement check.
Note. Position a main rotor blade at 12 o’clock position to allow the ability to visual monitor the 3 or
9 o’clock blade. Have additional outside personnel monitor the tail rotor.
d. Trim system checks.
Note. Maintain collective at mid position for the duration of these checks.
(1) Cyclic force gradient check. Center the cyclic. Perform the check according to the applicable MTF
manual with the following additional information: Without releasing trim, sequentially displace and
then release the cyclic forward, aft, left, and right (approximately 2 inches) to verify that a force
gradient exists. The trim should remain engaged and no caution or failure advisory lights should
appear. Repeat in all four quadrants.
(2) Yaw pedal force gradient check. Perform the check according to the applicable MTF manual with
the following additional information:
(a) Pedals centered, without disengaging trim, attempt to displace each pedal and confirm that a
force gradient exists.
(b) Depress the left pedal trim switch only and displace the pedal. Release the trim switch.
Confirm that trim maintains the new reference position by attempting to displace the pedal without
releasing trim. Continue checking by re-referencing pedals through full range of travel. Repeat for
the right pedal.
e. Stabilator check.
011-237/280-4081 (UH60) 5-6

Note. Keep the stabilator area clear throughout the checks. Verbally confirm stabilator positions
throughout the check. Have crew acknowledge each reception of a stabilator audio tone.
f. Fuel boost pumps check.
Note. Confirm both ENG FUEL SYS selectors are in DIR. Verify the #1 and #2 FUEL PRESS
cautions appears. If one or both of the fuel pressure caution(s) do not appear; place the appropriate
power control lever to the LOCKOUT position until the appropriate FUEL PRESS caution appears
prior to check.

PAM 738-751,TM 1-1520-253-MTF and unit SOP.
011-237/280-4081 (UH60) 5-7

TASK 4088
Perform Starting Engine Checks
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The maintenance test pilot (MP) will direct assistance from the RCM and NRCM, and any ground
support personnel as required.
b. The RCM, NRCM, and any ground support personnel will assist the MP as directed.
2. Procedures. Perform these checks according to the applicable maintenance test flight (MTF) manual with the
following additional information:
a. Brief the RCM, NRCM, and any additional ground support personnel as follows:
● 45-second emergency engine shutdown criteria.
● Monitor the flight controls.
● Monitor the master warning FIRE light.
● Noting the engine gas generator speed (Ng) SPEED at the time the ENG OUT light extinguishes.
b. Prior to checks, confirm the following:
● Tail wheel is locked.
● The parking brake set.
● Other cockpit crewmember has the controls.
● The rotor disk area is clear.
● Personnel are clear of the main landing gear.


PAM 738-751, TM 1-1520-253-MTF and unit SOP.
011-237/280-4088 (UH60) 5-8

TASK 4090
Perform Engine Run-Up And Systems Checks
CONDITION: In an H-60 helicopter
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The maintenance test pilot (MP) will direct assistance from the RCM and NRCM as necessary.
b. The RCM, NRCM, and any ground support personnel will assist the MP as directed.
2. Procedures. Perform the following checks according to the applicable maintenance test flight (MTF) manual.
Prior to initiation of each procedure, confirm the following:
 Tail wheel is locked.
 The parking brake is set.
 Other cockpit crewmember has the controls.
 The rotor disk area is clear.
 Personnel are clear of the main landing gear.


011-237/280-4090 (UH60) 5-9

TASK 4113
Perform Integrated Vehicle Health Monitoring System Operations
CONDITION: In an H-60 helicopter or compatible flight simulator with IVHMS installed.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The maintenance test pilot (MP) will direct assistance from the RCM and NRCM as required.
b. The RCM /NRCM will assist the MP as directed.

2. Procedures. Configure IVHMS to perform:
a. A/L
1. Power Assurance
2. Vibration
3. Vibe Diagnostics
4. Active Exceedances
5. Exceedances History
6. Administration
b. M
1. Power Checks
2. Exceedances
3. Rotor Track and Balance
4. Mechanical Diagnostics
5. Shaft Balance
6. IVHMS Administration


011-237/280-4113 (UH60) 5-10

TASK 4156
Perform Hover Checks
STANDARDS: Appropriate common standards and maintain torque variance: +10 percent, -0 percent on
heading/yaw check(s).
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
b. The RCM and NRCM will assist the MP as directed.

2. Procedures. Perform the checks according to the applicable maintenance test flight (MTF) manual.
Note. The hover height may be increased due to terrain or obstacles.


011-237/280-4156 (UH60) 5-11

TASK 4193
Perform In-Flight Checks
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The maintenance test pilot (MP) will direct assistance from the RCM and NRCM as necessary.
b. The RCM and NRCM should assist the MP as directed.

2. Procedures. Perform the checks according to the applicable maintenance test flight (MTF) manual.


011-237/280-4193 (UH60) 5-12

TASK 4200
Perform Backup Tail Rotor Servo Check
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The maintenance test pilot (MP) will direct assistance from the RCM and NRCM as required.
b. The RCM/NRCM will assist the MP as directed.

2. Procedures.
a. Perform the check according to the applicable maintenance test flight (MTF) manual, turning left first.
b. Direct the P to brace using the overhead hand hold hand and to identify and hold the TAIL SERVO
switch with his or her other hand. Brief the P on the terms "backup," "normal," and "power control levers,"
and the actions to perform. Ensure the P does not remove his or her hand from the TAIL SERVO switch
unless "power control levers" or "check complete" is announced. Direct the NRCM to remain secured and
to assist in clearing the aircraft and maintaining obstacle avoidance.
Note. If the aircraft begins an uncommanded turn or the pedals bind during the backup servo check,
direct the P to place the tail rotor control switch to “normal.” If tail servo control is not regained,
announce “power control levers," perform a hovering autorotation, and do not attempt to fly the
aircraft until the deficiency is corrected.


011-237/280-4200 (UH60) 5-13

TASK 4202
Perform Generator Underfrequency Protection Disable - Low Rotor Revolutions Per Minute Check
STANDARDS: Appropriate common standards and do not allow rotor (RPM R) to decrease below 85 percent.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The maintenance test pilot (MP) will perform P duties during this check. The MP should direct
assistance from the RCM and NRCM as required.
b. The RCM/NRCM will assist the MP as directed.

2. Procedures.
a. Perform the check according to the applicable maintenance test flight (MTF) manual.
b. Brief the P* and NRCM on the following:
(1) Maintain a 10-foot hover height.
(2) Control response during low rotor operation.
(3) Low rotor RPM audio.
(4) Landing in the event that underfrequency protection is not disabled.

NIGHT OR NVG CONSIDERATIONS: The APU should be on to prevent a blackout condition should the
main generators go offline.

011-237/280-4202 (UH60) 5-14

TASK 4204
Perform Compasses, Turn Rate, and Vertical Gyros - Automatic Heading Reference System Checks
(A/L)
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The maintenance test pilot (MP) should direct assistance from the RCM and NRCM as required.

2. Procedures. Perform the check according to the maintenance test flight (MTF) manual with the following
additional information:
a. Brief the RCM on the conduct of the maneuver. Direct the RCM to assist with gyro mode selection
switch functions and to confirm instrument indications as necessary. Direct the NRCM to remain secured,
assist with clearing the aircraft, and maintain obstacle avoidance.
b. Note and compare the standby magnetic compass heading with HSI heading indications at both the pilot
and copilot stations.
c. Direct the RCM to set MODE SEL TURN RATE and VERT GYRO switches at the pilot’s station to
ALTR and note that the legend lights indicate appropriately. Perform pedal turn to the left of the initial
heading until both turn rate indicators indicate full deflection. Stop turn and stabilize hover at the new
heading. Note and compare headings again. Repeat to the right. Check the HSI compass cards and the
standby magnetic compass for smooth operation and heading comparison. Confirm both turn rate indicators
indicate full deflection during turns in either direction. Smoothly displace the cyclic to induce 5 degree in
pitch, and 10 degree in roll indications. Confirm both VSIs indicate appropriately. Direct RCM to switch
TURN RATE and VERT GYRO switches to NORM on the pilot’s MODE SEL panel and note the legend
lights indicate appropriately.
d. Have the RCM guard the collective control. The MP will set copilot station MODE SEL TURN RATE
and VERT GYRO switches to ALTR and note that the legend lights indicate appropriately.
e. Perform brief pedal turns to the left and right of the initial heading and confirm both turn rate indicators
indicate full deflection during turns in either direction. Smoothly displace the cyclic to induce 5 degree in
pitch and 10 degree in roll indications. Confirm both VSIs indicate appropriately. Have P guard the
collective control. Reset copilot’s station switches to NORM.


011-237-4204 (UH60) 5-15

TASK 4220
Perform Maximum Power Check/TGT Limiter Check
STANDARDS: Appropriate common standards and these additions/modifications:

1. Accurately determine ETF and ATF values.
2. Confirm all bleed air is turned OFF prior to start of the task.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The maintenance test pilot (MP) should direct assistance from the RCM and NRCM as required.
c. After the flight, check, complete, and verify data values utilizing applicable charts.
2. Procedures.
a. IVHMS will be used if installed and operational.
b. If IVHMS is not operational, perform the check IAW the applicable maintenance test flight (MTF) manual.
c. Once the flight check is complete the MP will ensure the data values are accurately derived in order to complete
the entire procedure.


011-237/280-4220 (UH60) 5-16

TASK 4228
Perform Vibration Absorber Check and Tuning (A/L)
CONDITIONS: In an H-60A/L helicopter, aviation vibration analyzer (AVA) installed (if required by
maintenance).
STANDARDS: Appropriate common standards and confirm all bleed air OFF prior to start of check.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.

2. Procedures. Perform the check according to the maintenance test flight (MTF) manual.

Note. An MP who flies both the H-60A/L and H-60M may complete the annual maintenance test flight
evaluation in an H-60M and not have to complete ATM Task 4228 Perform Absorber vibration Check
and Tuning in an H-60A/L. Evaluation of the procedure will be conducted in accordance with the
H-60A/L Maintenance Test Flight Manual with respect to the different cockpit configurations. This will
allow for an H-60M MP/ME to complete the evaluation in one aircraft.
REFERENCES: Appropriate common references, AR 95-1, TM 1-1520-237-MTF, DA PAM 738-751,

TM 1-1520-253-MTF and unit SOP.
011-237-4228 (UH60A/L) 5-17

TASK 4236
Perform Autorotation Revolutions Per Minute Check
STANDARDS: Appropriate common standards and the following additions:

1. Ensure autorotation descent at 80 KIAS ±5 on the pilot’s side, in trim, with collective full down.
2. Calculate target RPM R and necessary adjustment.
3. Confirm all bleed air is off prior to start of check.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
2. Procedures. Select method based on target RPM R, maintenance performed, weather, and crew IAW MTF manual.
a. (Option 1) Collective - Slowly reduce to full down, maintaining 80 KIAS with helicopter in trim. When
passing thru, check altitude and record percent RPM R and fuel quantity. Make a power recovery.
Using Autorotation RPM Correction Chart Check that RPM is within 3%.
b. (Option 2) INCR/DECR Switch decrease RPM 1&2 to 96 percent. Slowly reduce to full down,
maintaining 80 KIAS with helicopter in trim. When passing through check altitude, record percent RPM
R and fuel quantity. After ensuring the rotor system has fully decoupled, the MP will increase percentage
RPM 1&2 to 100 percent using the INCR/DECR switch prior to power recovery. Make a power
recovery. Using Autorotation RPM Correction Chart Check that RPM is within 3%.
c. (Option 3) #2 ENGINE POWER CONT lever – IDLE and stabilize. Then set just forward of the IDLE
detent. Collective - Slowly reduce to full down, maintaining 80 KIAS with helicopter in trim. #1 ENG
POWER CONT lever – Retard to IDLE, then set just forward of IDLE detent. When passing thru, check
altitude and record percent RPM R and fuel quantity. Advance both ENG POWER CONT levers to fly.
Make a power recovery. Using Autorotation RPM Correction Chart Check that RPM is within 3%.
NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE CONSIDERATIONS: The optional procedures are preferred to
minimize engine power control lever(s) movements during flight.

011-237/280-4236 (UH60) 5-18

TASK 4254
Perform Vh Check
STANDARDS: Appropriate common standards and these additions/modifications:

1. M Airspeed and altitude on FD/DCP will be uncoupled for duration of check.
2. Confirm all bleed air OFF prior to start of check.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.


011-237/280-4254 (UH60) 5-19

TASK 4284
Perform Engine Shutdown Checks
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.



011-237-4284 (UH60) 5-20

TASK 4288
Perform Gust Lock - Rotor Brake Operations
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew actions.
a. The maintenance test pilot (MP) should direct assistance from the RCM and NRCM, and any
ground support personnel as necessary.
2. Procedures.
a. For aircraft equipped with rotor brake M or gust lock A/L, perform according to the applicable
maintenance test flight (MTF) manual. Brief NRCM/support personnel on the following:
• Movement around aircraft.
• Fire guard procedures.
• Rotor brake or Gust lock failure.
• ICS failure.
Note. Confirm the location of any crewmembers or support personnel not visible from the cockpit
before engine start.

REFERENCES: Appropriate common references, AR 95-1, TM 1-1520-253-MTF, TM 1-1520-237-MTF, TM

1-1520-280-MTF, DA PAM 738-751 and unit SOP.
011-237/280-4288 (UH60) 5-21

MODULE 6
Instructor Tasks
Scenario Based Training
Army Aviation must train to fight in operational environments that encompass a wide range of enemy
types and combinations employing traditional, unconventional, and hybrid tactics. Creative use of
scenario based training allows commanders to challenge their leaders to improvise with the resources at
hand, and accomplish assigned missions under complicated conditions. Once task proficiency is
achieved under base conditions, leaders can alter scenarios to replicate projected operating environments
and can enhance unit skills by offering conditions that require leaders to adapt to degraded capabilities
(e.g. position/navigation/timing denial, or degraded/denied communications).
TASK 5000
Operate a Flight Simulator
CONDITIONS: When required to operate a flight simulator in support of the commanders ATP and
given the flight simulator operators manual.
1. Brief crewmember on simulator safety procedures IAW unit SOP.

2. Start the simulator IAW simulator operators’ manual/unit SOP.
3. Set conditions for training to be conducted IAW simulator operators manual.
4. Reset simulator conditions IAW simulator operators manual.
5. Make entries in simulator log book IAW simulator SOP if applicable.
DESCRIPTION: Instructor-Operator should consider developing realistic training scenarios to enhance

individual flight tasks based on the unit’s METL.
1. Training. Training will be conducted academically and in the simulator.

2. Evaluation. Evaluation will be conducted in the simulator.
011-ACC-5000 (UH60) 6-1

TASK 5100
Instruct Academic Subjects
CONDITIONS: When required to conduct aviation academic training based on unit mission and the
commander’s aircrew training program (ATP), given the ACAT and/or applicable SOP’s with an
appropriate learning environment.
STANDARD: Appropriate common standards and the following additions/modifications:
1. Determine the training objective.

2. Select level of learning based on audience needs and training objective.
3. Develop training plan according to training objective established.
4. Select method of instruction.
5. Complete introduction.
6. Instruct topic(s) according to selected method of instruction and lesson plan.
7. Summarize main teaching points.
8. Conduct check on learning.
9. Conduct AAR.
10. Record crewmembers training completion as necessary.
DESCRIPTION: The instructor should first determine the objective of the instruction (The objective is
what the target audience should be able to do after the instruction). Considerations before instruction
would be to research material IAW training objective, acquire training materials, schedule/prepare the
training site if applicable, select method of instruction, and rehearse presentation.
1. Training. Training will be conducted academically.

2. Evaluation. Evaluation will be conducted academically.
REFERENCES: Appropriate common references and FAA-H-8083-9 (Aviation Instructor’s Handbook).
011-ACC-5100 (UH60) 6-2

TASK 5105
Evaluate Aircrew Academic Knowledge
CONDITIONS: When required to evaluate a crewmember’s academic knowledge based on the

commander’s aircrew training program and unit mission given a TC 3-04.11, unit aviation training SOP,
aircrew member training records, the ACAT, and an appropriate evaluation environment.
1. Inform crewmember of evaluation scenario.

2. Administer oral or written evaluation.
3. Determine final GO/NO-GO status for all evaluation requirements.
4. Debrief the crewmember’s performance
Note: As a general rule, academic evaluations should not last longer than 2 hours. Focusing on scenario
based oral questions will increase the efficiency of the evaluation.
DESCRIPTION: Instructors should refer to the evaluation procedure IAW TC 3-04.11 and FAA-H-8083-9
(Aviation Instructor’s Handbook) for appropriate methods of completing this task.
1. Training: Training will be conducted in the aircraft, simulator or academically.

2. Evaluation: Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft, simulator, or academically.
REFERENCES: Appropriate common references, and FAA-H-8083-9 (Aviation Instructor’s Handbook).
011-ACC-5105 (UH60) 6-3

TASK 5200
Instruct Aircrew Member Tasks
CONDITIONS: When required to conduct aircrew task training (performance or technical) based on unit
mission and the commander’s aircrew training program (ATP) given individual training records, the
aircrew master task list, individual tasks for training, required information, equipment for selected tasks,
any specific unit SOP or directives, and an aircraft or simulator as required.
1. Review the crewmember’s aviation training records.

2. Determine the appropriate aircrew task(s) to be trained.
3. Instruct the aircrew task(s) to standard.
4. Debrief the crewmembers performance.
DESCRIPTION: Prior to instruction, the instructor/trainer will review the crewmember's aviation training
records and determine the aircrew task(s) to be trained. Discuss the training requirements with the
crewmember; which should include introducing the task(s), explaining the purpose of the task(s), and
explain the standards of the task(s) to be performed. Assess the crewmember’s performance based on
the evaluation guidance IAW TC 3-04.11 and progress to the next task as required based on assessment.
Debrief trainee's overall performance by summarizing the main teaching points and discussing the
performance strengths and weaknesses.
1. Training. Training will be conducted in the aircraft, simulator or academically.

2. Evaluation. Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft, simulator or academically.
011-ACC-5200 (UH60) 6-4

TASK 5205
Evaluate Aircrew Tasks
CONDITIONS: When Required to verify the ability of a crewmember to perform specific aircrew tasks
(performance or technical) in support of the commander’s ATP, given individual training records, the
aircrew master task list, individual tasks for evaluation, required information, equipment for selected
tasks, and an aircraft or simulator as required.

2. Supervise crewmember performance of the exercise
3. Ensure crewmember complies with all evaluation considerations, warnings, cautions and
notes of the task
4. Compare observed performance to established standards
6. Debrief crewmember’s performance
DESCRIPTION: The evaluator may adjust elements in the scenario as an evaluation technique. Evaluator
may omit some crew coordination actions as an evaluation technique. When evaluating a
trainer/instructor/evaluator, the evaluator should perform some actions in role reversal. In role reversal,
the evaluator performs as the crewmember being evaluated and the crewmember being evaluated
performs as the evaluator (performing this task). The evaluator should intentionally inject some errors
into his/her actions to evaluate the crewmember’s ability to assess performance. The evaluator must
inform the crewmember being evaluated when role reversal is taking place and when normal roles are
resumed. The instructor must never let the crewmember’s performance errors exceed system limitations
or instructor ability to recover from the error. Task standards are minimum performance standards for
normal conditions. The instructor must account for abnormal conditions while assessing a crewmember’s
performance. Indicators of whether a crewmember is likely to perform to standard in normal conditions
include the magnitude and duration of deviations from established parameters.
1. Training: Training will be conducted in the aircraft, simulator, or academically.

2. Evaluation: Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft, simulator, or academically.
011-ACC-5205 (UH60) 6-5

TASK 5300
Administer Aircrew Member Evaluation
CONDITIONS: When required to determine the training status of a crewmember. Given individual
training records, the aircrew master task list (MTL), individual tasks for evaluation, required information
and equipment for selected tasks, and an aircraft or in a compatible simulator as required.

2. Confirm purpose of the evaluation.
3. Identify evaluation points.
4. Develop evaluation scenario.
5. Inform crewmember of evaluation scenario.
6. Explain evaluation procedure IAW TC 3-04.11.
7. Evaluate Aircrew Academic Knowledge per applicable ATM, Task 5105, and IAW TC 3-04.11.
8. Evaluate Aircrew Task(s) per the applicable ATM, Task 5205, and IAW TC 3-04.11.
10. Debrief crewmember’s performance IAW TC 3-04.11 (Evaluation Sequence).
DESCRIPTION: The evaluator must first confirm purpose of evaluation and determine the method(s) of
evaluation. The evaluator must then identify evaluation points. When developing an evaluation scenario,
as a general rule, the evaluator should develop the scenario consistent with the aircraft type and unit
METL. When evaluating, the trainer/evaluator may perform some actions in role reversal. In role reversal
the trainer/evaluator performs as the crewmember being trained/evaluated and the crewmember being
trained/evaluated performs as the trainer/evaluator (performing this task). The trainer/evaluator should
intentionally inject some errors into his/her actions to evaluate the crewmember’s ability to instruct and
assess performance. The trainer/evaluator must inform the crewmember being trained/evaluated when
role reversal is taking place and when normal roles are resumed.
Note: Examples of evaluation methods include (but are not limited to) written, oral, and hands-on.
Note: Evaluation points are areas of concentration within the evaluation to ensure examinee knowledge
of and/or application of a specific concept, procedure, process, or skill. Evaluation points must relate to
the purpose of the evaluation and are not hazing mechanisms but always reinforce job performance in
the unit's assigned mission).
Note: The maximum amount of time allotted for the academic evaluation should not be longer than 2
hours.
1. Training. Training will be conducted in the aircraft, simulator or academically.

2. Evaluation. Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft, simulator or academically.
011-ACC-5300 (UH60) 6-6

TASK 5555
Develop an Emergency Global Positioning System Recovery Procedure (Manual Only)
CONDITIONS: Given a tactical or aeronautical map with current obstruction information. A mission
planning system with digital maps and a recent chart updating manual (CHUM) may be used to aid in
developing this procedure.
STANDARD: Appropriate common standards and the following additions/modifications: Develop an
emergency GPS recovery procedure in sequence that includes pilot information, planning minima,
plan view, profile view, landing area diagram, and receives command approval.
DESCRIPTION:
1. Crew action.
a. Select The Most Suitable Recover/Landing Area. Select an area based on METT-TC and
obstacles. Ensure proper coordination for airspace de-confliction has been accomplished.
b. Final Approach Segment (figure 1):
(1) Final Approach Segment – The final approach segment begins at the FAF and ends at
the MAP.
(2) Determine the MAP (normally associated with the landing area or threshold).
(3) Determine the FAF. The minimum distance is 3 NM from the MAP. The MAX length is
10 NM. The optimum length is 5nm. The width is 2.4 NM (1.2nm on either side of
centerline).
Figure 1. Final approach segment

c. Determine the MAHF (figure 2):
(1) Determine the MAHF for the landing area.
(2) The minimum distance is 3 NM and the MAX distance is 7.5 NM from the MAP. The
optimum distance is 5 NM. The holding pattern leg will not exceed 3 NM. The width is 4 NM
(2 NM on either side).
Solution: (A)(rounded up nearest 100 feet) + (B) 1000 feet = (C)(MAHF Altitude)
(A) = Highest obstacle within 10 NM centered on the MAHF
Figure 2. MAHF altitude calculation diagram

d. Missed Approach Segment (figure 3):
(1) The missed approach segment will start at the MAP and ends at a holding point designated
by a MAHF.
011-ACC-5555 (UH60) 6-7
(2) Optimum routing is straight ahead (within 15° of the final approach course) to a direct
entry. A turning missed approach may be designated if needed for an operational
advantage, but is not discussed in this task due to the complexity of determining obstacle
clearance.
(3) The area of consideration for missed approach surface and the 20 to 1 obstacle
clearance evaluation for all rotary wing.
Figure 3. Missed approach segment
e. Intermediate Approach Segment (figure 4).

(1) The intermediate segment begins at the IF and ends at the FAF.
(2) Determine the IF. The minimum distance is 3 NM and the MAX distance is 5 NM from
the IF to the FAF. The width is 4 NM (2 NM on either side).
Figure 4. Intermediate approach segment

f. Initial Approach Segment (figure 5.)
(1) The initial approach segment begins at the IAF and ends at the IF.
(2) Determine the IAF. Up to three IAFs are allowed. The minimum distance is 3 NM from
the IF and the MAX distance is 10 NM. The width is 4 NM (2 NM on either side).
011-ACC-5555 (UH60) 6-8

Figure 5. Initial approach segment
g. Determine the MSA for the Landing Area (figure 6).

(1) Use the off route obstruction clearance altitude or off route terrain clearance
altitude elevation from the en-route low altitude (ELA) chart for the area of operations,
if available.
(2) Select the highest altitude within 30 NM of the MAP.
(a) If an ELA is not available, the minimum sector altitude will be determined by adding
1000 feet to the maximum elevation figures (MEF). When a MEF is not available, apply
the 1000 feet rule to the highest elevation within 30 NM of the MAP.
(b) Minimum sector altitudes can be established with sectors not less than 90° and with
sector obstacle clearance having a 4 NM overlap. Use the figure below for determining
MSA.
Solution: (A) (rounded up nearest 100 feet) + (B) 1000 feet = (C)(MSA)
(A) = Highest obstacle within 30 NM centered on the MAP
Figure 6. Minimum sector altitude
011-ACC-5555 (UH60) 6-9

h. The Procedures Diagram (figure 7).
Figure 7. Sample of emergency GPS diagram

(1) The procedure diagram may be computer generated or hand sketched. The diagram
need not be as detailed as a DOD approved chart, but must provide all data as outlined in
the example to execute the procedure.
(2) The Plan View. The plan view will include the following:
i. The highest obstacle altitude (MSL) in BOLD.
(1) The approach course (degrees magnetic), IAF, IF, FAF, MAP, MAHF holding pattern, obstacles,
and MSA. It also includes the terms.
 “FOR VFR TRAINING and EMERGENCY USE ONLY” twice.
 “PPS REQUIRED.”
(2) Minimums section. The minimums section will include the following. The
minimum descent altitude, visibility, and the height above landing (HAL). Use figure 8
to compute the landing visibility minimum based on HAL.
(3) Landing area sketch. The landing area sketch includes a drawing/diagram of the landing area
and the elevation of the highest obstacle within the landing area (if applicable).
011-ACC-5555 (UH60) 6-10

2. Procedures. Prior to publication, the diagram will include, as a minimum, all items included in the
example diagram.
HAL
Landing Visibility ½ ¾ 1
Figure 8. Height above landing diagram
a. Flight Check. Complete a flight check under VMC in an aircraft to finalize the procedure and
validate the diagram. Once a successful flyability/suitability check has been completed, the
diagram will be validated by the developer in the lower marginal data area.
b. Once validated by the developer, the procedure must be approved by the appropriate
authority in the lower marginal data area prior to publication. The flight should validate the
following:
(1) Locations – IAF, IF, FAF, MAP, and MAHF.
(2) Obstacles.
(3) Approach course.
(4) Obstacle clearance.
(5) Altitudes – Minimum decision altitude (MDA), FAF, IF, IAF, MSA/Holding pattern altitude.
Note. All WPTs (IAF, IF, FAF, MAP, and MAHF) will be verified by two separate GPS
navigation systems, such as DGNS, EGI, PLGR. At least one will have PPS. If unable to
complete a suitability/fly-ability check due to the operational environment, the
commander should consider an elevated risk when using this recovery procedure.
1. Training may be conducted academically.
2. Evaluation may be conducted academically.
REFERENCES: Appropriate common references, FAA Handbook 8260.3, FAA Order 8460.42, and FAA Order
7130.3.
011-ACC-5555 (UH60) 6-11

011-ACC-5555 (UH60) 6-12
MODULE 7
Aviation Leader Tasks

011-ACC-6000
Conduct Troop Leading Procedures
Status: Approved
7-1
Conditions: As a company-level leader (CDR, PL, AMC) in a flight company with the necessary personnel, aircraft, and equipment, given a higher
headquarters mission order and commander’s intent, standardized METL, and company planning cells. The company is equipped with appropriate
communications systems, and has received the latest intelligence assessment for current and future operations and the unit standard operating
procedure.
Standards: Conduct troop leading procedures as a framework for planning and preparing for operations to include:
- Employ the eight step troop leading model to maximize available planning time while developing plans and preparing their unit for an operation.
- Adapt the sequence steps to meet the mission, situation, and available time.
- Modify the assessments
- Update tentative plans
- Assess preparation as subsequent orders arrive continually.
Performance Steps
Cue: The leader receives the mission in the form of a mission order from higher headquarters or upon recognition that an action is required by the
company due to an emerging situation and initiates the following actions:
1. Receive the Mission. *
a. Deliver a confirmation brief to the higher commander.

Note: verify understanding of the higher commander’s intent and concept of operations.
b. Obtain clarification on any portions of the higher headquarters plan, as required.
c. Conduct an initial assessment of the situation.
d. Allocate the time available for planning and preparation:

(1) Employ reverse planning.
(2) Identify critical times.
(3) Estimate how much time each event will consume.
(4) Allocate one-third of available time for leaders’ planning and issuing the OPORD.
(5) Allocate two-thirds of available time to subordinate echelons’ for planning and preparation needs.
2. Issue a Warning Order. *

Note: The leader issues a WARNORD after the initial assessment, which includes the following information:
- The mission or nature of the operation.
- The time and place for issuing the OPORD.
- Units or elements participating in the operation.
- Specific tasks not addressed by unit standard operating procedures (SOP).
- The timeline for the operation.

NOTE: The leader issues additional WARNORDs throughout the TLP as needed when new information is available.
3. Make a tentative plan. *
a. Conduct mission analysis using the Mission, Enemy, Terrain and Weather, Troops and Support Available, Time Available, and Civil
considerations (METT-TC) format.
(1) Analyze the higher headquarters' mission order.
Note: in order to determine how their unit contributes to the higher headquarters’ mission:
- Higher headquarters' mission and commander's intent.
- Higher headquarters' concept of operations.
- Specified, implied, and essential tasks.
- Constraints and restraints.
- Develops a restated mission.
(2) Analyze the enemy.
Note: to determine the following information:
- Enemy composition
- Enemy disposition
- Enemy strengths
- Recent enemy activities
- Enemy's ability to reinforce
- Enemy possible COAs
- Intelligence gaps
(3) Analyze the terrain and weather.
(a) Review the five military aspects of the terrain.
7-2
Note:
- Observation and fields of fire
- Avenues of approach including overland, air, and underground avenues
- Key terrain
- Obstacles
- Cover and concealment
(b) Review the five military aspects of the weather that can affect the mission.
Note:
- Visibility
- Winds
- Precipitation
- Cloud cover/ Ceiling
- Temperature and humidity
(c) Review the forecasts and considerations available from Army and Air Force weather forecast models.
(d) Develop COAs that consider the effects of weather on the mission (e.g. performance planning).
(4) Analyze troops and support available.

Note: Maintenance management, crew selection management, and fighter management are essential skills for mission success.
(a) Assess the status of forces.
(b) Assess soldiers' morale.
(c) Assess soldiers' experience and training.
(d) Assess strengths and weaknesses of subordinate leaders.
(e) Assess attached units and/or direct support forces.
(f) Assess operational readiness of equipment.

(5) Review the time available.
(a) Monitor the time available throughout the planning and execution of the operation.
(b) Determine the time-space aspects of preparing, moving, fighting and sustaining the mission.
(6) Identify civil considerations.

Note: Use the six factors that could influence the operations (known by the memory aid ASCOPE).
-Areas
-Structures
-Capabilities
-Organizations
-People
-Events
b. Develop courses of action (COAs).
Note: to determine one or more ways to accomplish the mission.
(1) Compare friendly and enemy forces.

Note: In order to analyze relative combat power.
(a) Review the elements of combat power.

Note: Elements of combat power are:
-Intelligence
-Movement and maneuver
-Fires
-Sustainment
-Protection
-Mission Command
(b) Conduct troop-to-task analysis
7-3
Note: to determine if the unit has enough combat power to accomplish the task when an enemy is not the object of a particular mission or
tasks.
(2) Develop options for different ways to accomplish the mission.
(a) Consider adherence to doctrinal requirements for the mission including tactical tasks normally assigned to subordinates.
(b) Consider identification of the decisive point where and when the unit can mass overwhelming combat power to achieve specific results
that accomplish the mission, with respect to Enemy, Terrain, Time, Civil considerations.
(c) Consider determination of what task must be achieved at the decisive point where the results must be achieved to accomplish the
mission.
(d) Consider establishment of both enemy and friendly centers of gravity affecting decisive and decision points leading to the desired end
state.
(3) Develop an initial concept of operations.
(a) Describe how the leader envisions the operation unfolding from its start to its conclusion or end state.
(b) Identify the best way to use the available terrain.
(c) Employ unit strengths against enemy weaknesses.
(d) Determine fire support requirements.
(e) Develop graphic control measures.
(f) Convey understanding of the concept of operations.
(g) Prevent fratricide.
(h) Clarify the task and purpose of the main effort.
(i) Describe minimum controls required by the operation that still allow subordinate units freedom of action within which to exercise disciplined
initiative.
(4) Assign responsibilities for each task to a subordinate.
(5) Prepare a COA statement and sketch for each COA that includes the following information:
Note:
-Form of movement or defense to be used
-Designation of the main effort
-Tasks and purposes of subordinate units
-Necessary sustaining operations
-Desired end state
-Review of each COA to ensure it meets the criteria of suitable, feasible, acceptable, distinguishable, and complete.
c. Conduct COA analysis (hasty war games) for each COA through the operation from start to finish.
(1) Compare each COA with the enemy’s most probable COA.
(2) Visualize a set of actions and reactions to determine what can go wrong and what decision will likely have to make as a result.
d. Compare the results of each war gamed COA by weighing the results in terms of advantages, disadvantages, strengths, and weaknesses.
e. Determine which COA to execute based on the comparison of factors such as mission accomplishment, time available to execute the operation,
risks, results from unit reconnaissance, subordinate unit tasks and purposes, casualties incurred, posturing of the force for future operations, and
professional judgment.
4. Initiate movement. *
7-4
Note: under the following circumstances:
- Directed by higher headquarters
- Required to continue mission preparation
- Position the unit for mission execution
- Time is short
- Required by the task
5. Conduct Reconnaissance. *
Note: The leader conducts reconnaissance to seek or confirm information requirements.
a. Employ the results of war gaming to identify information requirements.
b. Complement the higher headquarters’ information collection plan.
c. Employ a variety of methods to develop information required for planning, such as: map reconnaissance, imagery and intelligence products,
aerial reconnaissance (manned or unmanned), reconnaissance and surveillance units, and leaders reconnaissance.
6. Complete the plan. *

Note: The leader incorporates the results of the reconnaissance into the selected COA to complete the plan or order, to include:
a. Prepare overlays, as needed.
b. Refine the indirect fire target list and direct fire plan (if applicable).
c. Coordinate the sustainment with signal requirements.
d. Conduct final coordination with adjacent units and higher headquarters before issuing the order.
e. Update the tentative plan based on reconnaissance.
7. Issue the order. *
a. Supplement the order with graphics and/or control measures.
b. Employ the standard five-paragraph OPORD format or unit SOP for mission briefings.
c. Issue the order using a sand table, detailed sketch, maps, and other products to assist in developing common understanding.
8. Supervise the plan. *

Note: The leader monitors mission preparations, refines the plan, coordinates with adjacent units, and supervises and assesses preparations.
a. Conduct rehearsals IAW 011-AVC3-0005 to accomplish the following actions:
(1) Practice essential tasks.
(2) Identify weaknesses or problems in the plan.
(3) Coordinate subordinate element actions.
(4) Improve Soldier understanding of the concept of operations.
(5) Foster confidence among Soldiers.
(6) Identify decision points, branches, and sequels.
b. Determine what type of rehearsal to use to assess preparations: back brief, combined arms rehearsal, support rehearsal, and/or battle
drill rehearsal.
(Asterisks indicates a leader performance step.)
7-5
Evaluation Guidance: None
Evaluation Preparation: None
PERFORMANCE MEASURES GO NO-GO N/A

1. Received the Mission.
2. Issued a Warning Order.
3. Made a tentative plan.
4. Initiated movement.
5. Conducted Reconnaissance.
6. Completed the plan.
7. Issued the order.
8. Supervised the plan.
7-6
011-ACC-6001
Conduct Aviation Mission Briefing
Status: Approved
7-7
Conditions: As a company-level leader (CDR, PL, AMC) in a flight company given a higher headquarters mission order and commanders intent,
standardized METL, company planning cells and a unit SOP. The company is equipped with digital and analog communications systems, and has
received the latest intelligence assessment for current and future operations. The leader has the appropriate doctrinal references, SOPs, and applicable
checklists to facilitate briefing the mission. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP 4.
Standards: Conduct aviation mission briefings to include:
Review all steps for preparing an effective briefing as described in ADP 6-0
Brief the audience on the situation, mission (who, what, when, where, why, and how), mission execution, service support, and command and signal to
ensure complete understanding of the mission.
7-8
Performance Steps
1. Review steps for preparing an effective briefing.
Note:
a. Plan-Analyze the situation and prepare a briefing outline.
b. Prepare-Collect information and construct the briefing.
c. Execute-Deliver the briefing.
d. Assess-Follow up as required.
2. Brief audience on situation.

Note:
a. Enemy forces.
b. Friendly forces.
3. Brief audience on mission.

Note: (who, what, when, where, why, and how).
4. Brief audience on mission execution.

Note:
a. Commander’s intent.
b. Concept of operation.
c. Specific instructions to subordinate units.
d. Fire support.
e. Coordinating instructions.
5. Brief audience on service support.

Note:
a. Services and transportation.
b. Medical and personnel services.
c. Special mission-equipment and mission-essential equipment.
6. Brief audience on command and signal.
7. Receive a confirmation brief, as required.
8. Prepare for follow on actions.

1. Reviewed steps for preparing an effective briefing.
2. Briefed audience on situation.
3. Briefed audience on mission.
4. Briefed audience on mission execution.
5. Briefed audience on service support.
6. Briefed audience on command and signal.
7. Received a confirmation brief, as required.
8. Prepared for follow on actions.
9. Referenced relevant doctrine and SOPs in briefing preparation.
7-9
011-ACC-6002
Conduct Aviation Mission Rehearsals
Status: Approved
7-10
standardized METL, company planning cells, and a unit SOP. The company is equipped with digital and analog communications systems, and has
received the latest intelligence assessment for current and future operations. The leader has a script for the rehearsal and all participants and attendees
are prepared to conduct the rehearsal. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP 4.
Standards: Conduct aviation mission rehearsals to include:
-identify the type of rehearsal to conduct

- identify the method of rehearsal to employ
- Determine all responsibilities of key participants for each phase of
the rehearsal - conduct the rehearsal as described in ADP 6-0.
Special Conditions: Pending the technique of rehearsal being performed, apply the following conditions: Full Dress Rehearsal - All participating
Soldiers and systems. - Conduct rehearsal on terrain similar to the area of operations, initially under good lighting conditions, and then in limited visibility.
Key Leader Rehearsal - Only key leaders and its subordinate units participate. Selected leaders rehearse the plan while traversing the actual or similar
terrain (commanders often use this technique to rehearse fire control measures for an engagement area during defensive tasks). Small-scale replicas of
terrain or buildings substitute for the actual area of operations (leaders not only explain their plans, but also walk through their actions or move replicas
across the rehearsal area or sand table). Terrain-Model Rehearsal - Accurately constructed terrain model. Clear SOP that states how to build the model
so it is accurate, large, and detailed enough to conduct the rehearsal. Digital Terrain-Model Rehearsal - Local area network which provides copies of the
digital model to take back to their headquarters for a more detailed examination. High-resolution imagery over elevation data thereby creating a fly- through
or walk-through. Holographic imagery that produce the view in three dimensions. Model hot links graphics, detailed information, unmanned aircraft
systems, and ground imagery to key points providing more insight into the plan. Sketch Map Rehearsal - Sketch map in place of a terrain model; large
sketches ensure all participants can see as each participant walks through execution of the operation. Participants move markers on the sketch to
represent unit locations and maneuvers. Map Rehearsal - Map and operation overlay of the same scale used to plan the operation. Network Rehearsal -
Wide-area networks or local area networks. All participants require working information systems, the OPORD, and graphics.
7-11
Performance Steps
1. Identify the type of rehearsal.
Note: The rehearsal is a coordination event, not an analysis. It does not replace war-gaming. Commanders war-game during the military decision-
making process (MDMP) to analyze different courses of action to determine the optimal one. a. Back brief. b. Combined arms rehearsal. c. Support
rehearsal. d. Battle drill or SOP rehearsal.
2. Identify the method of rehearsal.

Note: a. Full dress rehearsal. b. Key leader rehearsal. c. Terrain model rehearsal. d. Digital terrain model rehearsal. e. Sketch map rehearsal. f.
Map rehearsal. g. Network rehearsal.
3. Determine responsibilities of key leaders for each phase of the rehearsal as described in ADP 6-0.
Note:
a. Rehearsal planning.
(1) Leader (CDR / PL / AMC) responsibilities.
(2) PIC / Flight Lead responsibilities.
b. Rehearsal preparation.
(1) Commander / PL responsibilities.
(2) SP/AMC/Flight Lead responsibilities.
(3) TACOPS/SAFETY/IP/MTP responsibilities.
(4) Supported/Supporting HQ responsibilities.
c. Rehearsal execution.
(1) Leader (CDR / PL / AMC) responsibilities.
(2) SP/AMC/Flight Lead responsibilities.
(3) TACOPS/SAFETY/IP/MTP responsibilities.
(4) Participant responsibilities.
(5) Subordinate leader responsibilities.
(6) Recorder responsibilities.
d. Leader’s rehearsal assessment.
4. Conduct rehearsal.
Note:
a. Perform necessary actions before the rehearsal.

Note:
(1) Introduction and overview.
(2) Orientation.
(3) Rehearsal script.
a) Agenda (includes critical events, contingencies and battle drills to be rehearsed).
b) Response sequence.
(4) Ground rules.
b. Perform necessary steps during the rehearsal.

Note:
(1) Enemy forces deployed.
(2) Friendly forces deployed.
(3) Initiate action.
(4) Decision point.
(5) End state reached.
(6) Reset.
c. Perform necessary actions after the rehearsal.

Note:
(1) The leader conducts an after action review.
(2) FRAGORD affects any changes resulting from lessons learned or modifications to existing plan.

1. Identified the type of rehearsal.
2. Identified the method of rehearsal.
3. Determined responsibilities of key leaders for each phase of the rehearsal as described in ADP 6-0.
4. Conducted rehearsal with applicable doctrine and SOPs.
7-12
011-ACC-6003
Conduct a Mission
Status: Approved
7-13
recently completed the planning, briefing, and rehearsal of the mission to be executed. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP 4.
Standards: Conduct the mission according to published directives and regulations, the unit's tactical standard operating procedures and the higher
headquarters commander's intent. Ensure the subordinate element(s) arrive at briefed locations on the timelines specified in the mission order. Direct
the mission, achieves the commander's intent and makes decisions based on the mission variables for planned and unplanned contingencies. Take
measures to prevent fratricide. Conduct the mission through completion or until released by the supported commander.
7-14
Performance Steps
1. Select specific unit mission from the METL.
Note: METL task is selected based on mission given by higher headquarters.
2. Direct the aircrews to the briefed positions.
3. Oversee the aircrew’s launch of mission aircraft(s).
4. Ensure the flight crosses the line of departure (LD)/start point (SP) at the specified time.
a. Coordinate forward passage of lines with friendly units and air defense/fire support elements.
b. Employ applicable flight and movement techniques to remain undetected and unengaged by ground threats and enemy air defenses.
Note: If detected, conduct maneuvers as briefed or per SOP and continue mission, execute a contingency plan, or make a decision based
on METT-TC.
c. Ensure aircrews maintain routes, loiter positions, and altitudes per requirements and METT-TC factors, in coordination with the supported unit
responsible for the area of operations.
d. Ensure aircrews conduct reconnaissance along the air route.
5. Maintain communications applicable for support of higher echelon headquarters and supported ground/air elements.
6. Maintain level of interoperability (LOI).

Note: if employing UAS.
7. Submit reports to higher headquarters to include:
a. Situation reports (SITREPs).
b. Weather.
c. Fuel, ammunition, rockets, and missile (FARM) report.

Note: as required.
d. Consolidated battle damage assessment (BDA) (initial and refined per SOP and/or mission guidance) reports, as required.
8. Ensure aircrews complete missions.

Note: In accordance with mission variables, SMETL, and commander's intent.
9. Conduct AAR in accordance with (IAW) Task 011-ACC-6004.

1. Selected specific unit mission from the METL.
2. Directed the aircrews to the briefed positions.
3. Oversaw the aircrew’s launch of mission aircraft(s).
4. Ensured the flight crosses the line of departure (LD)/start point (SP) at the specified time.
5. Maintained communications applicable for support of higher echelon headquarters and supported
ground/air elements.
6. Maintained level of interoperability (LOI).
7. Submitted reports to higher headquarters to include:
8. Ensured aircrews complete missions.
9. Conducted AAR in accordance with (IAW) Task 011-ACC-6004.
7-15
011-ACC-6004
Conduct Formal and Informal After Action Reviews
Status: Approved
7-16
recently completed the mission to be reviewed. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP 4.
Standards: Conduct formal and informal after action reviews to include:
- Identify actions to sustain and improve individual and collective task performance
- Provide immediate feedback about training, tasks, or missions
-Identify the characteristics of formal/informal AARs
- Perform AAR planning and preparation procedures
- Conduct the AAR as a professional discussion of the event (focused on performance standards that enable Soldiers to discover for themselves what
happened, why it happened, and how to sustain strengths and improve on weaknesses)
- Perform AAR follow-up procedures.
7-17
Performance Steps
1. Identify the characteristics of Formal AARs.
Note:
a. More time to prepare.
b. More time to conduct.
c. Complex training aids.
d. Scheduled before-hand.
e. Conducted where best supported.
f. Conducted to gain maximum training benefit.
g. Normally for company-level and above.
2. Identify the characteristics of Informal AARs.

Note:
a. Conducted by internal chain of command.
b. Less time to prepare.
c. Less time to conduct.
d. Simple training aids.
e. Scheduled or held when needed.
f. Conducted at training site.
g. Conducted when resources are limited.
h. Normally for individual, crew, team, and platoon-level training.
i. Held prior to higher-level formal AAR.
3. Perform AAR Planning Procedures.
a. Answer the following questions.

Note:
(1) When and where will AARs be conducted?
(2) Who will attend the AAR?
(3) Who will observe the training or other event?
(4) Who will conduct the AAR?
(5) What will be discussed? Will the AAR follow the mission planning sequence or be event-driven?
(6) What training aids will be used during the AAR?
(7) Will there be AARs for unit elements before the unit’s AAR?
(8) What is the time allotted for the AAR?
(9) Who will observe each specific event?
(10) What will be the content of the AAR performance worksheet (i.e., matrix of events vs. tasks, task steps or techniques with space for recording
evaluation of performance)?
(11) What statistics should be collected?
(12) What will be the structure of the AAR?
(13) What training will observers/evaluators receive?
(14) When and where will AAR rehearsals be held?
(15) What is the format of the After Action Report?
b. Take action and monitor status of actions.
c. Determine milestones for completion of actions.
4. Perform AAR Preparation Procedures.

Note:
a. Review training objectives, mission, orders and doctrine as applicable.
b. Review the unit’s plans and Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs).
c. Prepare the selected AAR site.
d. Observe training or other event (take notes).
e. Evaluate task proficiency.

Note: Consider the unit's performance of each mission essential task and any other collective task.
(1) Use the task, conditions and standards documentation to evaluate the task.
(2) Record GO or NO-GO for each task performance measure.
f. Develop a discussion outline to guide the AAR.

Note:
(1) By chronological order.
(2) By key event or issue.
(3) By selected battle system(s).
g. Organize the selected AAR site.
7-18
h. Conduct AAR rehearsal.
i. Address topics.
Note:
(1) Introduction and rules.
(2) Objectives and intent.
a Training or mission objectives.
b Commander’s mission and intent.
c Opposing Forces (OPFOR) commander’s mission and intent.
d Relevant Tactics, Techniques and Procedures (TTPs).
e Orders (WARNOs, FRAGOs, OPORDs).
(3) Plans (offensive, defensive, workload, priorities).
(4) Events and actions.
a Key issues or actions before, during and after execution events.
b Summary of events.
c Results of events and actions.
d Assessment of results (right or wrong).
e How events occurred.
f Why events occurred.
g Other courses of action.
h How performance should be improved.
j. Address other issues.

Note:
(1) Soldier leader skills (strengths and weaknesses).
(2) Tasks to sustain or improve.
(3) Statistics.
(4) Safety considerations.
(5) Environmental considerations.
k. Address lessons learned.
l. Acknowledge specific Soldiers making unusual or significant contributions.
m. Summarize objectives and results.
5. Conduct the AAR.
a. Assemble AAR participants.
b. Provide AAR guidelines and basic rules.
c. Review mission objectives.
d. Review what was supposed to happen.

Note:
(1) Address commander’s mission, intent and plan.
(2) Address the Mission, Enemy Terrain, Troops, Time Available and Civil Considerations (METT-TC).
e. Address the OPFOR mission, intent and plan.
f. State whether the mission was accomplished.
g. Address what happened.
h. Determine what was right or wrong with what happened.
i. Identify how it happened.
j. Identify why it happened.
k. Determine how the task or mission could be accomplished differently.
l. Create an opportunity for general discussion of other important issues.
m. Guide summarization of the AAR results by unit leader.
n. Provide closing comments.

7-19
o. Permit the unit leader to hold an informal AAR with the unit to review lessons learned if desired.
p. Meet privately with unit leader to discuss mission issues.
q. Conduct a separate AAR with any observers and OPFOR commander to assess performance or improve plans.
6. Perform AAR follow–up procedures.
a. Record proficiency assessments in leader blocks.
b. Direct corrective actions to respond to tasks requiring retraining.
c. Prepare an After Action report.

Note:
(1) Exercise or mission objective.
(2) Exercise or mission conditions.
(3) Exercise or mission results (GO/NO-GO, train/sustain, or train to improve).
(4) Unit strengths and weaknesses.
(5) Problems encountered.
(6) Lessons learned.
(7) Conclusion.
(8) Recommendations for change in training or mission execution to improve or sustain proficiency.
d. Update unit METL assessments if applicable.
e. Access the Center for Army Lessons Learned (CALL) website to document mission lessons learned.

1. Performed AAR Planning Procedures.
2. Performed AAR Preparation Procedures.
3. Conducted the AAR.
7-20
MODULE 8
Aircrew Coordination Training

Aircrew Coordination Training
This chapter describes the background of aircrew coordination development. It also
describes the aircrew coordination principles and objectives, as found in the aircrew
coordination training-enhancement (ACT) program.
Note. Digitization of the crew compartments has expanded and redefined the lines of
responsibility for each crewmember. The enhanced ability for either PI to perform most
aircraft/system functions from their crew station breaks down the standard delineation of duties
and has added capabilities and potential distractions, in training and in combat. This could mean
that during an unforeseen event, one PI may attempt to resolve the situation rather than seeking
assistance from or even communicating that action with the other crewmember. It is essential for
the PC to brief specific duties prior to stepping into the aircraft. Effective sharing of tasks relies
on good crew coordination and information management.
1. AIRCREW COORDINATION BACKGROUND AND PLANNING STRATEGY. An analysis of U.S.

Army aviation accidents revealed that a significant percentage of aircraft accidents resulted from one or more
aircrew coordination errors committed during and even before the flight mission. Often, an accident was the
result of a sequence of undetected crew errors that combined to produce a catastrophic result. Additional
research showed that even when crews actually avoided potential accidents, these same errors could result in
degraded performance that jeopardized mission success. A systematic analysis of these error patterns identified
specific areas where crew-level training could reduce the occurrence of such faults and break the chain of errors
leading to accidents and poor mission performance.
a. Aircrew coordination patterns begin with the accomplishment of crew-level pre-mission planning,
rehearsal, and AARs. Pre-mission planning includes all preparatory tasks associated with accomplishing the
mission. This would include assigning crewmember responsibilities and conducting all required briefings
and brief-backs. Pre-mission rehearsal involves the crew collectively visualizing and discussing expected
and potential unexpected events for the entire mission. Through this process, all crewmembers discuss and
think through contingencies and actions for difficult segments, equipment limitations and failures, or
unusual events associated with the mission and develop strategies to cope with possible contingencies
(METT-TC).
b. Each crewmember must actively participate in the mission planning process to ensure a common
understanding of mission intent and operational sequence. The PC prioritizes planning activities so that
critical items are addressed within the available planning time. Crewmembers must then mentally rehearse
the entire mission by visualizing and discussing potential problems, contingencies, and assigned
responsibilities. The PC ensures that crewmembers take advantage of periods of low workload to review or
rehearse upcoming flight segments. Crewmembers should continuously review remaining flight segments
to identify required adjustments, making certain their planning is consistently ahead of critical lead times.
c. After a mission or mission segment, the crew should debrief, review, and critique major decisions,
their actions, and task performance. This should include identifying options and factors that were omitted
from earlier discussion and outline ways to improve crew performance in future missions. Remember, this
discussion and critique of crew decisions and actions must remain professional. "Finger pointing" is not the
intent and shall be avoided; the emphasis should remain on education with the singular purpose of
improving crew and mission performance.
2. AIRCREW COORDINATION PRINCIPLES. Broadly defined, aircrew coordination is the cooperative
interaction between crewmembers necessary for the safe, efficient, and effective performance of flight tasks.
The essential principles and qualities of aircrew coordination are described in figure 1.
ACC - ACT (UH60) 8-1

Figure 1. Crew coordination principles
a. Communicate effectively and timely. Good team relationships begin with effective communication
among crewmembers. Communication is effective when the sender directs, announces, requests, or offers
information; the receiver acknowledges the information; and the sender confirms the receipt of information,
based on the receiver's acknowledgment or action. This enables the efficient flow and exchange of
important mission information that keeps a crew on top of any situation that arises.
(1) Announce and acknowledge decisions and actions. To ensure effective and well-coordinated
actions in the aircraft, all crewmembers must be kept informed and made aware of decisions, expected
movements of crew and aircraft, and the unexpected individual actions of others. Each crewmember
will announce any actions that may affect the actions of other crewmembers. In turn, communications
in the aircraft must include supportive feedback that clearly indicates that crewmembers acknowledge
and correctly understand announcements, decisions, or directives of other crewmembers.
(2) Ensure that statements and directives are clear, timely, relevant, complete and verified. These are
qualities that must describe the kind of communication that is effective. Considering the fleeting
moments of time in a busy aviation environment, only one opportunity may exist to convey critical and
supporting information before tragedy strikes. That information must be clearly understood, not
confusing, and said at the earliest opportunity possible. It must be applicable to the events at hand to
support the needs and security of the mission. The information must include all elements needed to
make the best decision based on its urgency, and the communication must come with ability of proven
confirmation and without redundancy. It must also include the crew's use of standard terminology and
feedback techniques that accurately validate information transfer. Emphasis is on the quality of
statements associated with navigation, obstacle clearance, instrument readouts, and emergencies.
Specific goals include the following:
ACC-ACT (UH60) 8-2

(a) Crewmembers consistently make the required callouts. Their statements and directives are
always timely. Their response to unexpected events is made in a composed, professional manner.
(b) Crewmembers actively seek feedback when they do not receive acknowledgment from
another crewmember. Crewmembers should always acknowledge the understanding of intent and
request clarification when necessary.
(3) Be explicit. Crewmembers should use clear, concise terms, standard terminology, and phrases that
accurately convey critical information. Crewmembers must avoid using terms that have multiple
meanings, such as "Right," "Back up," or "I have it." Crewmembers must also avoid using indefinite
modifiers such as, "Do you see that tree?" or "You are coming in a little fast."
b. Sustain a climate of ready and prompt assistance. The requirement to maintain a professional
atmosphere by all members of the team begins with the team leadership of the PC. However, all
crewmembers must equally respect the value of other crewmember’s expertise and judgment regardless of
rank, duty or seniority. Every member has a responsibility to maintain SA for mission requirements, flight
regulations, operating procedures, and safety. Each crewmember must be willing to practice advocacy and
assertiveness should the situation demand a different course of action, as time permits. It is critical to
maintain a crew climate that enables the opportunity to apply appropriate decision-making techniques for
defining the best course of action when problems arise. Courses of action may demand that assistance be
directed to other crewmembers or could be voluntary assistance that is offered in a timely manner,
depending on time constraints and information available. All crewmembers must remain approachable,
especially in critical phases of flight when reaction time is at a premium.
Note. The two-challenge rule allows one crewmember to assume the duties of another
crewmember who fails to respond to two consecutive challenges automatically. For example, the
P* becomes fixated, confused, task overloaded, or otherwise allows the aircraft to enter an
unsafe position or attitude. The P first asks the P* if he or she is aware of the aircraft position or
attitude. If the P* does not acknowledge this challenge, the P issues a second challenge. If the P*
fails to acknowledge the second challenge, the P assumes control of the aircraft.
c. Effectively manage, coordinate, and prioritize planned actions, unexpected events, and workload
distribution. The crew performing as a team should avoid distractions from essential activities while
distributing and managing the workloads equally. Both the technical and managerial aspects of coping with
normal and unusual situations are important. Proper sequencing and timing guarantees that the actions of
one crewmember support and mesh with the actions of the other crewmembers. Responsible effort must be
used to ensure that actions and directives are clear, timely, relevant, complete, verified and coordinated
with minimal direction from the PC.
(1) Direct assistance. A crewmember will direct or request assistance when they cannot maintain
aircraft control, position, or clearance. A crewmember will also direct assistance when being overloaded
with tasks or unable to properly operate or troubleshoot aircraft systems without help from the other
crewmembers. The PC ensures that all crew duties and mission responsibilities are clearly assigned and
efficiently distributed to prevent the overloading of any crewmember, especially during critical phases
of flight. Crewmembers should also watch for workload build-up on others and react quickly to adjust
the distribution of task responsibilities.
(2) Prioritize actions and equitably distribute workload. Crewmembers are always able to identify and
prioritize competing mission tasks. Crewmembers should never ignore flight safety and other high-
priority tasks. Crewmembers appropriately delay low-priority tasks until those tasks do not compete
with tasks that are more critical. Crewmembers consistently avoid nonessential distractions so that these
distractions do not affect task performance (for example, a sterile cockpit) or ability to help another
crewmember. Crew actions should reflect extensive review of procedures in prior training and pre-
mission planning and rehearsal.
ci. Provide situational aircraft control, obstacle avoidance, and mission advisories. Although the P* is
responsible for aircraft control, the other crewmembers may need to provide aircraft control information
regarding aircraft position (for example, airspeed or altitude), orientation, obstacle avoidance, equipment
and personnel status, environmental and battlefield conditions, and changes to mission objectives or
ACC-ACT (UH60) 8-3

evolving situations of the mission (SA). Crewmembers must anticipate and offer supporting information
and actions to the decisionmaker, which is usually the PC or may be the AMC in a mission related
situation. Specific goals include the following:
(1) SA. Crewmembers must anticipate the need to provide information or warnings to the PC or P*
during critical phases of the flight or mission. The PC must encourage crewmembers to exercise the
freedom to raise issues or offer information about safety or mission related matters. In turn, the
crewmembers will provide the required information and warnings in a timely and professional manner.
None of this could be accomplished without cross-monitoring performance and crew tasks.
(2) Mission changes and updates. Crewmembers should routinely update each other while highlighting
and acknowledging mission changes. Crewmembers must take personal responsibility for scanning the
entire flight environment, considering their assigned workload and areas of scanning. Each
crewmember needs to appropriately adjust individual workload and task priorities with minimal verbal
direction from the PC when responding to emergencies and unplanned changes of the mission.
(3) Offer assistance. A crewmember will provide assistance, information, or feedback in response to
another crewmember. A crewmember will also offer assistance when he or she detects errors or sees
that another crewmember needs help. In the case where safety or mission performance is at risk,
immediate challenge and control measures must be assertively exercised. A crewmember should
quickly and professionally inform and assist the other crewmember committing the error. When
required, crewmembers must effectively implement the two-challenge rule with minimal compromise
to flight safety. This means that crewmembers must continually cross-monitor the actions of other
crewmembers and remain capable of detecting their errors. Such redundancy is particularly important
when crews are tired or overly focused on critical task elements and thus more prone to make errors.
Crewmembers must discuss conditions and situations that can compromise SA. These include, but are
not limited to, stress, boredom, fatigue, and anger.
3. AIRCREW COORDINATION OBJECTIVES. Aircrew coordination principles and objectives originate
from and are fundamentally supported by a set of individual, professional skills. Each crewmember is
responsible for attaining the leadership skills of effective communication, resource management, decision
making, SA, team building, and conflict resolution. When crewmembers are actively using these skills and
practicing aircrew coordination principles, results can be seen and measured to determine if the objectives of the
aircrew coordination program are being met. The goals of the program have been defined by the following
aircrew coordination objectives:
a. Establish and maintain team relationships. Establish a positive working relationship that allows the
crew to communicate openly, freely, and effectively in order to operate in a concerted manner where a
climate of professional assistance is easily found and promptly provided.
b. Establish and maintain efficient workloads. Manage and coordinate priorities and execute the mission
workload in an effective and efficient manner with the redistribution of task responsibilities as the mission
situation changes. Flight duty responsibilities are performed in a timely manner where mission needs are
always anticipated.
c. Exchange mission information. Establish all levels of crew and mission communications using
effective patterns and techniques that allow for the flow of essential data and mission advisories among all
crewmembers in a timely and accurate manner.
d. Cross-monitor performance. Cross-monitor each other's actions and decisions to ensure workloads and
crew actions are performed in a coordinated manner and to standard. Cross-monitoring crewmember
performance keeps a crew ready to provide aircraft and mission advisories to each other and helps reduce
the likelihood of errors affecting mission performance and safety.
4. STANDARD CREW TERMINOLOGY. To enhance communication and aircrew coordination, crews
should use words or phrases that are understood by all participants. The crew must use clear, concise terms that
can be easily understood and complied with in an environment full of distractions. Multiple terms with the same
meaning should be avoided. DOD FLIP contains standard terminology for radio communications. The
appropriate operator's manuals contain standard terminology for items of equipment.
a. Table 1 is a list of other standard words and phrases crewmembers may use.
ACC-ACT (UH60) 8-4

Table 1. Examples of standard words and phrases
Standard word or
Meaning of standard word or phrase
phrase
Abort Terminate a preplanned aircraft maneuver.
Affirmative Yes.
Arizona No anti-radiation missiles remaining.
Bandit An identified enemy aircraft.
Bingo Fuel state needed for recovery.
Blind No visual contact of friendly aircraft/ground position. Opposite of “VISUAL”.
Immediate action command to perform an EMERG maneuver to deviate
Break from the present ground track; will be followed by the word “RIGHT,”
“LEFT,” “UP” or “DOWN.”
Command by the P* for a specified procedure to be read from the CL by the
Call out
other crewmember.
Specific surface target/object has been acquired and is being tracked with
Target/object Captured
an on-board sensor.
Cease fire Command to stop firing but continue to track.
No obstacles present to impede aircraft movement along the intended
ground track. Will be preceded by the word “nose,” “tail,” or “aircraft” and
Clear followed by the direction (for example, “LEFT,” “RIGHT,” “SLIDE LEFT” or
“SLIDE RIGHT”). Also indicates that ground personnel are authorized to
approach the aircraft.
Command to change altitude up or down; normally used to control masking
Come up/down
and unmasking operations.
(1) Establish communication with….(followed by the name of the element).
(2) Sensor contact at the stated position.
Contact (3) Acknowledges sighting of a specified reference point (either visually or
via sensor).
(4) Individual radar return within a GROUP or ARM.
Controls Refers to aircraft flight controls.
Deadeye LASER designator system inoperative.
An alert of the unintentional or undirected movement of the aircraft; will be
Drifting
followed by the word “RIGHT,” “LEFT,” “BACKWARD,” or “FORWARD.”
Command to make an emergency exit from the aircraft; will be repeated
Egress
three times in a row.
Execute Initiate an action.
Expect Anticipate further instructions or guidance.
Firing Announcement that a specific weapon is to be fired.
Command to fly an assigned compass heading. (This term generally used in
Fly heading
low-level or contour flight operations.)
Go ahead Proceed with your message.
Go AJ Directive to activate anti-jam communications.
Go plain/red Directive to discontinue secure operations.
Go secure/green Directive to activate secure communications.
Hold Command to maintain present position.
ACC-ACT (UH60) 8-5

Horizontal movement of aircraft perpendicular to its heading; will be followed

Hover
by the word “LEFT” or “RIGHT.”
Inside PRI focus of attention is inside the cockpit for longer than 5 seconds.
Command for the emergency or unexpected release of an external (sling)
Jettison load(s) or stores; when followed by the word "DOOR," will indicate the
requirement to perform emergency door removal.
LASER On Start/acknowledge LASER designation.
Lasing The speaker is firing the LASER.
Maintain Command to continue or keep the same.
To conceal aircraft by using available terrain features and to position the
Mask/unmask
aircraft above terrain features.
Mickey A HaveQuick time-synchronized signal.
Monitor Command to maintain constant watch or observation.
Move aft Command to “HOVER AFT”, followed by distance in feet.
Move forward Command to “HOVER FORWARD”, followed by distance in feet.
Negative Incorrect or permission not granted.
Negative contact Unable to establish communication with (followed by name of element).
Negative LASER Aircraft has not acquired LASER energy.

Aircrew does not have positive visual contact with the
No joy
target/bandit/traffic/obstruction/landmark. Opposite of “TALLY”.
Now Indicates that an immediate action is required.
Offset (direction) Maneuver in a specified direction with reference to a target.
Outside PRI focus of attention is outside the aircraft.
Command to place the P* radio transmit selector switch to a designated
position; will be followed by radio position numbers on the inter-
Put me up
communication panels (1, 2, 3). Tells the other crewmember to place a
frequency in a specific radio.
Release Command for the planned or expected release of an external (sling) load(s).
Remington No ordnance remaining except gun or self-protect ammunition.
Report Command to notify.
Roger Message received and understood.
Say again Repeat your transmission.
Intentional horizontal movement of an aircraft perpendicular to its heading;
Slide
will be followed by the word "RIGHT" or "LEFT."
Slow down Command to reduce ground speed.
Speed up Command to increase ground speed.
(1) (A/S) Weapons impact.
(2) (surface-to-surface) Informative call to OR/spotter, five seconds, prior to
Splash
estimated time of impact.
(3) Air-to-air target destroyed.
Wait; duties of a higher priority are being performed and request cannot be
Stand by
complied with at this time.
ACC-ACT (UH60) 8-6

Stop Command to go no further; halt present action.

Indicates that the aircraft AN/APR-39 has detected a radar threat; will be
Strobe
followed by a clock direction.
Sighting of a target, non-friendly aircraft, enemy position, landmark, traffic,
or obstruction positively seen or identified; will be followed by a repeat of the
Tally
word “TARGET,” "TRAFFIC" or "OBSTRUCTION" and the clock position.
Opposite of No Joy.
Target An alert that a ground threat has been spotted.
Terminate Stop LASER illumination of a target.
Refers to friendly aircraft that present a potential hazard to the current route
Traffic of flight; will be followed by an approximate clock position and the distance
from your aircraft with a reference to altitude (high or low).
Positive three-way transfer of the flight controls between the crewmembers
Transfer of controls (for example, "I have the controls“, "You have the controls," and "I have the
controls").
Command to deviate from present ground track; will be followed by words
"RIGHT" or "LEFT," specific heading in degrees, a bearing ("Turn right 30
Turn
degrees), or instructions to follow a well-defined contour ("Follow the draw
at 2 o'clock").
Unable Indicates the inability to comply with a specific instruction or request.
Indicates PRI radio selected; will be followed by radio position numbers on
Up on
the inter-communication panels ("Up on 1, up on 3").
Visual Sighting of a friendly aircraft/ground position. Opposite of “BLIND”.
Weapons hot/cold/off Weapon switches are in the “ARMED”, “SAFE” or “OFF” position.
Wilco I have received your message, I understand and I will comply.
Winchester No ordnance remaining.
Increase/decrease the sensor’s focal length. Zoom “IN/OUT” is normally
followed by “ONE, TWO, THREE or FOUR”: to indicate the number of fields
Zoom In/Out
of view (FOVs) to change.
(Note. It is recommended only one change in or out at a time be used for the FOV.)
b. Table 2 is an example of crew coordination callout.
Table 2. Example of aircrew coordination callout

P: “Wires, 12 o’clock.”
P*: “Wires in sight; climbing right to cross at the pole. Clear right and above.”
CE: “Clear right and above.”
P: “Clear left and above.”
CE: “Clear of the wires.”
P*: “Descending left.”
P: “Clear left and below.”
ACC-ACT (UH60) 8-7

c. Table 3 is an example of acceptable navigation statements.
Table 3. Example of acceptable navigation statements
Orientation to terrain feature relative to the aircraft’s “Directly ahead,” “Out your right door,” or “On your
current heading: right side.”
Terrain locator information: “The hill at your 2 o’clock position” or “Straight ahead
to the pond.”
Initial turning command: “Turn left” or “Turn right.” When the aircraft is above
NOE altitudes, a heading may be given; for
example, “Turn right to 320 degrees.”*
Command given when the P has verified that the “Stop turn.”
desired heading has been achieved:
Clock position associated with a specific terrain “Along the tree line at 2 o’clock.”
feature to prevent the P* from misinterpreting the
exact heading described:
d. Table 4 is an example of properly sequenced and timed actions.
Table 4. Example of properly sequenced and timed actions
P* While at a hover, announces his intent to turn right before doing so.
P Focuses his attention outside the aircraft in the direction of movement to provide adequate
warning of obstacles and announces, “Tail clear left.”
CE Depending on seat assignment announces, “Tail clear left’ or “Tail clear right.”
P* Initiates the right turn.
ACC-ACT (UH60) 8-8

MODULE 9
UH-60 Appendix
Appendix A
UH-60 Aircraft Series Qualification

A-1. ADDITIONAL AIRCRAFT SERIES QUALIFICATION. Additional aircraft series qualifications will
be done according to an approved USAACE POI/TSP and this ATM. A qualified SP, IP, SI, or FI will conduct all
qualifications. An entry will be made on the DA Form 7122-R upon the completion of the training. At the
crewmember’s next closeout, the qualification will be documented in Part V remarks section of the DA Form 759.
A-2. MISSION IDENTIFIERS. Mission identifiers such as MH, UH, HH, and VH are mission identifiers.
Aviators are considered trained when selected mission tasks have been evaluated by an SP/IP/SI/FI.
A-3. H-60A+ DIFFERENCES TRAINING. Prior to flight RCM will receive the USAACE approved academic
training IAW TSP H-60A+ Operators Course.
A-4. H-60L SERIES QUALIFICATION. Initial H-60L series qualification may be conducted locally. NCMs
do not have additional academic and flight requirements for UH60L qualification. (NCMs are considered L qualified
upon initial UH60A qualification.) H-60L qualification will consist of the following training:
a. Academic training. The RCM will receive training and demonstrate a working knowledge of the RCM
academic training topics (H-60L) listed below. TM 1-1520-237-10 is the reference for the following academic
training topics:
 Performance planning.
 Operating limitations.
 T700-GE-701C/D engines.
 Improved durability gearbox.
 Miscellaneous aircraft improvements.
b. Flight training. The RCM will receive 1 hour of flight training in the aircraft. As a minimum, they will
perform the tasks in table A-1.
Table A-1. RCM flight tasks for H-60L series qualification
Task Task Title
1010 Prepare a Performance Planning Card
1022 Perform Preflight Inspection
1024 Perform Before-Starting-Engine Through Before-Leaving-Helicopter Checks
1070 Respond to Emergencies (ENG failure at altitude and ECU/DECU lockout at a
minimum)
Flight Instruction Hours
Qualification training 1.0
A-5. H-60L SERIES MP/ME QUALIFICATION. Initial H-60L series MP/ME qualification may be conducted
locally by a qualified ME. H-60L MP/ME qualification will consist of the following training.
a. Academic Training. The MP/ME will receive training and demonstrate a working knowledge of the topics
listed below. TM 1-1520-237-10 and TM 1-1520-237-MTF are the references for the following MP/ME
academic training topics (H-60L):
 Starting engine checks.
 Engine run-up and system checks.
 Maximum power check.
011-237/280-ACSQ 9-1
b. Flight Training. The MP/ME will receive a proficiency based evaluation in the aircraft, at minimum; he will
perform the tasks listed in table A-2.
c. Flight time listed in table A-2 will not be combined with flight time required by table A-1.
Table A-2. Flight tasks for H-60L series maintenance test pilot/maintenance test
pilot evaluator qualification
Task Task Title
4088 Perform starting engine checks
4090 Perform engine run-up and systems checks
4220 Perform maximum power check
MP Task Training Proficiency Based
A-6. H-60A/L QUALIFICATION. Initial H-60A/L qualification may be conducted locally by a SP, IP SI, or FI
qualified in the H-60A/L, as appropriate. The RCM and NRCM qualification will consist of the following training.
RCMs qualified in the H-60M are exempt from the 1.0 flight hour requirement in Table A-3 but must demonstrate
task proficiency to qualified IP/SP in the H-60A/L aircraft.
Note. Although the HH is a mission identifier and would normally only require mission task training,
the H-60A/L has a different Operators manual and CL (TM 1-1520-253-10) and therefore
requires differences training in addition to mission task training.
a. Academic training (RCM). The RCM will receive training and demonstrate a working knowledge of the
topics listed below. The appropriate operator’s manual is the reference for the following academic RCM
training topics (H-60A/L).
 H-60L academics (if not previously H-60L) in accordance with A-1.
 Mission medical interior cabin systems.
 H-60A/L avionics systems.
 Computer based trainer.
b. Academic training (NRCM). The NRCM will receive training and demonstrate a working knowledge of the
topics listed below. The appropriate aircraft operator’s manual is the reference for the following
NRCM academic training topics (H-60A/L/M).
 Mission medical interior cabin systems.
 Operating limitations, restrictions and capabilities.
c. Ground training (RCM). Prior to flight training in a H-60A/L, the RCM will receive static ground training in
the aircraft performing tasks 1253 Operate FMS/CDU and Task 1254
Operate MFD.
d. Flight training (RCM). The RCM will receive 1 hour of flight training in the aircraft. As a minimum, the RCM
will perform the tasks listed in table A-3.
Table A-3. RCM flight tasks for H-60A/L series qualification
Task Task Title
1016 Perform internal load operations
1022 Perform preflight inspection
1024 Perform before-starting-engine through before-leaving-helicopter checks
1032 Perform radio communication procedures
1062 Perform slope operations
011-237/280-ACSQ 9-2
Table A-3. RCM flight tasks for H-60A/L series qualification
Task Task Title
1162 Perform emergency egress
1168 Perform command instrument system procedures

* If conducting an H-60L qualification in an H-60L all tasks in tables A-1 and A-3 must be
completed. Minimum flight training required is 1.0
d. Flight training (NRCM). The NRCM will receive 1 hour of flight training in the aircraft. As a minimum, the
NRCM will perform the tasks listed in table A-4.
Table A-4. NRCM flight tasks for H-60A/L series qualification

Task Task Title
1020 Prepare aircraft for mission
1026 Perform airspace surveillance
A-7. HH-60A/L SERIES MP/ME QUALIFICATION. Initial HH-60A/L series MP/ME qualification may be
conducted locally by a qualified ME. If the aviator is a previously qualified MP/ME in a H-60A/L then upon
completing HH-60 qualification in accordance with table B-3 the MP/ME will be an HH-60A/L MP/ME.
Note. Although the HH is a mission identifier and would normally only require mission task training,
the H-60A/L has a different Maintenance Flight Manual (TM 1-1520-253-MTF) and therefore
requires differences training in addition to mission task training.
Note. In the absence of a H-60A/L/M aircraft or qualified ME during the annual MP/ME evaluation
or for MP/ME RL progression, the commander may authorize the maintenance task training and
evaluation in a H-60 A/L/M to complete the requirements.
A-8. H-60M SERIES QUALIFICATION. Initial H-60M series qualification for RCMs is conducted
under an approved USAACE POI. NRCM qualification is conducted locally by a SP, IP SI, or FI qualified in the
H-60M, as appropriate. H-60M qualification for NCMs will consist of the following training.
a. Academic training. The NRCM will receive training and demonstrate a working knowledge of the
academic training topics listed below. The aircraft operator’s manual is the reference for the following
academic training topics:
 Aircraft improvements and differences from UH60A/L
 Operating limitations, restrictions and capabilities.
011-237/280-ACSQ 9-3
b. Flight training. The NRCM will receive 1 hour of flight training in the aircraft. As a minimum, the NRCM will
perform the tasks in table A-5, page A-4.
c. IP qualification. The following outlines the only authorized methods to become an instructor pilot (IP) in
the H-60M:
(1) For Aviators previously qualified as an IP in the H-60A/L, complete the H-60M series transition at
USAACE or approved NETT.
(2) Complete the IP qualification as approved by HQDA G3/5/7 (DAMO-AV) IAW AR 95-1.
(3) H-60M Series qualified Aviators that are also qualified as an IP in the H-60A/L, M Series IP training and
validation may be conducted locally by an SP. At a minimum, the validation will include M specific ATM
tasks and emphasis on aircraft systems differences. “H-60M IP Transition” will be annotated on the
individual’s the DA Form 7122-R and the remark included during the individual’s next DA Form 759
closeout.
(4) For Aviators that are previously H-60M qualified that are not qualified as an H-60 IP, attend the course
of instruction at USAACE designed for H-60 IP qualification. Once IP qualified, Series IP training and
validation may be conducted locally by an SP.
d. MP qualification. The following outlines the only authorized methods to become series qualified as a
maintenance test pilot (MP) in the H-60M:
(1) For aviators previously qualified as a MP in the H-60A/L and are also H-60M Series qualified, complete
the H-60M MP Series Transition taught at the USAACE.
(2) For aviators previously qualified as a MP in the H-60A/L and are also H-60M Series qualified, complete
the H-60M MP Series Transition taught by the NETT.
(3) Complete the MP qualification as approved by HQDA G3/5/7 (DAMO-AV) IAW AR 95-1.
(4) For aviators that are previously H-60M qualified but are not qualified as an MP in the H-60A/L, attend
the course of instruction at USAACE designed for H-60 A/L MP qualification followed by the “H-60M MP
Series Transition”.
(5) All aviators qualified by any of the methods above are still subject to unit ATP integration and RL
progression per the unit, TC 3-04.11, and this manual before being designated by the commander to serve in
a crewmember status (PC, IP, MP, ME).
Table A-5. Flight tasks for H-60M NRCM series qualification
Task Task Title
011-237/280-ACSQ 9-4
Appendix B
UH-60 Aircraft System/Equipment Qualification
B-1. AIRCRAFT SYSTEM/EQUIPMENT QUALIFICATIONS. Equipment/system qualifications will be
conducted according to the appropriate TSP, new equipment training (NET), interim statement of airworthiness
qualification, or AWR, as applicable. If a TSP is applicable, it may be obtained by writing to Commander, United
States Army Aviation Center, and ATTN: ATZQ-TDS-T, Fort Rucker, Alabama 36362-5000. As new equipment is
fielded, the level of training required will be determined by Commander, United States Army Aviation Center, Fort
Rucker, Alabama. A qualified SP, IP, SI or FI will conduct all qualifications. Document additional qualifications on
Part V, remarks section of DA Form 759 closeout and DA Form 7122-R.
B-2. M240H MACHINE GUN. Qualification for the M240H machinegun will be in accordance with TC 3- 04.45.
B-3. ANVIS HUD QUALIFICATION TRAINING. Qualification training will provide the aviators with
the knowledge, skills, and techniques required to integrate HUD operations into NVG flight. Training in the aircraft
will be with the aviator at a station with access to the flight controls and wearing ANVIS with HUD attached. A
HUD-qualified IP, SP or UT will be at the other station with access to the flight controls. HUD qualification
training may be conducted concurrently with NVG refresher and mission training.
Note. The academic training and all training flights (except the last one) may be conducted by a
HUD-qualified NVG UT, providing the RCM receiving the training is designated NVG RL 2. A HUD-
qualified NVG IP/SP must conduct the last flight.
Note. Once qualified, the RCM has no currency or evaluation requirements for HUD operations,
unless specified by the commander. Academic training must be completed before flight training
starts.
a. Academic training. Using either the HUD computer based trainer (CBT) or other training aids, the trainee
will receive instruction in the following subject areas:
 AN/AVS-7 HUD system components.
 HUD symbology.
 HUD system operations (programming, adjusting, and operating).
b. HUD flight training.

(1) Initial qualification will be in accordance with table B-1. Initial qualification will be annotated on
the DA Form 7122-R and DA Form 759. Some RCMs may require additional flight periods to achieve a
satisfactory level of proficiency with the ANVIS HUD. ANVIS HUD training requires the RCM to develop
new scanning habits. Time must be allowed to absorb this new information and develop the new scan
patterns.
(2) HUD qualification. Units using a HUD-modified SFTS will use the training program in table B-1.
Table B-1. Heads-up display qualification
Training day 1 2 3
Aircraft 1.0* 1.0 1.0
Cumulative (1.0)* 2.0 3.0
*(1.0) indicates 1.0 hours of time may be logged in a HUD-modified SFTS.
B-4. EXTENDED RANGE FUEL SYSTEM QUALIFICATION TRAINING. The ERFS TSP outlines
procedures that units will use for initial ERFS qualification. The TSP may be obtained by writing to Commander,
011-237/280-ASEQ 9-5
U.S. Army Aviation Center, ATTN: ATZQ-TDS-T, Fort Rucker, Alabama 36362-5000. ERFS qualification will
consist of the following training.
a. Academic training. The crewmember will receive training and demonstrate a working knowledge of the
topics in table B-2.
Table B-2. Extended range fuel system academic training for crewmembers
ERFS Academic Instruction Hours
ERFS familiarization 1.0
ERFS preflight, system test, and operation 2.0
ERFS fault analysis 1.0
ERFS airworthiness, limitations, handling qualities 2.0
ERFS emergency procedures 1.0
ERFS performance planning and weight and balance* 1.0
Total Hours 8.0
*This applies to RCMs only.
b. Flight training. The crewmember will receive a minimum of 1 hour of flight training in the aircraft. At a
minimum, the crewmember will perform the tasks listed in table B-3. Flight training will be conducted with the
appropriate amount of fuel in the main and internal/external fuel tanks to demonstrate the performance and
handling qualities of the aircraft.
Table B-3. Flight tasks for initial extended range fuel system qualification
Tasks Task Titles
1010 Prepare a performance planning card*
1012 Verify aircraft weight and balance*
1028 Perform hover power check*
1034 Perform ground taxi*
1038 Perform hovering flight*
1040 Perform VMC takeoff*
1048 Perform fuel management procedures
1052 Perform VMC flight maneuvers*
1058 Perform VMC approach*
1062 Perform slope operations**
1064 Perform a roll-on landing*
1066 Perform extended range fuel system operations*
1070 Respond to emergencies
Total hours: 1.0
*These tasks are performed by RCMs only.
**Task applies to External tanks only
B-5. VOLCANO MINE DELIVERY SYSTEM. The Volcano TSP outlines procedures that units will use for
initial volcano qualification. The TSP may be obtained by writing to Commander, U.S. Army Aviation Center,
ATTN: ATZQ-TDS-T, Fort Rucker, Alabama 36362-5000. This training provides the crewmember with the
knowledge, skills, and techniques required for installation, loading, preflight, in-flight system operations, emergency
procedures, and basic employment considerations associated with Volcano. Volcano qualification will consist of the
following training.
011-237/280-ASEQ 9-6
a. Academic training. Crewmembers will receive training and demonstrate a working knowledge of the
topics in table B-4.
Table B-4. Volcano academic training
Volcano Academic Training Hours
Volcano introduction and familiarization 1.0
Fault analysis/emergency procedures and limitations 1.0
Preflight 1.0
Performance planning, drag, and weight and balance* 1.0
Employment doctrine/plan scenario* 2.0
Pre-installation requirements 0.5
Loading and unloading 0.5
Programming the system 1.0
Total Hours 8.0
*These apply to RCMs only.
b. Fight Training. The crewmember will receive 2 hours of flight training followed by a 1 hour evaluation
flight in the aircraft. At a minimum, the crewmember will perform the tasks listed in table B-5.
Table B-5. Volcano flight training
Task Task Title
1010 Prepare a Performance Planning Card*
1012 Verify Aircraft Weight And Balance*
1020 Prepare Aircraft for Mission
1022 Perform Preflight Inspection
1024 Perform Before-Starting-Engine Through Before-Leaving-Helicopter Checks
1028 Perform Hover Power Check*
1034 Perform Ground Taxi*
1038 Perform Hovering Flight*
1040 Perform VMC Takeoff*
1048 Perform Fuel Management Procedures
1052 Perform VMC Flight Maneuvers*
1058 Perform VMC Approach*
1062 Perform Slope Operations*
1064 Perform Roll-On Landing*
1070 Respond to Emergencies*
2070 Perform M-139 Volcano Operations
Flight Instruction 2.0
Evaluation** 1.0
Total Hours 3.0
*Task applies to RCMs only.
**Can be conducted in conjunction with training
011-237/280-ASEQ 9-7
Appendix C
UH-60 Non-Rated Crewmember Training
SECTION I – NON-RATED CREWMEMBER TRAINING

C-1. AIRCRAFT QUALIFICATION TRAINING. NRCMs must complete the aircraft qualification training
listed below. At the crewmembers next closeout, aircraft qualification will be documented in Part V, remarks
section, of the crewmember’s DA Form 759.
a. Academic qualification training. The NRCM must receive sufficient instruction to be knowledgeable
in all applicable topics of the ACAT and the following list of academic training subjects. The subjects may
be completed in any order, but must be completed (to include the examination) and documented in the
IATF on DA Form 7122-R before flight training. Commanders will develop a 50-question NRCM written
examination covering all applicable topics listed Aircrew Catalog of Academic Topics (ACAT) and the
following list in addition to the operator’s manual examination. Crewmembers must pass each
examination with a grade of at least 70 percent. Training will be documented according to TC 3-04.11.
The following academic training will be included in the commander’s written examination:
 Aircrew training program introduction.
 Aircrew coordination training (academic training will be conducted according to current United
States Army Aviation Center Of Excellence training support package [USAACE TSP]).
b. Flight training. The NRCM will be required to demonstrate proficiency in mandatory base (M) tasks
listed in the Master Task List (MTL). Flight training consists of 10 flight hours. This must consist of at
least 1 hour of night unaided flight time. The evaluation may be a continual evaluation. The
commander may reduce the total flight time to no less than 6.0 hours based on a recommendation
from the standardization instructor pilot (SP), instructor pilot (IP), standardization instructor (SI), or
instructor (FI) concerning the
crewmember’s proficiency. This recommendation will be annotated in the remarks section of the
crewmembers DA Form 7122-R. If the commander has selected chemical, biological, radiological,
nuclear (CBRN) requirements as part of the unit’s mission essential task list (METL), all tasks listed in
the MTL will also be trained/evaluated as required.
011-237/280-NRCM 9-8
Appendix D
UH-60 Instructions for Manual Computation of Department of
the Army Form 5701-60
D-1. DEPARTURE DATA.
a. Item 1-PA. Record forecast maximum pressure altitude (PA) for the mission location and current PA for
b. Item 2-FAT. Record forecast maximum free air temperature (FAT) for the mission location and FAT for
Note. Maximum PA and temperature will be used when computing all items in the departure
section, except for PREDICTED HOVER TORQUE, item 12, and GO/NO GO TORQUE OGE/IGE, item
10, which will be computed using forecast FAT and PA at time and location of departure.
c. Item 3-AIRCRAFT GWT. Record the total planned aircraft gross weight (GWT) at takeoff. This includes the
aircraft basic weight, crew, internal load, internal fuel, and when applicable, external stores support system
(ESSS) stores and sling load. Several times throughout the PPC, this weight will be used for computations. Use
the actual weight of the aircraft and all additions for these computations.
d. Item 4-STORES WEIGHT. Record the planned weight of any stores weight.
Note. External stores are defined as a sling load, ESSS wing stores, Volcano, or other jettisonable
items.
e. Item 5-FUEL WEIGHT. Record total planned fuel weight (internal and external) at takeoff.
f. Item 6-ATF/ETF. Record the aircraft torque factor (ATF) and engine torque factors (ETFs) in the
appropriate blocks.
g. Item 7-TORQUE RATIO. Use the aircraft TORQUE FACTOR chart to compute torque ratios (TRs) as
described below.
(1) Step 1: Enter the appropriate aircraft TORQUE FACTOR chart on the left at the appropriate
temperature. Move right to the ATF or ETF.
(2) Step 2: Move straight down to the bottom of the chart, note the torque ratio (~ TR). Record the
TORQUE RATIO.
h. Item 8-MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE. Use the appropriate MAXIMUM TORQUE AVAILABLE chart to compute
engine specification torque available as described in the steps below. (T700 engines will use the 30 MIN LIMIT
chart for computations. T701 will use 10–MINUTE -LIMIT for dual-engine computations and 2.5–MINUTE LIMIT
for single-engine computations). Mission requirements may dictate using tabular data to update maximum
torque available.
Note 1. The maximum torque available is also referred to as intermediate rated power (IRP)—
30-minute limit (T700 and T701)—or maximum rated power (MRP)—10-minute limit (T701). The
maximum torque available—2.5-minute limit (T701)—is also referred to as SINGLE ENGINE
CONTINGENCY POWER—2.5-MINUTE LIMIT or one engine inoperative (OEI).
Note 2. Certain temperature and PA combinations will exceed the aircraft operator’s
manual, chapter 5 torque limitations. This item represents actual maximum torque available values.
During normal aircraft operations, the aircraft operator’s manual, chapter 5, torque limitations,
shall not be exceeded.
(1) Step 1: Enter the MAXIMUM TORQUE AVAILABLE chart at the appropriate temperature, and
011-237/280-IMCA 9-9
then move right to the appropriate PRESSURE ALTITUDE ~ 1,000 FT.
(2) Step 2: Move down and read the SPECIFICATION TORQUE AVAILABLE PER ENGINE %
(T700), or TORQUE AVAILABLE PER ENGINE ~ % (T701).
(3) Step 3: If the ATF or an ETF is less than 1.0, multiply the SPECIFICATION TORQUE
AVAILABLE PER ENGINE % from step 2 above, by the torque ratio, item 7 (T700), to obtain maximum
torque available. An alternate method is to continue down to the TORQUE RATIO, item 7. Move left to
read the maximum TORQUE AVAILABLE ~ % per engine. Record MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE. For
T701, enter the TORQUE CONVERSION chart at the TORQUE AVAILABLE PER ENGINE
(SPECIFICATION TORQUE) ~ % scale with the TORQUE AVAILABLE PER ENGINE ~ % from step 2
above. Move up to the TORQUE RATIO from item 7.
(4) Step 4: Move left and read ACTUAL TORQUE AVAILABLE ~ %. Record MAX TORQUE
AVAILABLE.
Note 1. If the ETF is different for each engine, compute maximum torque available (single-
engine) for each engine using the torque ratio derived from the respective engine’s ETF.
Note 2. Adjust the maximum torque available as required for planned use of engine bleed air
accessories (anti-ice, cockpit/cabin heaters, AMOGS/OBOGS) according to the operator’s
manual.
Note 3. If mission requirements dictate use of other than dual engine maximum torque
available (for example time limited operations based on continuous TGT limits or 701 30 minute
TGT limits), for engines with different ETFs, dual engine torque available must be determined based
on the engine with the lower ETF (not the ATF), as the lower ETF engine will encounter time limited
TGT values first.
i. Item 9-MAX ALLOWABLE GWT OGE/IGE. Use the appropriate HOVER chart to complete MAXIMUM
ALLOWABLE GROSS WEIGHT for OGE/IGE as described below. Annotate the computed maximum
allowable gross weight OGE/IGE or the maximum gross weight per the operator’s manual, chapter 5—
whichever is less.
Note 1. If OGE capability does not exist, the MAX HOVER HEIGHT IGE, item 11, must be
computed.
Note 2. If the blade erosion kit and/or externally mounted MEDEVAC equipment is installed,
adjust the maximum allowable GWT according to the aircraft operator’s manual.
Note 3. Tab data values represent a 100-foot hover height OGE and 10-foot hover height
IGE.
(1) MAX ALLOWABLE GWT OGE.

(a) Step 1: Enter the HOVER chart at the TORQUE PER ENGINE ~ % (OGE) at the dual engine
MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE, item 8, then move right to the GROSS WEIGHT ~ 1,000 LB chart. If
the dual engine maximum torque available exceeds transmission torque limits, use the DUAL ENGINE
TRANS LIMIT line to compute the maximum allowable gross weight OGE.
(b) Step 2: Reenter the HOVER chart at the appropriate FREE AIR TEMP ~ C and move right to the
appropriate PRESSURE ALTITUDE ~ 1,000 FT, then move down to the GROSS WEIGHT ~ 1,000
LB chart. Read the maximum allowable gross weight OGE at the intersection of this step and step 1
above. Record the MAX ALLOWABLE GWT OGE.
(2) MAX ALLOWABLE GWT IGE.
(a) Step 1: Enter the HOVER chart at the TORQUE PER ENGINE ~ % (IGE) at the dual engine
MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE, item 8, then move up to the desired IGE WHEEL HEIGHT ~ FT
(normally the 10-foot line), then move right to the GROSS WEIGHT ~ 1,000 LB chart. If the dual
011-237/280-IMCA 9-10
engine maximum torque available exceeds transmission torque limits, use the DUAL ENGINE TRANS
LIMIT line to compute the maximum allowable gross weight IGE.
(b) Step 2: Reenter the HOVER chart at the appropriate FREE AIR TEMP ~ C and move right to the
appropriate PRESSURE ALTITUDE ~ 1,000 FT then move down to the GROSS WEIGHT ~ 1,000 LB
chart. Read the maximum allowable gross weight IGE at the intersection of this step and step 1 above.
Record the MAX ALLOWABLE GWT IGE.
j. Item 10-GO/NO GO TORQUE OGE/IGE. Use the appropriate HOVER chart as described below.
(1) OGE. Use maximum allowable gross weight OGE, item 9.
(2) IGE. Use maximum allowable gross weight IGE, item 9.
Note. GO/NO GO is computed using forecast FAT and PA at the time and location of departure.
(a) Step 1: Enter the chart at the appropriate FREE AIR TEMP ~ C.
(b) Step 2: Move right to the appropriate PRESSURE ALTITUDE ~ 1,000 FT.
(c) Step 3: Move down to the maximum allowable gross weight(s) OGE or IGE.
(d) Step 4: Move left to the 10-foot hover line (or appropriate WHEEL HEIGHT ~ FT that will be
used to check the GO/NO GO).
(e) Step 5: Move down to read the GO/NO GO torque value(s). Record the GO/NO GO TORQUE
OGE/IGE.
Note 1. MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE GWT OGE/IGE was determined in item 9 using maximum PA and
temperature. When the departure temperature is less than maximum, the torque required to hover
at a given gross weight is less. During the hover power check, exceeding the GO/NO GO torque
value prior to the WHEEL HEIGHT ~ FT used in step 4 above indicates the aircraft is heavier than the
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE GWT OGE/IGE (as applicable) determined in item 9 and will be
incapable of OGE/IGE operations (as applicable) when maximum PA and FAT conditions are
encountered.
Note 2. If MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE GWT OGE/IGE, item 9, was limited by the maximum gross
weight per the aircraft operator’s manual, chapter 5, exceeding this torque value prior to the
WHEEL HEIGHT ~ FT used in step 4 above indicates the aircraft is above the maximum structural
weight limit.
k Item 11-MAX HOVER HEIGHT IGE. If OGE capability does not exist, use the appropriate HOVER chart to
compute the MAX HOVER HEIGHT IGE, as described below.
(1) Step 1: Enter the HOVER chart at the appropriate FREE AIR TEMP ~ C and move right to the
appropriate PRESSURE ALTITUDE ~ 1,000 FT, then move down to the AIRCRAFT GWT ~ 1,000 LB,
item 3, then move left to the WHEEL HEIGHT  FT lines.
(2) Step 2: Reenter the bottom of the HOVER chart at the TORQUE PER ENGINE ~ % (IGE) at the
dual engine MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE, item 8, then up to the intersection from step 1 above.
Interpolate hover height as required. Record the MAX HOVER HEIGHT IGE.
Note 1. If OGE capability does exist, place OGE in this block.
Note 2. If the blade erosion kit and/or externally mounted MEDEVAC equipment is installed,
adjust the aircraft gross weight according to the aircraft operator’s manual.
l. Item 12-PREDICTED HOVER TORQUE. Use the appropriate HOVER chart as described below for torque
required to hover. Use AIRCRAFT GWT, item 3, current PA, item 1, and FAT, item 2.
011-237/280-IMCA 9-11
(1) PREDICTED HOVER TORQUE (DUAL ENGINE). Compute the torque the same as for item 10
above using the AIRCRAFT GWT, item 3, instead of the MAX ALLOWABLE GWT. Record dual engine
PREDICTED HOVER TORQUE.
(2) PREDICTED HOVER TORQUE (SINGLE ENGINE). Double the PREDICTED HOVER
TORQUE value that was computed in the step above. Record single engine PREDICTED HOVER
TORQUE.
Note 1. At the time of departure, maximum torque available may be higher than what is listed in
MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE, item 8, due to item 8 being computed using maximum FAT for the
mission.
Note 2. At the time of departure, engine performance may be increased due to a lower FAT. If this is
the case, the aircraft may be able to sustain hover capability, single engine even though MAX
TORQUE AVAILABLE, item 8, may be less than PREDICTED HOVER TORQUE – SINGLE ENGINE.
Note 3. PREDICTED HOVER TORQUE (SINGLE ENGINE) is computed using a specific wheel height. If
the hover torque exceeds the MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE the aircraft may still be capable of sustaining
single-engine hover at a lower wheel height.
m. Item 13-MIN SE AIRSPEED - IAS - WO/W STORES. Use the appropriate CRUISE chart for departure
conditions to compute the minimum single-engine airspeed with external stores and without external stores
as described below.
Note. If the aircraft will be operating without external stores, record NA in the with stores block.
(1) Step 1: Using the SE ~ 30-MIN (T700) or SE ~ 2.5-MIN (T701) line enter the bottom of the
CRUISE chart at the lowest ETF.
(2) Step 2: Follow the slant of the line up to the first intersection of aircraft gross weight (subtract
STORES WEIGHT, item 4 from AIRCRAFT GWT, item 3). Read left or right for the IAS ~ KTS. Record
MIN SE AIRSPEED– IAS – W/O STORES. If aircraft will be operating with external stores, proceed with
step 3 below.
(3) Step 3: Continue with the slant of the line to the first intersection of GW ~ 1,000 LB at the
AIRCRAFT GWT, item 3. Read left or right for the IAS ~ KTS. Record MIN SE AIRSPEED – IAS –
W/STORES.
n. Item 14-ZERO FUEL WEIGHT: Use the appropriate DD Form 365-4 from the aircraft logbook to record
ZERO FUEL WEIGHT.
(1) The zero fuel weight on the DD Form 365-4 is computed using standard, average, or estimated
weight for personnel, equipment, and fuel. Actual mission weight could vary from that on the DD Form
365-4. The method to determine adjusted zero fuel weight is described below. If the load configuration is
different than that on the 365-4, the PC has two methods available to determine aircraft ZERO FUEL
WEIGHT:
(a) Method 1: Use the appropriate DD Form 365-4 from the aircraft logbook and add additional
weights of cargo and personnel, then subtract indicating fuel. Record the ZERO FUEL WEIGHT.
(b) Method 2: This method is completed in the aircraft and described below.
011-237/280-IMCA 9-12
Note. The PC must adjust for certain hover conditions such as wind and surface condition.
(2) The zero fuel weight on the DD Form 365-4 is computed using standard, average, or estimated
weight for personnel, equipment, and fuel. Actual weights may vary greatly from those on the DD Form
365-4. Special consideration must be given to the actual weights of any items placed on the helicopter. If the
PC feels that an accurate weight cannot be estimated, compute an adjusted ZERO FUEL WEIGHT. The
method to determine adjusted zero fuel weight is described below.
Note. Use the HOVER chart from the CL to compute the adjusted ZERO FUEL WEIGHT.
(a) Step 1: Note FAT, PA, and total indicated fuel weight.
(b) Step 2: While at a hover, note wheel height and hover torque.
(c) Step 3: Enter the HOVER chart at the noted FREE AIR TEMP ~ C. Move down to the noted
PRESSURE ALTITUDE ~ 1,000 FT, then left to the GROSS WEIGHT  1,000 LB chart.
(d) Step 4: Reenter the HOVER chart at the TORQUE PER ENGINE  % (IGE) at the noted hover
torque. Move right to the WHEEL HEIGHT  FT to the noted hover height then move down to the
intersection of step 3 above. Note aircraft gross weight.
(e) Step 5: Subtract the noted total indicated (internal and external) fuel weight from the gross weight
computed in step 4 above. Record the ZERO FUEL WEIGHT.
Note. Although data needed to compute ZERO FUEL WEIGHT is noted at a hover, the calculation
should be made when practical.
o. Item 15-REMARKS: Record appropriate mission information. Examples of these may include drag factors,
fuel requirements for the mission, GO/NO GO for sling loads, and EMER SE-IAS.
(1) The EMER SE-IAS is the emergency single-engine airspeed based on the mission and briefed to
the crew for the purpose of crew coordination. This airspeed is selected from the MIN/MAX-IAS (SINGLE
ENGINE) range computed in item 29, CRUISE data, and is used immediately following an emergency that
requires adjustment to a single-engine airspeed. When an aircraft does not have single-engine capability, the
MAX ENDURANCE – IAS (DUAL ENGINE), item 24, or the OPTIMUM IAS AT MAX ALLOWABLE
GWT (SINGLE ENGINE), item 34, as appropriate, should be briefed as the emergency single-engine
airspeed.
(2) Normally only one EMER SE - IAS is selected. However, when the MIN/MAX–IAS (SINGLE
ENGINE) range, item 29, is wide, the crew may select two emergency single-engine airspeeds, one slow and
one fast based on mission profile, modes of flight, environmental conditions or other factors.
(3) There is no power margin available when operating single-engine at the MIN/MAX-IAS
(SINGLE ENGINE), item 29. These airspeeds are computed using the maximum torque available single-
engine for the lowest ETF engine. It is not recommended that the aircraft be flown at airspeeds that require
maximum power for continued single-engine flight.
(4) The GO/NO GO TORQUE for sling loads is determined by using the same process as item 10
above, using the MAX ALLOWABLE GWT OGE and a wheel height that suspends the load approximately
10 feet AGL.
D-2. CRUISE DATA.
The maximum continuous power (~ MCP) lines on the CRUISE charts are used to define power levels that an
engine can produce continuously and remain out of time limited engine operating limitations (30-minute, 10-
minute or 2.5-minute TGT values). The maximum torque available is also referred maximum rated power
(MRP)—10-minute limit (T701). The TORQUE AVAILABLE ~ 30-MIN lines (T700 and T701) and the
TORQUE AVAILABLE ~ 10-MIN lines for T701 are used to define a power level that will be limited and only
used for a defined period of time. The SE ~ 30-MIN lines (T700) and SE ~ 2.5-MIN lines (T701) represents
maximum single engine power OEI and are used to define single engine flight performance. The
011-237/280-IMCA 9-13
CRUISE charts define DUAL ENGINE aircraft performance and SINGLE ENGINE MAX TORQUE
AVAILABLE.
Note. When using the CRUISE charts, adjust torques for ETF and ATF values that are less than 1.0,
and interpolate values as required.
a. Item 16-PA. Record planned cruise PA.

b. Item 17-FAT. Record forecast FAT at the planned cruise PA.
c. Item 18-MIN/MAX–IAS. (DUAL ENGINE). Use the appropriate CRUISE chart to compute the
minimum/maximum indicated airspeeds as described below.
(1) Clean and high drag configuration:
Note. This item represents the actual maximum indicated airspeed value based on torque available.
If the planned aircraft configuration has an associated maximum airspeed limitation, note this
airspeed value in item 15, REMARKS. During normal aircraft operations, the aircraft operator’s
manual, chapter 5, airspeed limitations, shall not be exceeded.
(a) Step 1: Enter the bottom of the CRUISE chart at the ATF or transmission torque limit, whichever
is less.
(b) Step 2: Follow the slant of the TORQUE AVAILABLE ~30-MIN (T700) or ~10-MIN (T701) line
up to the first intersection of GW ~ 1,000 LB at the AIRCRAFT GWT (item 3, departure data). Read
left or right for minimum IAS ~ KTS. Record the MIN–IAS (DUAL ENGINE). If the maximum torque
available line is right of the gross weight line, record 0 for the MIN–IAS.
(c) Step 3: Continue up to the second intersection of GW ~ 1,000 LB at the AIRCRAFT GWT (item 3
departure data). Read left or right for maximum IAS ~ KTS. Record the MAX–IAS (DUAL ENGINE).
Note 1. If the maximum torque available line is to the left of (does not intersect) the GW ~
1,000 LB at the AIRCRAFT GWT (item 3, departure data), the aircraft cannot maintain dual engine
level flight for the conditions.
(2) Alternative or external load configuration
Note 2. For alternative or external load configurations, refer to the operator’s manual,
chapter 7/7A, section VI, DRAG. Determine and add together the appropriate drag multiplying
factors.
Note 3. The torque change to compensate for drag (alternative or external load
configuration) at minimum indicated airspeed is often negligible and not computed. The dual-
engine maximum indicated airspeed is adjusted for alternate or external load configuration as
follows:
(a) Step 1: Enter the CRUISE chart at DUAL ENGINE MAX–IAS, (step 3 above), then move left or
right to the curved dashed line, then move up to read ΔTRQ ~ % FOR DRAG AREA OF 10 SQ FT of
ΔF.
(b) Step 2: Multiply the ΔTRQ times the drag multiplying factor. Subtract the result from the
maximum torque available used initially step 1 above (clean and high drag configuration).
(c) Step 3 Reenter the bottom of the CRUISE chart at the adjusted torque value, follow the slant of the
TORQUE AVAILABLE ~30-MIN (T700) or ~10-MIN (T701) line and move up to the second
intersection of GW ~ 1,000 LB at the AIRCRAFT GWT (item 3, departure data). Read left or right for
MAX-IAS (DUAL ENGINE). Record the adjusted MAX IAS (DUAL ENGINE).
011-237/280-IMCA 9-14
Note. If the adjusted maximum torque available line is to the left of (does not intersect) the GW ~
1,000 LB at the AIRCRAFT GWT (item 3, departure data), the aircraft cannot maintain dual engine
level flight for the conditions.
d. Item 19-CRUISE SPEED - IAS/TAS (DUAL ENGINE). Select an IAS that falls within the range of MIN/MAX–
IAS (IAS  KTS scale). Record CRUISE SPEED-IAS (DUAL ENGINE). Enter the CRUISE chart at cruise IAS and move
laterally to the TRUE AIRSPEED ~ KTS scale. Record CRUISE SPEED-TAS (DUAL ENGINE).
e. Item 20-MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE (DUAL ENGINE). Maximum torque available (dual engine) is derived
from the CRUISE chart by referencing the TORQUE AVAILABLE ~ 30-MIN (T700) or 10-MIN (T701) ATF 1.0 line.
If the ATF is between 1.0 and 0.9, interpolation is required to determine actual maximum torque available.
Note 1. The maximum torque available may exceed the transmission torque limit. During normal
aircraft operations, the aircraft operator’s manual, chapter 5, torque limitations, shall not be
exceeded.
Note 2. Maximum torque available is derived from the cruise charts and takes into account the
effect of ram-air on engine performance at a selected airspeed. Torque values may vary when flying
at airspeeds other than the planned cruise airspeed.
(1) Step 1: Enter the bottom of the CRUISE chart at the TORQUE AVAILABLE  30-MIN line
(T700) or TORQUE AVAILABLE ~ 10-MIN (T701) line adjusted for the ATF and follow the slant of the
line up to item 4 CRUISE SPEED-IAS (DUAL ENGINE).
Note 1. If mission requirements dictate use of the T701 30-minute dual engine maximum torque
available, enter the bottom of the CRUISE chart at the TORQUE AVAILABLE ~ 30-MIN line adjusted
for the ETF of the weakest engine and follow the slant of the line up to item 19 CRUISE SPEED-IAS
(DUAL ENGINE).
Note 2. If mission requirements dictate use of T700 or T701 continuous torque available, refer to
the dual engine torque value derived from item 6, step 4 below.
(2) Step 2: Move straight down (do not follow the slant of the line) to the TORQUE PER ENGINE 
% to read the MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE. Record the MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE (DUAL
ENGINE).
accessories (anti-ice, cockpit/cabin heaters, AMOGS/OBOGS) according to the operator’s manual.
Note 2. The maximum torque available ~ 30 MIN for the (T700) engine and ~ 10 MIN limit for the
(T701) can also be derived from the CL. If the ATF is between 1.0 and 0.9, interpolation is required.
f. Item 21-CRUISE TORQUE/CONT TORQUE AVAILABLE (DUAL ENGINE). Use the appropriate Cruise chart to
compute the torque required to cruise as described below.
(1) Clean and high drag configuration.
(a) Step 1: Enter the CRUISE chart at the selected cruise speed IAS in item 4 above. Move left or
right as appropriate to the GW ~ 1,000 LB at the AIRCRAFT GWT ~ 1,000 LB (item 3, departure
data).
(b) Step 2: Move down (do not follow the slant of the line) to the TORQUE PER ENGINE  % line to
read the CRUISE torque. Record the CRUISE TORQUE (DUAL ENGINE).
011-237/280-IMCA 9-15
Note. The continuous torque available is also referred to as MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS POWER
(MCP).
(c) Step 3: Enter the CRUISE chart at the selected cruise speed-IAS in item 4 above. Move left or
right as appropriate to the TORQUE AVAILABLE ~ MCP line; adjusted for the ETF of the weakest
engine.
(d) Step 4: Move straight down (do not follow the slant of the line) to the TORQUE PER ENGINE 
% to read the CONT TORQUE. Record the CONT TORQUE AVAILABLE (DUAL ENGINE).
Note 1. Compare the CRUISE TORQUE in step 2 with the CONT TORQUE from step 4 to determine
whether the aircraft will be operating in a time limited condition (above maximum continuous
power) for this IAS.
Note 2. The continuous torque available may exceed the transmission torque limit. During normal
exceeded.
Note 3. Adjust the continuous torque available as required for planned use of engine bleed air
accessories (anti-ice, cockpit/cabin heaters, AMOGS/OBOGS, etc.) according to the operator’s
manual.
Note 4. For alternative or external load configurations, refer to the operator’s manual, chapter
7/7A, section VI, DRAG. Determine and add together the appropriate drag multiplying factors.
(2) Alternative or external load configuration.

(a) Step 1: Enter the appropriate cruise chart at the cruise speed-IAS in item 4 above.
(b) Step 2: Move left or right as appropriate to the TRQ  % FOR DRAG AREA OF 10 SQ FT OF
F (dashed) line, and then up to find the change in torque percent for each 10 square feet of drag.
(c) Step 3: Multiply the TRQ  % times the drag multiplying factor.
(d) Step 4: Add or subtract the value in step 2 to/from the uncorrected clean or high drag cruise torque
value recorded in step 2 above. Do not exceed the dual engine transmission torque limit. Record
adjusted CRUISE TORQUE (DUAL ENGINE).
Note 1. If the new torque value exceeds the dual engine transmission torque limit, the planned
cruise airspeed must be reduced.
Note 2. The adjusted cruise torque reflects the power required to overcome the added drag.
g. Item 22-CRUISE FUEL FLOW (DUAL ENGINE).

(1) Cruise chart method. Use the appropriate CRUISE chart.
(a) Step 1: Enter the bottom of the chart at the cruise torque value computed in item 6 above.
(b) Step 2: Move up to TOTAL FUEL FLOW ~ 100 LB/HR and read cruise fuel flow. Record the
CRUISE FUEL FLOW (DUAL ENGINE).
(2) Engine fuel flow chart method. Use the SINGLE/DUAL– ENGINE FUEL FLOW chart.
(a) Step 1: Enter the chart at the INDICATED TORQUE PER ENGINE ~ % for the cruise torque
value computed in item 6 above.
(b) Step 2: Move right to the cruise PRESSURE ALTITUDE ~ 1,000 FT.
011-237/280-IMCA 9-16
(c0 Step 3: Move up to the DUAL– ENGINE FUEL FLOW ~ LB/HR line and read cruise fuel flow.
Record the CRUISE FUEL FLOW (DUAL ENGINE).
Note. Adjust as required for FAT and planned use of engine anti-ice and cockpit heater according to
the aircraft operator’s manual.
h. Item 23-MAX RANGE–IAS/TORQUE (DUAL ENGINE). Use the appropriate cruise chart to compute the
maximum range indicated airspeed as described below.
(a) Step 1: Find the intersection of the GW ~ 1,000 LB at the AIRCRAFT GWT (item 3, departure
data) and the MAX RANGE line.
(b) Step 2: Move left or right to find the MAX RANGE-IAS. Record MAX RANGE-IAS (DUAL
ENGINE).
(c) Step 3: At the intersection of the GW ~ 1,000 LB at the AIRCRAFT GWT, (item 3, departure
data), and the MAX RANGE line move down to the TORQUE PER ENGINE  % line, then read
torque for the maximum range indicated airspeed. Record MAX RANGE-TORQUE (DUAL ENGINE).
(a) Step 1: Insert the change in square feet of drag into the formula found in the operator’s manual,
chapter 7/7A: (6 KTS/10FT 2 X ΔF).
(b) Step 2: Subtract the airspeed change from the results of the formula in step 1 above from the clean
or high drag configuration MAX RANGE-IAS (DUAL ENGINE).
Example
You are flying with both cargo doors open. The change in flat plate drag area (ΔF) from
the operator’s manual, chapter 7 (DRAG) is 6.0 square feet. The equation using the “-10”
method would be as follows:
6 KTS/10 FT2 X 6FT2 drag = 3.6 KTS. Reduce maximum range airspeed by
approximately 4 knots
i. Item 24-MAX ENDURANCE-IAS/TORQUE (DUAL ENGINE). Use the appropriate CRUISE chart to compute
maximum endurance indicated airspeed and torque as described below.
(a) Step 1: Enter the bottom of the appropriate cruise chart at GW ~ 1,000 LB at the AIRCRAFT
GWT (item 3, departure data). Move up along the arc of the gross weight line to the intersection of the
MAX END AND R/C line. Move left or right as required to the IAS ~ KTS value then read maximum
endurance indicated airspeed. Record MAX ENDURANCE–IAS.
(b) Step 2: At the intersection of the GW ~ 1,000 LB line and the MAX END AND R/C line, read
straight down and find the torque value associated with MAX END–IAS. Record MAX ENDURANCE
~ TORQUE (DUAL ENGINE).
j. Item 25-CRITICAL TORQUE (DUAL ENGINE).
Note. Critical torque (CT) is the dual engine torque value, which when exceeded, may not allow the
aircraft to maintain % RPM R within normal limits under single-engine operations in the same flight
conditions.
(1) Step 1: Enter the bottom of the CRUISE chart at the lowest ETF engine and follow the SE 30-
011-237/280-IMCA 9-17
MIN line (T700) or SE 2.5-MIN line (T701) to the selected dual engine cruise speed-IAS (item 19).
(2) Step 2: Read straight down (do not follow slant of line) and record CRITICAL TORQUE (DUAL
ENGINE).
WARNING
During dual engine flight, conditions that require torque settings
greater than the critical torque indicate the pilot is operating outside
the aircraft low ETF single-engine capability. If operating dual engine
above the CT and an engine fails, malfunctions, or must be shut
down, the pilot must immediately adjust torque, airspeed, and/or
gross weight to achieve single-engine capability.
k. Item 26-MAX ALLOWABLE GWT and OPTIMUM IAS AT MAX ALLOWABLE GWT (DUAL ENGINE). Use the
appropriate CRUISE chart to compute the MAX ALLOWABLE GWT, as described below.
(a) Step 1: Enter the bottom of the CRUISE chart at the TORQUE AVAILABLE, ~30-MIN (T700) or
~10-MIN (T701) line adjusted for the ATF.
(b) Step 2: Follow the slant of the line up to the intersection of the MAXIMUM END and R/C line,
and read maximum gross weight. If the maximum torque available line is to the right of the GW ~
1,000 LB lines, enter the maximum gross weight according to the operator’s manual, chapter 5 limits.
Record MAX ALLOWABLE GWT (DUAL ENGINE).
(c) Step 3: Re-enter the cruise chart at the intersection of the MAX ALLOWABLE GWT (DUAL
ENGINE) line, as determined in step 2 above, and the MAXIMUM END and R/C line. Read right or
left as required to the IAS~KTS scale for OPTIMUM IAS AT MAX ALLOWABLE GWT. Record
OPTIMUM IAS AT MAX ALLOWABLE GWT (DUAL ENGINE).
(2) Alternative or sling load configuration.

(a) Step 1: Enter the CRUISE chart at the OPTIMUM IAS AT MAX ALLOWABLE GWT, step 3
above. Read left or right to the curved dashed line then move up to read  TRQ ~ % FOR DRAG
AREA OF 10 SQ FT of F.
(b) Step 2: Multiply the  TRQ- % by the drag multiplying factor. Subtract the result from the
uncorrected clean or high drag configuration maximum torque available noted in step 2 above.
(c) Step 3: Reenter the bottom of the CRUISE chart at the adjusted torque value from step 2, then
move up to the intersection of MAX END AND R/C line and read maximum allowable gross weight.
Record the MAX ALLOWABLE GWT (DUAL ENGINE). Read left or right for optimum IAS ~ KTS
at maximum allowable gross weight. Record the OPTIMUM IAS AT MAX GWT (DUAL ENGINE).
If the maximum torque available line is right of the GW ~ 1,000 LB line enter MAX ALLOWABLE
GWT according to the appropriate aircraft operator’s manual, chapter 5, and then read left or right from
the respective value for OPTIMUM IAS AT MAX ALLOWABLE GWT (DUAL ENGINE).
l. Item 27-MAX R/C–IAS/TORQUE (DUAL ENGINE). Use the appropriate CRUISE chart to compute maximum
rate of climb indicated airspeed and torque as described below.
(a) Step 1: Enter the cruise chart at the intersection of the GW ~ 1,000 LB at the AIRCRAFT GWT
(item 3, departure data), and the MAX END AND R/C line. Move right to intersect the TORQUE
AVAILABLE ~ 30-MIN line (T700) or ~ 10-MIN line (T701) or transmission torque limit, whichever
is less. Read straight down to determine maximum torque available at maximum endurance airspeed. If
011-237/280-IMCA 9-18
the maximum torque available is greater than the dual engine transmission torque limit from the
operator’s manual, chapter 5, use the transmission torque limit. Record MAX R/C–Torque (DUAL
ENGINE).
(b) Step 2: Subtract the torque value found in item 24, step 2 above, from the MAX R/C-Torque (step
1 above) to find the TORQUE INCREASE PER ENGINE ~ % TRQ. Note the TORQUE INCREASE
PER ENGINE.
(c) Step 3: Use the CLIMB/DESCENT charts in the aircraft operator’s manual, chapter 7/7A, section
VII. Enter the bottom of the CLIMB/DESCENT chart for clean or high drag, as appropriate, at the
TORQUE INCREASE PER ENGINE ~ % TRQ (step 2 above).
(d) Step 4: Move up to the GROSS WEIGHT ~ 1,000 LB line at the AIRCRAFT GWT (item 3,
departure data), then move left to read the RATE OF CLIMB ~ FT/MIN. Note the rate of climb.
(e) Step 5: Use the AIRSPEED SYSTEM CORRECTIONS charts in the aircraft operator’s manual,
chapter 7/7A, section IX. Enter the appropriate AIRSPEED SYSTEM CORRECTION chart for clean
or high drag at the MAX END–IAS from item 24, step 1 above. Move up to the appropriate segmented
line for the rate of climb value derived from step 4 above (R/C greater or less than 1,400 ft/min).
(f) Step 6: Move left to read the CORRECTION TO ADD ~ KNOTS. Add or subtract this value
to/from the MAX END–IAS from item 24, step 1 above. Record the resultant MAX R/C–IAS (DUAL
ENGINE).
m. Item 28-MAX ALTITUDE–MSL/MAX ENDURANCE–IAS (DUAL ENGINE). Compute MAX ALTITUDE–MSL

based on MAX END–IAS.
Note. Several different cruise charts may have to be referenced when computing the MAX
ALTITUDE–MSL. It is recommended to start with the 10,000 FT CRUISE chart and forecast
temperature.
(1) Step 1: Enter the CRUISE chart at the MAX END AND R/C line. Move left or right along the line
to the AIRCRAFT GWT (item 3, departure data).
(2) Step 2: If the intersection of MAX END AND R/C line and AIRCRAFT GWT (item 3, departure
data) is to the left of the TORQUE AVAILABLE ~ 30 MIN (T700) or 10 MIN (T701) adjusted for ATF
(flight is still possible at MAX END–IAS), move to the next higher CRUISE chart and repeat steps 1 and 2.
If the intersection of MAX END AND R/C and AIRCRAFT GWT (item 3, departure data) is to the right of
the TORQUE AVAILABLE ~ 30-MIN (T700) or 10-MIN (T701) line corresponding to the ATF (flight is
no longer possible at MAX END–IAS), move to the next lower CRUISE chart and repeat steps 1 and 2.
(3) Step 3: Record the MAX ALTITUDE–MSL (DUAL ENGINE) and MAX ENDURANCE–IAS
that will allow flight at the AIRCRAFT GWT (item 3, departure data). Interpolation between the charts is
authorized.
Note 1. Ensure FAT is adjusted for pressure altitude in the CRUISE charts.
Note 2. The torque change to compensate for drag (alternative or sling load configuration) at MAX
END–IAS is negligible and not computed.
n. Item 29-MIN/MAX–IAS (SINGLE ENGINE).Use the appropriate CRUISE chart to compute the
minimum/maximum indicated airspeeds as described below.
(a) Step 1: Enter the bottom of the CRUISE chart at the SE ~ 30-MIN (T700) or SE ~ 2.5-MIN
(T701) line adjusted to the ETF of the weakest engine, but no more than one-half of transmission torque
011-237/280-IMCA 9-19
limit single engine.
(b) Step 2: Follow the slant of the line to the first intersection of the GW ~ 1,000 LB at the
AIRCRAFT GWT, (item 3, departure data), then read left or right for minimum–IAS ~ KTS. Record
the MIN–IAS (SINGLE-ENGINE).
(c) Step 3: Continue up to the second intersection of the GW ~ 1,000 LB at the AIRCRAFT GWT,
(item 3, departure data), then read left or right for maximum–IAS. Record the MAX–IAS (SINGLE
ENGINE).
Note. If the maximum torque available line is to the left of (does not intersect) the GW ~ 1,000 LB at
the AIRCRAFT GWT (item 3, departure data), the aircraft cannot maintain single engine level flight
for the conditions. As fuel is consumed, single-engine capability may become possible.
Note 1. The torque change to compensate for drag (alternative or external load configuration) at
Note 2. The maximum indicated airspeed, single engine, is adjusted for alternate or external load
configuration as follows:
(a) Step 1: Enter the CRUISE chart at MAX–IAS (SINGLE-ENGINE) in step 3, above, then move
left or right to the curved dashed line. Move up to read ΔTRQ ~ % FOR DRAG AREA OF 10 SQ FT
ΔF.
(b) Step 2: Multiply the ΔTRQ times the drag multiplying factor. Subtract one-half the result from the
maximum torque available value used initially in step 1 above.
(c) Step 3: Reenter the bottom of the CRUISE chart at the adjusted torque value and follow the slant
of the line up to the second intersection of the GW ~ 1,000 LB at the AIRCRAFT GWT (item 3,
departure data). Read left or right for MAX–IAS (SINGLE ENGINE). Record the adjusted MAX–IAS
(SINGLE ENGINE).
Note. If the adjusted torque value is to the left of (does not intersect) the GW ~ 1,000 LB at the
AIRCRAFT GWT (item 3, departure data), the aircraft cannot maintain single engine level flight for
the conditions. As fuel is consumed, single-engine capability may become possible.
o. Item 30-CRUISE SPEED-IAS (SINGLE ENGINE). Select a CRUISE SPEED-IAS that falls within the range of
MIN/MAX – IAS (SINGLE ENGINE), item 29 above. Record CRUISE SPEED-IAS (SINGLE ENGINE). Enter the
CRUISE chart at cruise speed-IAS (SINGLE ENGINE) and move laterally to the TRUE AIRSPEED ~ KTS scale.
Record CRUISE SPEED-TAS (SINGLE ENGINE).
p. Item 31-MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE (SINGLE ENGINE). Maximum torque available (single engine) is derived
from the CRUISE chart by referencing the TORQUE AVAILABLE SE ~ 30 MIN (T700) or SE ~ 2.5-MIN (T701) ETF
1.0 line. If the ETF is between 1.0 and 0.85, interpolation is required to determine actual maximum torque
available.
Note 1. The maximum torque available may exceed the transmission torque limit. During normal
exceeded.
Note 2. Max torque is derived from the cruise charts and takes into account the effect of ram-air on
engine performance at a selected airspeed. Torque values may vary when flying at airspeeds other
than the planned cruise airspeed.
(1) Step 1: Enter the CRUISE chart at the selected IAS in item 30 above. Move left or right as
011-237/280-IMCA 9-20
appropriate to the TORQUE AVAILABLE SE ~ 30-MIN (T700) or SE ~ 2.5-MIN (T701) line and adjust
for ETF. Enter the bottom of the CRUISE chart at the ETF for engine #1 and follow the slant of the line to
the intersection of the planned CRUISE-IAS (SINGLE ENGINE) (item 30).
(2) Step 2: Read straight down (do not follow the slant of the line) to the TORQUE PER ENGINE ~
a% line and double the value. Record MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE (SINGLE ENGINE).
(3) Step 3: Repeat Steps 1-2 for the other engine if the ETFs differ.
Note 1. The maximum torque available ~ 30 MIN for the (T700) engine can also be derived from the
CL when ETF values are between 1.0 and 0.9 (utilize ETF instead of ATF and interpolate as required).
manual.
q. Item 32-CRUISE TORQUE/CONT TORQUE AVAILABLE (SINGLE ENGINE). Use the appropriate CRUISE chart
to compute the cruise torque and the continuous torque available as described below.
(a) Step 1: Enter the CRUISE chart at the selected cruise IAS in item 30 above. Move left or right as
appropriate to the GW ~ 1,000 LB at the AIRCRAFT GWT (item 3, departure data).
(b) Step 2: Move straight down (do not follow slant of line) to the TORQUE PER ENGINE% and
double the value. Record the CRUISE TORQUE (SINGLE ENGINE).
(c) Step 3: Enter the CRUISE chart at the selected IAS in item 30 above. Move left or right as
appropriate to the MCP line and adjust for the ETF of the weakest engine.
(d) Step 4: Move straight down (do not follow the slant of the line) to the TORQUE PER ENGINE 
% to read the CONT TORQUE. Record the CONT TORQUE AVAILABLE (SINGLE ENGINE).
Note 1. Compare the cruise torque to the CONT TORQUE AVAILABLE to determine whether the
IAS.
Note 2. The continuous torque available may exceed the transmission torque limit. During normal
exceeded.
Note 3. Adjust the continuous torque available as required for planned use of engine bleed air
manual.
Note 4. For alternative or external load configurations, refer to the operator’s manual, chapter
7/7A, section VI, DRAG. Determine and add together the appropriate drag multiplying factors.

(a) Step 1: Enter the appropriate cruise chart at the selected single engine cruise IAS in item 30 above,
then move left or right to the curved dashed line. Move up to read the ∆ TRQ ~ % FOR DRAG AREA
OF 10 SQ FT OF ∆F.
(b) Step 2: Multiply the ∆ TRQ ~ % by the drag multiplying factor and then double.
(c) Step 3: Add or subtract the value in step 2 to/from the uncorrected clean or high drag cruise torque
value recorded in step 2 above (do not exceed the single-engine transmission torque limit). Record the
adjusted single engine CRUISE TORQUE.
(d) Step 4: Enter the CRUISE chart at the selected IAS in item 30 above. Move left or right as
appropriate to the MCP line and adjust for the ETF of the weakest engine.
(e) Step 5: Move straight down (do not follow the slant of the line) to the TORQUE PER ENGINE 
011-237/280-IMCA 9-21
% to read the CONT TORQUE. Record the CONT TORQUE AVAILABLE (SINGLE ENGINE).
r. Item 33-CRUISE FUEL FLOW (SINGLE ENGINE).
(1) Cruise chart method. Use the appropriate CRUISE chart.
(a) Step 1: Enter the bottom of the chart at the torque value computed in item 32 above CRUISE
TORQUE (SINGLE ENGINE).
(b) Step 2: Move up to TOTAL FUEL FLOW ~ 100 LB/HR and read the cruise fuel flow. Divide the
cruise fuel flow value in half. Record the CRUISE FUEL FLOW (SINGLE ENGINE).
(2) Engine fuel flow chart method. Use the SINGLE/DUAL– ENGINE FUEL FLOW chart.
(a) Step 1: Enter the chart at the INDICATED TORQUE PER ENGINE ~ % for the cruise torque
value computed in item 32 above, CRUISE TORQUE (SINGLE-ENGINE).
(b) Step 2: Move right to the cruise PRESSURE ALTITUDE ~ 1,000 FT.
(c) Step 3: Move down to the SINGLE– ENGINE FUEL FLOW ~ LB/HR line and read fuel flow
value. Record the single engine CRUISE FUEL FLOW (SINGLE ENGINE).
Note. Adjust as required for FAT and/or planned use of engine anti-ice and for cockpit heater
according to the aircraft operator’s manual.
s. Item 34-MAX ALLOWABLE GWT and OPTIMUM IAS AT MAX ALLOWABLE GWT (SINGLE ENGINE). Use the
appropriate CRUISE chart to compute the MAX ALLOWABLE GWT, and OPTIMUM IAS AT MAX ALLOWABLE
GWT (SINGLE ENGINE), as described below.
(a) Step 1: Enter the bottom of the CRUISE chart at the TORQUE AVAILABLE SE ~ 30-MIN
(T700) or ~ 2.5-MIN (T701) line adjusted for the ETF of the weakest engine.
(b) Step 2: Follow the slant of the line up to the intersection of MAX END AND R/C line, then read
the maximum allowable gross weight. Record the MAX ALLOWABLE GWT (SINGLE ENGINE).
Read left or right for optimum IAS ~ KTS at maximum allowable gross weight. Record the OPTIMUM
IAS AT MAX ALLOWABLE GWT (SINGLE ENGINE). If the maximum torque available line is right
of the GW ~ 1,000 LB line note the maximum torque available and enter MAX ALLOWABLE GWT
(SINGLE ENGINE) according to the aircraft operator’s manual, chapter 5. Read left or right from the
respective value and record OPTIMUM IAS AT MAX ALLOWABLE GWT (SINGLE ENGINE).
Note. If the MAX ALLOWABLE GWT is less than the AIRCRAFT GWT, then the aircraft cannot
maintain single engine level flight for the conditions. As fuel is consumed, single engine capability
may become possible.
Note. The single engine maximum allowable gross weight and optimum indicated airspeed at
maximum allowable gross weight are adjusted for alternate or sling load configuration as follows:
(a) Step 1: Enter the CRUISE chart at the optimum indicated airspeed at maximum allowable GWT,
step 2 above. Read left or right to the curved dashed line then move up to read  TRQ ~ % FOR DRAG
AREA OF 10 SQ FT of F.
(b) Step 2: Multiply the  TRQ by the drag multiplying factor. Subtract one-half the result from the
uncorrected clean or high drag configuration maximum torque available noted in step 2 above.
(c) Step 3: Reenter the bottom of the CRUISE chart at the adjusted torque value from step 2, then
011-237/280-IMCA 9-22
move up to the intersection of MAX END AND R/C line and read maximum allowable gross weight.
Record the MAX ALLOWABLE GWT (SINGLE ENGINE). Read left or right for optimum IAS ~
KTS at maximum allowable gross weight. Record the OPTIMUM IAS AT MAX ALLOWABLE GWT
(SINGLE ENGINE). If the maximum torque available line is right of the GW ~ 1,000 LB line enter
MAX ALLOWABLE GWT according to the aircraft operator’s manual, chapter 5, and then read left or
right from the respective value for OPTIMUM IAS AT MAX ALLOWABLE GWT(SINGLE
ENGINE).
Note. If the adjusted torque value does not intersect the GW ~ 1,000 LB at the AIRCRAFT GWT (item
3, departure data), the aircraft cannot maintain single-engine level flight for the conditions. As fuel
is consumed, single engine capability may become possible.
t. Item 35-MAX ALTITUDE–MSL/MAX ENDURANCE–IAS (SINGLE ENGINE). Use the appropriate CRUISE chart
for the single engine MAX ALTITUDE–MSL calculation as described below. The lowest ETF for your aircraft will
be used for this computation.
Note 1. When the capability to maintain level flight after an engine failure or malfunction is not
possible, continued flight may be possible by adjusting to MAX END–IAS and adjusting collective to
the MAXIMUM TORQUE AVAILABLE to attain minimum rate of descent while descending to a lower
PA (where level flight may be possible) or jettisoning the external stores (if no allowable
altitude/temperature combination cruise charts yield a GWT greater than or equal to the AIRCRAFT
GWT, item 3, departure data).
Note 2. The torque change to compensate for drag (alternative or sling load configuration) at MAX
END–IAS is often negligible and not computed.
(1) Step 1: Enter the appropriate CRUISE chart at the MAX END AND R/C line. Move left or right
along that line until you intercept the GW ~ 1,000 LB at the AIRCRAFT GWT (item 3, departure data).
(2) Step 2: If the intersection of MAX END AND R/C line and GW ~ 1,000 LB at the AIRCRAFT
GWT (item 3, departure data) is to the left of TORQUE AVAILABLE SE ~ 30-MIN (T700) or SE ~ 2.5-
MIN (T701) line adjusted for the lowest ETF engine (flight is still possible at MAX END–IAS), move to the
next higher CRUISE chart and repeat steps 1 and 2. If the intersection of MAX END AND R/C and GW ~
1,000 LB at the AIRCRAFT GWT (item 3, departure data) is to the right of the value of TORQUE
AVAILABLE SE ~ 30-MIN (T700) or SE ~ 2.5-MIN (T701) line adjusted for lowest ETF engine (flight is
no longer possible at MAX END–IAS), move to the next lower CRUISE chart and repeat steps 1 and 2.
(3) Step 3: Record the MAX ALTITUDE–MSL SE and MAX END–IAS that will allow flight at the
AIRCRAFT GWT (item 3, departure data). Interpolation between the charts is authorized.
Note 1. Ensure FAT is adjusted for pressure altitude in the CRUISE charts.
Note 2. If aircraft is equipped with stores and no CRUISE chart will yield a MAX ALLOWABLE GWT–
(SINGLE ENGINE) that is greater than or equal to the AIRCRAFT GWT, level flight is not possible.
Subtract the weight of the stores and adjust the AIRCRAFT GWT to reflect the new AIRCRAFT GWT
(without stores) and recompute the MAX ALTITUDE–MSL (SINGLE ENGINE).
Note 3. If level flight cannot be maintained either with or without stores, record NA in MAX
ALTITUDE–MSL (SINGLE ENGINE) block.
u. Item 36-MAX ANGLE. Use the AIRSPEED FOR ONSET OF BLADE STALL chart in the aircraft operator’s
manual, chapter 5, to compute the maximum bank angle for the planned cruise IAS as described below.
(1) Step 1: Enter the chart at the cruise PRESSURE ALTITUDE ~ 1,000 FT (item 16, cruise data).
Move right to the cruise temperature FAT ~ C (item 17, cruise data).
(2) Step 2: Move down to the GROSS WEIGHT ~ 1,000 LB at the AIRCRAFT GWT (item 3,
011-237/280-IMCA 9-23
departure data), then move left to the ANGLE OF BANK  DEG chart.
(3) Step 3: Reenter the chart at the INDICATED AIRSPEED  KTS at the planned cruise airspeed
(item 19, cruise data), then move up to the ANGLE OF BANK  DEG chart. Record derived MAX ANGLE
or 60 degrees, whichever is less.
v. Item 37-VNE–IAS. Use the AIRSPEED OPERATING LIMITATIONS chart in the aircraft operator’s manual,
chapter 5, to compute the Vne as described below.
(1) Step 1: Enter the chart at the cruise FREE AIR TEMPERATURE ~ C (item 17, cruise data).
Move right to the cruise PRESSURE ALTITUDE ~ 1,000 FT (item 16, cruise data).
(2) Step 2: Move down to the GROSS WEIGHT ~ 1,000 LB at the AIRCRAFT GWT (item 3,
departure data). If the COMPRESSIBILITY LIMITS ~ FAT or the MACH LIMIT dashed temperature line
(-10 to -50 C) is reached prior to the aircraft GROSS WEIGHT ~ 1,000 LB,, stop there.
(3) Step 3: Move left to the MAXIMUM INDICATED AIRSPEED (VNE) ~ KNOTS line for the Vne
value. Record Vne-IAS.
D-3. ARRIVAL DATA. Only complete this section if arrival conditions at destination have increased from
departure data in any of the following by the minimum amount: 5 degrees Celsius, 1,000 feet PA, or 500 pounds.
Note. If mission requirements dictate the need for additional arrival information, complete the
second arrival section as described below using applicable PA, FAT and/or landing gross weight
data. Additional copies of page 2 may be added for multiple arrivals.
a. Item 38-PA. Record forecast PA for time of arrival.

b. Item 39-FAT. Record forecast FAT for time of arrival. If unavailable, use maximum forecast FAT for the
mission.
c. Item 40-LANDING GWT. Record the estimated gross weight for arrival.
d. Item 41-TORQUE RATIO. Compute the torque ratios for dual and single engine the same as item 7,
(departure data), using arrival FAT.
e. Item 42-MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE. Compute maximum torque available for dual and single engine the
same as item 8, (departure data), using arrival forecast PA and FAT.
Note. Dual engine information may also be derived from the tabular performance data in the
aircraft operator’s CL.
f. Item 43-PREDICTED HOVER TORQUE. Compute the predicted hover torque the same as item 12
(departure data), using arrival forecast PA and FAT.
g. Item 44-MAX ALLOWABLE GWT OGE/IGE. Compute the maximum allowable gross weight the same as
item 9 (departure data), using arrival forecast PA and FAT.
h. Item 45-MAX HOVER HEIGHT IGE. Compute the maximum hover height the same as item 11 (departure
data), using arrival forecast PA and FAT.
i. Item 46-MIN SE AIRSPEED IAS–WO/W STORES. Compute the minimum single-engine airspeed the same
as item 13 (departure data) using arrival forecast PA and FAT.
D-4. TABULAR PERFORMANCE DATA. See Task 1011 for an example of performance data presented in
the operator’s and crewmembers CL.
011-237/280-IMCA 9-24
Appendix E
Flight Surgeon (FS), Aeromedical Physician’s Assistant (APA),
Aviation Psychologist, Enroute Critical Care Nurse (ECCN) Training
E-1. MO AIRCRAFT QUALIFICATION TRAINING. FS, APA, Aviation Psychologist, ECCN must
complete the aircraft qualification training listed below. At the crewmembers next closeout, aircraft
qualification will be documented in Part V, remarks section, of the crewmember's DA Form 759.
a. Academic qualification training. The medical officer (MO) must receive instruction in applicable
topics from the ACAT and the following list in order to help them in their limited crew duties. The
subjects may be completed in any order. MOs are not required to take written exams for aircraft
qualification. Training will be documented according to TC 3-04.11.
b. MO academic training subjects include the following:
 IFRF/IATF Forms and Records.
 Aircrew training program introduction.
 Patient care reporting procedures (if assigned Medical Tactical tasks).
 Aircrew coordination training.
 ALSE.
 Medical protocols (if assigned Medical Tactical tasks).
c. Flight training. The MO will be required to demonstrate proficiency in all tasks listed in the MTL
Flight training will consist of 4 flight hours with a minimum of 1 flight hour logged night unaided.
The evaluation may be a continual evaluation. If the commander has selected CBRN requirements as
part of the unit’s METL, all CBRN tasks with an “X” marked under the CBRN column will also be
trained/evaluated as required. If an MO elects to perform full crewmember duties they must be
progressed using the NRCM tables located in the MTL and Appendix C.
E-2. MO TACTICAL TRAINING. Medical Tactical tasks should be assigned if MOs are on
MEDEVAC ATPs in order to help treat patients and train/evaluate Flight Medics in Medical Tactical
Tasks. Medical Tactical Tasks assigned to MOs must be trained and evaluated by a 68W N1 or other
RL1 FS/APAs. If no 68W N1 or RL1 FS/APA is available, then FS/APA may self-start Medical Tactical
tasks.
9-25
Appendix F
Cross Platform Door Gunnery Evaluation
F-1. CROSS PLATFORM TRAINING AND EVALUATION. Designated FI/SIs may perform
duties as cross platform door gunnery Aircrew Evaluator (AC-E). In order to perform duties as a
cross platform door gunnery AC-E, FI/SI must be current in the gunnery table that they are
evaluating. Additionally, FI/SIs must meet the following requirements to conduct cross platform
training and evaluation.
a. Training requirements. The FI/SI must be trained and evaluated on the following items for
their non-primary airframe:
(1) Task 1162 - Perform Emergency Egress
(2) CH-47 Armament Subsystem Emergency Procedures (UH-60 FI/SI)
(3) Armament Subsystem mounts and associated equipment; traverse, elevation, and
depression limits
b. Documentation requirements. Record training and evaluation on DA Form 7122. Use
"Academic Training Complete" entry. Remark will state "ACM trained and evaluated on
required tasks for Cross Platform Door Gunnery evaluation, IAW Appendix F of (ACFT)
ATM.
G-2. AUTHORIZATION TO PERFORM CROSS PLATFORM EVALUATION. Battalion

Commanders may authorize FI/SI that have completed the required training and evaluation listed in
paragraph F-1 to conduct cross platform door gunnery evaluations. This authorization will in
memorandum type format and kept in Gunnery Program Binder 1, Tab 2-Unit Gunnery
Qualification Memoranda.
F-3. CONTINUATION TRAINING. FI/SI authorized to conduct cross platform evaluation will
receive annual Continuation training. Continuation training will consist of all items listed in
paragraph F-1 a. Training should be conducted in conjunction with FI/SIs APART period an will
be annotated IAW paragraph F-1b.
9-26
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Uh-60 Atm 31 Jan 19

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Uh-60 Atm 31 Jan 19

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Uh-60 Atm 31 Jan 19

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the purpose of the Aircrew Training Module?

What is the purpose of the Aircrew Training Module?

What changes were made in the most recent revision of the ATM?

What changes were made in the most recent revision of the ATM?

UNITED STATES ARMY AVIATION

DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION. Approved for public release, distribution is unlimited.

Recommended ATM Changes Submitted to Flight Training Branch

Email DA Form 2028's to Flight Training Branch at:

Digitally signed by POHLMAN.MATTHEW.SCOTT.1155373764

CW5 MATTHEW S. POHLMAN, CHIEF, FLIGHT TRAINING BRANCH DATE

Digitally signed by MEACHAM.JIMMY.LEE.1110595049

COL GEORGE G. FERIDO, DIRECTOR OF TRAINING AND DOCTRINE DATE

o Added “Change Bar(s)” in the ATM to indicate a change(s)/updates

o Added Semi-Annual Flying Hour Requirements Table

o Added "Note" in MTL * Either or for evaluations

Similar and Series Group Aircraft Table

1. As designated in Training Circular (TC) 3-04.11, (Commander’s Aviation Training and

3. Series-Grouped Aircraft. The following aircraft are series grouped. Aircraft

4. Night vision device currency will be in accordance with (IAW) TC 3-04.11

AIRCRAFT FAC 1 FAC 2 FAC 3 FAC 4 NVD N H/W

Mi-17 45 30 0 0 PCG PCG PCG

PCG = Per Commander’s Guidance

SIM FAC 1 FAC 2 FAC 3 FAC 4 NRCM

Accredited Rotary Wing Synthetic Flight Training Systems (SFTS)

UH-72 SFTS UH-72A X

Raven Mission Simulator RQ-11B

Aircrew Catalogue of Academic Topics

The tasks identified with an asterisk (*) apply to RCMs only.

3. Mission operations (ATP 3-04.1, TM 4-48.09, FM 2-0, FM 3-52, TC 3-04.11, appropriate

• Air Assault operations.

H60 - ACAT 2-1

• ASE systems and employment.

5. Weapon system operation and employment (ATP 3-04.1, TC 3-04.45(.3), M60D/M240H

• Weapons initialization, arming, and safety.

• NVG limitations and operations.

H60 - ACAT 2-2

• Night vision limitations and techniques.

8. Aircraft emergency procedures and malfunction analysis (appropriate aircraft operator’s

H60 - ACAT 2-3

• Aviation life support equipment (ALSE).

H60 - ACAT 2-4

• Settling with power.*

H60 - ACAT 2-5

15. Evaluator/trainer topics FAA-H-8083-9 Aviation Instructor's Handbook. Topics in this

• The learning process.

H60 - ACAT 2-6

UH-60 Aircrew Master Tasks List

Task Training Requirements

Training Modes Proficiency Flight Evaluations* Annual Evaluations

ACC-1000 M Participate in a Crew Mission Briefing T A G I S

ACC-1500 M Participate in a Crew-Level After-Action Review T A G I S

Aviator (PI): Tactical Training

SRW-2012 O Perform Tactical Flight Mission Planning T

Aviator (PI): Mission Training (to support collective training)

237-3010 O Perform Multi-Aircraft Operations

237-4000 M Perform Prior to Maintenance Test Flight Checks T

Maintenance Evaluator (ME): Instructor/Trainer Tasks

ACC-5000 O Operate a Flight Simulator T